JP2022115211A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a performance with high amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises performance control means for controlling a performance. The performance control means can display a specific image to prompt a player to shoot a game ball to a second game area on display means. The specific image includes a first image having a predetermined display size in the display means and a second image and a third image having a display size larger than that of the first image in the display means. When a game mode is controlled to a second mode, the first image, second image, and third image can be displayed after the first variation in the second mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 86

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-200012 describes that a display screen or the like is used to produce an effect.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-163228

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in presentation in terms of enhancing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, production control means for controlling production (for example, production control section 300), and 1 game area (e.g., the left area of the game area 111) and a game area (e.g., the game area) having a second game area different from the first game area (e.g., the right area of the game area 111) 111), wherein the game control means includes a first mode (for example, a normal game state) and a second mode (for example, a specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to control whether to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition. It is executable, and the effect control means displays a specific image (for example, the first right-handed image 75, etc.) prompting the shooting of the game ball to the second game area on the display means (for example, the image display section 114). The specific image includes a first image (e.g., first right-handed image 75) having a predetermined display size on the display means and a display size on the display means that is larger than that of the first image. When there is a second image (eg, third right-handed image 518, etc.) and a third image (eg, fourth right-handed image 525, etc.) and is controlled to the second mode, the first time of the second mode After the change, the first image (for example, the first right-handed image 75 in FIG. 90(8), etc.), the second image (for example, the third right-handed image 518 in FIG. 90(9), etc.), and The gaming machine is characterized in that the third image (for example, the fourth right-handed image 525 in FIG. 91(13), etc.) can be displayed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko gaming machine is seen from the rear side. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine, and (c) is arranged at the lower left of the game board. FIG. 10 is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation|movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of starting opening switch processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the details of gate switch processing; It is a flowchart which shows the content of a 2nd big winning a prize opening switch process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a 1st big prize winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a 2nd big prize winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of the random number used in the present embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning design random number, (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of reach random numbers, (e) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the winning random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) is. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the effect control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a reserved storage area, (b) is a block showing the configuration of each of the storage unit shown in (a) It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process; It is a flow chart which shows operation of a production control part, (a) is a figure showing main processing, and (b) is a figure showing interruption processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing; 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 37; 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 37; FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of a customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 37; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of specific time saving related production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production|presentation button processing. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. It is a figure which shows the main process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process of a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial motion pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated while settings are being changed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; This is a pre-judgment performance pattern table used when a game ball wins a first start hole in a normal game state. This is a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a game ball wins a prize in a second start hole in a special time-saving game state. It is a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a game ball wins the second start hole in a specific time-saving game state. This is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance is performed based on the winning to the first starting port in the normal game state. This is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance is performed based on the winning to the second starting port in the normal game state. It is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port in the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port in the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on the winning to the second start port in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on the winning to the first start opening in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. (A), (B), (C), and (D) are explanatory diagrams of the execution time of each variable effect. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the effect control unit when the radio wave detection sensor and the game control board are disconnected while the pachinko game machine is powered on. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the effect control unit when the magnetic detection sensor and the game control board are not connected when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a diagram showing an example of an event when the game control board and the effect control board are disconnected while the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement type determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table before a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board only is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of operating an operation part during a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart when a variable production is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead operation|movement production|presentation and step-up notice production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead action effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead vibration production|presentation and the dialogue announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in the case where the anticipatory vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed before a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed after a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and a SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP ready-to-win production|presentation and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when the cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 1 in a case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determined production is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win production and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case variable probability mission production|presentation is performed during a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. 1 is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally; It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. FIG. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally; It is the example 1 of the production|presentation in the various timing of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is an example 2 of effects at various timings of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. 3 is an example 1 of production at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 3 is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 4 is timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. FIG. 5 is timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. FIG. 7 is timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. This is a modified example 1 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 2 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 3 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 in which the command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determined effect pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame role-product initial motion pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is viewed from the rear side.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins. This pachinko game machine 100 comprises a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110.例文帳に追加The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150 .

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 forming a passage for the game balls shot from below to rise to an upper position of the game area 111, and a game board 110. A guide member 113 for guiding game balls is provided on the right side of the area 111 .
In the present embodiment, an image display section 114 for displaying various images for presentation is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays decorative symbols for notifying the player of, for example, the result of a special symbol lottery (symbol variation result) as the player progresses the game. Or, a performance image by the appearance of a character or the appearance of an item is displayed.
In addition, the front surface of the game board 110 is provided with three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable accessories 115 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction on the upper side of the image display section 114 . When the three movable accessories 115 are individually described, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as "left movable accessory 115A". Also, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center is called a "middle movable accessory 115B". Also, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as "right movable accessory 115C". In addition, the three movable accessories 115 are simply referred to as the movable accessories 115 when they are not distinguished from each other. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110 . Moreover, the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

The game area 111 is provided with game pegs, windmills and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Also, in the game area 111, various accessories related to prize winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the game area 111 those game balls that have hit the game area 111 but have not entered the winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 4 described later) for detecting an out ball consisting of game balls flowing into the discharge port 117 .

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, when a game ball wins, a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) starts 121 and 2nd start port 122, and when a game ball passes through, normal A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is arranged on the game board 110 . In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, respectively, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to herein refer to a prize winning port that triggers the operation of one predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of game balls at the time of winning. It is When the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory, in which a pair of tulip-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal pattern lottery, the wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 time to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, an electric sapo state in which there are few chances of winning the second starting port 122 and an electric sapo state in which there are more chances of winning the second starting port 122 than in the no electric sapo state. is doing. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as triggered by the number of lotteries of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, it is controlled to either the state of no power supply or the power supply state. The electric sapo state is, for example, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a game state controlled by combination.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a time-saving no state with a long special symbol variation time and a time-saving state with a shorter special symbol variation time than the no time-saving state. Here, the time-saving state is a state more advantageous for the player than the time-saving non-state.
In addition, in this Embodiment, an electric support state and a time saving state shall be controlled simultaneously. Further, in the following description, the electric sapo state and time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric sapo no state and no time saving state are simply referred to as no time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, the first big prize opening 125 and the second big prize opening 126 as special electric accessories that are opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the game A normal prize winning port 127 that does not draw a lottery even if a ball wins is arranged on the game board 110.例文帳に追加A first big winning opening door 125</b>D for opening and closing the first big winning opening 125 is provided in the first big winning opening 125 . Also, the second big winning opening 126 is provided with a second big winning opening door 126</b>D for opening and closing the second big winning opening 126 . In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the first big winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the first big winning opening 125 for convenience. Further, in the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the second large winning opening door 126D may be described as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the second large winning opening door 126D for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery results and the number of pending games is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110 .

By the way, in the pachinko game machine 100 shown in FIG. located in the area. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when trying to win a prize such as the second starting port 122, the gate 124R, the first big winning port 125, the second big winning port 126, etc., the The game ball is made to flow down to the right side area. Here, the area on the left side of the game area 111 is regarded as the first game area. Also, the area on the right side of the game area 111 is regarded as the second game area.
In the illustrated example, the second starting port 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first big prize winning port 125, and the second big prize winning port 126 are arranged in the area on the right side of the game area 111. Yes, but not limited to. A second starting port 122 having an electric tulip 123, a gate 124R, a first big winning port 125, and a second big winning port 126 are arranged in the left region of the game area 111, and the first starting port 121 and the gate 124L and normal winning opening 127 may be arranged in the area on the left side of game area 111 . In this case, the area on the right side of the game area 111 is regarded as the first game area. Also, the area on the left side of the game area 111 is regarded as the second game area.

In addition, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board 200B for determining winning of special symbols, etc., and an effect control board 300B for overall control of effects are attached. In addition, on the back surface of the game board 110, various substrates (not shown) such as an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, and a lamp control board for controlling effects by various lamps and movable accessories 115 are attached. In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, a connector 200C that connects the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B, and a switching power supply that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards etc. (not shown) are provided. The connector 200C is provided with a plurality of wirings (not shown) for connecting the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. Equipped with a launcher (not shown) that fires electrically. In addition, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the shooting device one by one at a timing that is interlocked with the operation of the lever 152 by the player, and the game balls that the supply device supplies to the shooting device. and a plate 153 for temporarily storing. To this plate 153, balls to be paid out by a payout unit are put out, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is integrated with the upper and lower plates. A configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the shooting of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the shooting device, and a game ball accumulated in the tray 153. and an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the game state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various productions using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a luminous body such as an LED, and performs various effects with light depending on patterns of lighting and blinking, differences in emission colors, and the like. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example is conceivable in which it is possible to perform an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light.
The frame member 150 also has a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and FIG. 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of the sub-information display 80 arranged at the lower left of the game board.
The display device 130 of the pachinko game machine 100, as shown in FIG. A second special symbol indicator 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol indicator 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display device 221 variably displays the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The second special symbol display device 222 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 perform cycle variation (cycle display) a plurality of times with a change in display mode as one cycle (=256 ms), and stop when the special symbol variation time elapses. indicate.
The normal symbol display device 223 variably displays the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 each comprise a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the display device 130 is a first special symbol reservation display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the first special symbol display device 221, and a second special symbol display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the second special symbol display device 222. 2 special design reservation indicator 219 and normal design reservation indicator 220 which operates corresponding to reservation by normal design indicator 223 are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219 and the normal symbol reservation display device 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is determined by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be explained. When the game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbols (while the variable display for one prize is being performed), the special symbols are changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbols based on the subsequent winning. Therefore, subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to activate the special symbols for the winning game ball is not retained until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. Reserved.
It should be noted that the same processing as that for the special symbols is performed for the normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special design reservation display 219 and the normal design reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the indicator 130 has a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which two LEDs are arranged. One of the two LEDs notifies by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving state with a short special symbol variation time. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the indicator 130 has a round number indicator 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the first big prize opening 125 is activated in the big win game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and displays the number of operation rounds of the first big winning hole 125 in the jackpot game according to its lighting mode.

The indicator 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226 . The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. Lighting of the LED is started, and the LED is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Since the state confirmation display 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . The installation position of the status confirmation display 226 may be the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be displayed if possible. For example, the state confirmation display 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode, and the state confirmation display 226 may be blinked in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 221, the second special symbol display device 222, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, the round number display device 225, status indicators 224, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input for the performance. As shown in FIG. 3B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161, a production key 162 adjacent to the production button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, are arranged on the frame member 150 . In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect for accepting an operation of selecting one image from among a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates a production key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross to designate one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114 and press the production button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting the instructed image. As for the form of the input device, in addition to the production button 161 and production key 162 shown in the drawings, various input forms such as levers and handles can be adopted according to the contents of production.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment has a sub-first variable display 81, a sub-second variable display 82, a sub-first suspension display 83, and a sub-second suspension display 84 inside the game area 111. , a sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal map holding display 86, and a sub-right hitting display 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of an LED, and is dynamically illuminated. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display such as the status confirmation display 226 that indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for variably displaying the second special symbol. It is for displaying (announcing) whether or not it is inside, and each is constituted by one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it lights up. do. In other words, the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 repeatedly perform cycle display in which one flashing is one cycle (=1 second), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, Light.

It should be noted that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may be used to notify the result of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a big win, and the LED is turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first pending display 83 is for displaying the number of first pending information (first pending number) described later, and the second sub-holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second pending information ( second pending number), each consisting of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning and light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation memories (normal pattern reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the left and right LEDs light up. LED flashes.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 111 (so-called right-handed hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED turns off during the other game states.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control section and the lamp control section of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the control unit includes, as game control means, a game control section 200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like. In addition, as an effect control means, an effect control unit 300 for controlling the effect in general and a payout control unit 330 for controlling payout balls are provided.

[Structure and function of the game control part]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining winning of special symbols, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a working memory for the CPU 201. and a RAM 203 .

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to be either a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state. The game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in which there is no time-saving state is hereinafter sometimes referred to as a normal game state. Moreover, below, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 which is a time saving state may be called a time saving game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state includes a special time-saving gaming state and a specific time-saving gaming state. The special time-saving gaming state is a gaming state controlled via a jackpot game. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) reaches a specific number of times (300 times in this embodiment) This is the game state to be controlled. As a result, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is one of the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, and the specific time-saving game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. Moreover, the game control unit 200 switches between the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 switches between a specific time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. In addition, the game control unit 200, in the time-saving game state, makes the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the normal game state, shortens the normal symbol fluctuation time, extends the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. control.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . Then, a special game such as a big winning game or a small winning game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the jackpot game, the game control unit 200 keeps the open state until the first big winning port 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds has elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). It is controlled to repeat only a predetermined number of times. Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the first big winning opening 125 is opened. In addition, in the small winning game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 2 times) control to repeat. Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the second big winning opening 126 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is controlled by the suspension caused by the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the special symbol variation, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during the normal symbol variation. Sets the hold that occurs due to
In addition, the game control unit 200, the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, the information accompanying the game control such as no time saving state and time saving state change information, and the setting information of the reservation, the production control unit 300 by the command described later. send to

Furthermore, the game control unit 200, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the first big winning port 125, the second big winning port 126 and the normal winning port 127, the game ball wins. The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball according to the location. For example, when a game ball enters the first start port 121, three prize balls are entered, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, four prize balls are entered, and when a game ball enters the second big win port 126, nine prize balls are entered. and 13 prize balls when game balls enter the first big prize hole 125 and 10 prize balls when game balls enter the normal prize hole 127, respectively. Send an order (command). Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls associated therewith.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200 , the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330 . Thereby, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit 200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. , the second start opening detection unit (second start opening switch (SW)) 212 that detects the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 122, the electric tulip opening and closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124 A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first big winning hole detection unit (first big winning hole switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 125, and a first big winning hole. A first big winning gate door opening/closing unit 216 for setting the first big winning gate door 125D of 125 to a closed state and a projecting inclined open state, and a second big winning gate door opening/closing unit 216 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second big winning gate 126. A second big prize that sets a big winning gate detection unit (second big winning gate switch (SW)) 209 and a second big winning gate door 126D of the second big winning gate 126 to a closed state and a projecting inclined open state. A gate opening/closing unit 210 and a normal winning gate detection unit (normal winning gate switch (SW)) 217 for detecting the winning of game balls into the normal winning gate 127 are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a magnetism detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol holding display 218 that displays the unvaried pending number of winnings in the first start port 121 during the variation of the special symbols, and a second special symbol during the variation of the special symbols. A second special symbol reservation display 219 for displaying the unvaried reserved number of winning prizes in the starting port 122, and a normal symbol reservation display for displaying the unvaried reserved number passed through the gate 124 during the variation of the normal symbol. 220 and are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121, and the second starting port. A second special pattern display device 222 for displaying the variable display of special patterns and the result of the special pattern lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal pattern display for displaying the variable display of normal patterns and the result of the normal pattern lottery. A device 223 and a state display device 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, the gate switch 214, the first large winning opening switch 215, the second large winning opening switch 209, the normal winning opening switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection A detection signal detected by the sensor 208 is sent to the game control unit 200 . In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the first big prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210, the first special symbol holding display 218, the second special It is sent to the design reservation display 219, the normal design reservation display 220, the first special design display 221, the second special design display 222, the normal design display 223 and the state display 224. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of awarded balls to be paid out.

In addition, on the surface side of the game control board, a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 or updating the set value (probability of being judged as a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is input. A RAM clear switch 228 for clearing a RAM, a setting key switch 229 for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating a setting key, and performance information and settings for grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine. An information display 230 for displaying values, other electronic components, etc. are mounted.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 51 to be described later) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information (see FIG. 50). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected with a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information about the number of paid out prize balls and information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls to be put out, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. and has.
Then, the payout control section 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control section 200 .
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game control unit 200 according to the location (first start port 121, etc.) where the game ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor for sending out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 for detecting the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball storage unit (not shown). A ball detection unit 336 for detecting whether or not the balls are stored, and a tray 153 for holding game balls used when a player plays a game and paid-out prize balls are in a full tank state. The full-tank detector 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected with a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various kinds of information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 provides, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340 . In addition, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and a date and time and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the
The performance control unit 300 sets the content of the performance based on the result of determination as to whether or not a special symbol lottery is won or not sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern, for example. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect content corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the production button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of production.
In addition, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs setting of a screen display for customer waiting as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the production control unit 300 sets the content of production based on the change information of the non-time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200 .
In addition, the effect control unit 300 sends a command for instructing execution of the set effect content to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 .

Further, the production control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 115. It is

[Structure and function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, and a program that is executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. A ROM 312 , a RAM 313 used as a work memory for the CPU 311 , a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314 , a CGROM 315 , and an SNDROM 316 are provided.

The image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300 .
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores pattern images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery result, characters and characters for displaying the advance notice effect to the player. Image data such as items are stored. The SNDROM 316 also stores various audio data such as music, voice, and effect sounds such as jingles to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
CPU311, based on the pending number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP314. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads the image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, drawing processing for character/item display, etc., and audio processing using the read sound data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the rendered image data. Also, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided separately.

[Structure and function of lamp controller]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the programs and various data that are executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, etc. based on the command sent from the effect control section 300. FIG. Also, it controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 .

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 300 . The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. A game control board 200B as a sub-board, an effect control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are separately configured.
In addition, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 5, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320 .

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , and a normal symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that perform operation control of various accessories and data processing related to prize balls. , an output control unit 240 , and a random number control unit 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball has won the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, for each type of random number, a numerical value within a predetermined range One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234 . Although details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variation pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) is done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232 . In addition, as the random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number indicating whether or not the winning, the symbol random number indicating the type of winning, the variation pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control section 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

When the special symbols start to fluctuate, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. type”, and “whether it is a small win or not when the big win is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) advantageous to the player based on the obtained random number value. It should be noted that the aforementioned lottery for the special symbol (big hit lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234 .

The variation pattern selection section 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 . Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbols. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "ready-to-win" is an effect for making the player expect a big win in decorative symbols, which will be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery result is “whether or not” using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 . Also, when a plurality of types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232 .
The normal symbol variation control section 236 controls the normal symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 only for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery is “hit”, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. A state in which it is easy to win a prize is generated. Further, when it is determined that the tulip is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the first big win game with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the big win won as a big win game. It controls the opening operation of the prize winning port 125 . In addition, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines that the special symbol lottery is a "small win", the large winning opening operation control unit 237 operates the second large winning opening 126 as a small winning game for a specified time and a specified number of times. Open.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes awarded to various accessories related to prizes and lotteries, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes won.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 and the payout control section 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 performs initialization and initial setting of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing relating to the progress of the game. Moreover, when shutting off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power shut-off processes.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter referred to as "S") 701). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S703).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the checksum created at the time of power shutdown is normal (S704).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), then the game control unit 200 executes return processing (S705). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 determines the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether the jackpot game is in progress, the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state ) is output to the effect control unit 300 to set the sub-control means. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes at S702), the backup flag is OFF (No at S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No at S704), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As processing, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S706), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S707). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S708). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) ends, or after the setting of the sub board (see S708) ends, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709). Then, the game control unit 200 allows interrupts (S710), disables interrupts (S711), designs random number control processing (S712), initial value random number update processing (S713), and determines whether or not the power shutdown flag is ON. (S714) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S710) and interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S712), the game control section 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is not cut off, the game control unit 200, loop processing (S710 ~ S714) and main control by interrupt Execute the process repeatedly. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S714), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff processing).

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off process by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of game machine]
Next, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the production control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the production, and issues a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. to control the payout of

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the main control process of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in the game control, and is repeatedly executed every preset constant time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop processing shown in FIG. 7, the main control as the interrupt processing Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 9, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, symbol process, electric accessory process, prize ball process, and output process are sequentially executed (S901 to S906).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. The details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S902), a starting opening switch process, a gate switch process, and a second big winning opening switch process are performed.
In the starting port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212 in FIG. When it becomes, the processing for the special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the preliminary determination processing is performed in the first start opening switch 211 and the second start opening switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, Execute processing for prior determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute the process.
In the second big winning slot process, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the second big winning slot switch 209 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned on, executes a process for playing a big winning game.
Details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing accompanying this symbol variation. do.
In the normal design process, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal design determination section 232 and the normal design fluctuation control section 236, and executes the normal design fluctuation and the process associated with this design fluctuation.
Detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S904), the first big winning opening processing, the second big winning opening processing and the electric tulip processing are performed.
In the first big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and opens the first big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition. to control.
In the second big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and opens the second big winning opening 126, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition. to control.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 which is a normal electric accessory based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of winning balls and the payout of prize balls according to the winning prize.

In the output process (S906), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S902 to S904 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . The payout control command is generated in the process of S<b>905 and stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the control command storage areas of the RAM 203, and if control commands are stored in the individual storage areas (that is, control commands are generated in the processing of S902 to S905). ), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S902 to S905 by each function as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203 . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during the execution of the one cycle are output after the final command generation during the execution of the one cycle.

[Modification of Basic Operation of Gaming Machine]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals, and specific implementation means (execution procedure) are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control process may be returned to at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while the main control process is incorporated into the series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals in the same manner as the operations described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

When outputting a command generated by the basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands are output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. processing. In the case where commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and collectively output according to a request for specific processing. can be

[Random Number Update Processing by Game Control Unit]
A random number as determination information used for various lotteries in game control such as a special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. It is incremented by 1 each time. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting port switch process (Fig. 10) and the gate switch process (Fig. 11), and is used in the special design process (Fig. 13) and the normal design process (Fig. 18). be. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 23(a), which will be described later), , returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on information on the update interval and the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S713.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting port switch process in the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In this start opening switch process, a process for winning at the first start opening 121 and a process for winning at the second start opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001). When the first starting port switch 211 is turned ON, next the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U1 in the winning prize of the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1002). . In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for the winnings in the first start port 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the pending number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on the winning prize this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the first starting port 121 wins a prize, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S901. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing. The random numbers referred to here include jackpot random numbers that determine the jackpot, small hit or loss, pattern random numbers that determine the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern random numbers), and fluctuation pattern random numbers for identifying fluctuation patterns in pattern fluctuations. Numerical values, reach random numbers that determine whether or not to make a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described later when losing, etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S1004). The pre-determining process is a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate, but random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is processing for judging the random number before it is judged (pre-judgment).

And, production control section 300 of form of this execution, random number is decided by special design processing on the basis of the decision result of the random number which is decided by previous decision processing (preliminary decision result), than the decision result is notified A notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed before the game. This advance notice effect is, for example, in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate but random numbers have not yet been determined by special symbol processing, and the image display unit. This is performed using a hold display effect (described later) displayed in 114, or the like. The advance notice performance based on this advance determination suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the advance judgment related to the notice performance. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1005).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1006).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 by S1005 in the RAM 203 (S1007), and ends the processing for winning a prize in the first start port 121. .

Next, a process for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 10, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned ON (S1008). When the second starting port switch 212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U2 in the winning prize of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S1009 ). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S1009), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the pending number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1009), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery based on the winning this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1010). . Here, since the second start port 122 wins, as in S1003 above, random numbers for special symbol lottery (big hit random number, big hit design random number, small winning design random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number number, etc.) is obtained. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S901. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S1011). The content of this preliminary determination process is the same as that of S1004 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1012).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S1011 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1013).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 by S1012 in the RAM 203 (S1014), and ends the processing for winning in the second start port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the contents of the gate switch process when the game ball passes through the gate 124. As shown in FIG.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101). If the gate switch 214 is turned ON, then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1102). In the example shown in FIG. 11, the upper limit is four. If the pending number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1102), the gate switch process is terminated because the unvaried winnings can no longer be held.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery for this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1103). . Here, since the gate 124 wins a prize, a random number (such as a winning random number) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control section 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1104).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1104, the game control unit 200 sets the number of reservations G increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G by S1104 in the RAM 203 (S1105), The processing for the winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Second Grand Prize Opening Switch Processing by Game Control Unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second big winning opening switch process in the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In the second big winning hole switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the second big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole switch 209 has been turned on (S1201). ). If the second big winning hole switch 209 is not ON (NO in S1201), the current second big winning hole switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second big winning opening switch 209 is turned ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (S1202). If the small winning game is in progress (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 sets the second large winning opening passage command in the RAM 203 (S1203). The second big winning hole passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the second big winning hole 126 . The second big winning opening pass command set in S1203 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. On the other hand, when the small winning game is not in progress (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 causes the effect control board 300 to notify the second big winning hole passage error. The second big winning hole passage error is an error that occurs when the game ball passes through the second big winning hole 126 at an abnormal timing.

In addition, the area on the right side of the game area 111, which is different from the second big winning hole 126, is defined as a specific area, and the specific area switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through this specific area is the pachinko game machine. 100 may be provided. Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the specific area switch is turned on instead of determining whether or not the second big winning opening switch 209 is turned on, and turns on during the small winning game. In this case, a big winning game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small winning game is finished. That is, the area for detecting whether or not the game ball has passed during the small winning game is not limited to the second big winning opening 126 .

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1301). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, since the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already hitting jackpot, the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), then the special symbol variation control section 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1302). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1302), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 10) of the unvaried special symbols (S1303 to S1306). In the present embodiment, since the reservation number U1 related to the winning of the first start opening 121 and the reservation number U2 related to the winning of the second start opening 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding start opening. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1303). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1304). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2=0 (No in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1305). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1306). On the other hand, if the pending number U1=0 (No in S1305), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery. is executed to end the process (S1319).
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is given priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, the processing regarding the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when the number of reservations U2=0, the processing regarding the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S1303 to S1306). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins, it is also possible to perform control such that the pending numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in order of winning.

After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or U2 in S1304 or S1306, the special symbol variation control unit 233 generates a game state command indicating the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307). The game state command set in S1307 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. Furthermore, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1308). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1319, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control section 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by separate routines (S1309, S1310). Although details will be described later, this jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process set information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation patterns, etc.) are determined. In addition, these information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control unit 300 .

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. Start the variation of the special design to be (S1311). Then, a variation start command including setting information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1312). The variation start command set in S1312 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of variations of the special symbols that have been executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of variations) (S1313). Then, a variation count command indicating the added count of variation display is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1314). The change number command set in S1314 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in S1302 (Yes in S1302), or after the variation number command is set in S1314, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1315 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbols in S1311 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1310. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1315), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1315), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1309. It stops at the pattern determined by (S1316). Then, a process during stop of another routine is executed (S1317). The contents of the processing during suspension will be described later. In addition, the special symbol variation control section 233 sets a variation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, in the RAM 203 (S1318). The fluctuation stop command set in S1318 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
In addition, during the fluctuation of the special design triggered by the winning of the first starting port 121, if the winning of the second starting port 122 occurs, the special symbol triggered by the winning of the first starting port 121 During the variation of the special symbol may be varied with the winning of the second starting port 122 as a trigger. Further, for example, during the fluctuation of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the second starting port 122, if the winning of the first starting port 121 occurs, the special symbol triggered by the winning of the second starting port 122 During the variation of the symbols, the variation of the special symbols triggered by the winning of the first starting port 121 may be performed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13, after subtracting the value of the number of reservations U2 or the number of reservations U1 (see S1304, S1306), the big hit determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1309, S1310), It is not limited to this.
In the special symbol process, after the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed, the process of subtracting the value of the number of reservations U2 or the number of reservations U1 may be performed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the pending number U2 or pending number U1 before subtraction.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the content of the big hit determination process (S1309 in FIG. 13).
In this big hit determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the big hit random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1401), and determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made (S1402). , S1405). Whether or not a big win or a small win is determined whether the value of the big win random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. (See FIG. 23(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a big hit (Yes in S1402), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined according to the result of this determination. Which jackpot will be won is determined by whether the value of the jackpot pattern random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. b) see).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) indicating the type of the jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small hit (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a small hit symbol random value (S1406). The kind of small hit is determined according to the result of this determination. Which of the small hits is determined by whether the value of the big hit pattern random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 23(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (small winning symbol) representing the type of the small winning determined by the determination of the small winning symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1402 and S1405), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1408).

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1310 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first determines the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (regular game state, special time reduction game state and specific time reduction game state) (S1501). Then, using the determination result of S1402 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has made a big hit (S1502). If it is a big win (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads a variation pattern table for big wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1502), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the determination result of S1405 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not the small hit was made in this special symbol lottery. It judges (S1504). And when it is a small hit (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for the small hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if there is no small win (NO in S1504), a random value is determined for determining whether or not to perform a so-called ready-to-win effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches a preset value (see FIG. 23(d)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the reach effect is performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). Also, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values is a table that associates

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the variation pattern random value obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 to determine the variation pattern random value (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (time saving state or no time saving state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a big hit, whether it was a small hit, whether it was a big hit and Since the variation pattern table to be referred to differs depending on the difference such as whether or not to perform a ready-to-win effect when neither of the small hits is performed, the determined variation pattern differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 to the RAM 203 as setting information (S1511). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in the present embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Stopping process by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the in-stop process (S1317 in FIG. 13).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1601). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (fluctuation number) J in the time saving state (S1602), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. is examined (S1603). And if the lottery frequency J=0 (Yes in S1603), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1604). The operation to turn on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first big winning opening process (FIG. 19) described later.
Moreover, when the lottery number J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time saving number command indicating the value of the lottery number J in the time saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time saving number of times command set in S1605 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1601) or after turning OFF the time saving flag in S1604, or after setting the time saving number command in S1605, then the game control unit 200 generates a game state command, It is set in the RAM 203 (S1606). The gaming state command set in S1606 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has been a big hit (S1607). Here, the judgment as to whether or not it is a big win can be made based on the judgment result of the big win judging process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 23(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If the winning design or the small winning design is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, it is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), then the game control unit 200 turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the lottery number J (S1609). Moreover, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1601 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1603 (S1610).

After initializing the value of the lottery number J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S1611).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an opening operation corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 to the RAM 203 (S1612), and ends the stop processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big hit (No in S1607), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery was a small hit (S1613). ).
If it is a small hit (YES in S1613), then the game control unit 200 turns ON the small hit game flag (S1614). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning game state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the small winning game (S1615).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command to the RAM 203 for effecting the opening operation corresponding to the small winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1616). This opening command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 determines that the number of fluctuation display of the special symbols executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) is a specific number. (300 times in this embodiment) is determined (S1617). When reaching the specific number of times (YES in S1617), the game control unit 200 executes a game state setting process of another routine (S1618). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times of variable display has not reached the specific number of times (NO in S1617), the process during stop is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1319 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, so the process is terminated (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command, sets it in the RAM 203 (S1702), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1703). The customer waiting command set in S1702 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is set in a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no reservation.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal design process out of the design processes shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal design process, the normal design variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 22) to be described later, and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal design is stopped, so the normal design process is terminated without starting the normal design fluctuation (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), then the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol variation (S1802). If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1802), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the pending number G (see FIG. 11) of the unvaried normal symbols is 1 or more (S1803). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1803), it means that there is no winning to start the lottery of normal symbols, so the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1803), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1804). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1805). Whether or not the player has won the lottery is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1103 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal design variation control unit 236 normally sets the design according to the result of the normal design lottery (S1806). That is, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal design variation control section 236 sets the normal design variation time (S1807). This variable time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processing of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2101 in FIG. 21 described later, and the like. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1807, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and if the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control section 236 starts the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol display device 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 4 based on the setting contents of S1807 (S1808). In addition, it is also possible to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 normally acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 normally obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1808, or when it is determined that the symbol is normally varying in S1802 (Yes in S1802), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1809 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1808 has reached the variation time set in S1807. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1809), the normal symbol variation is continued, so the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1809), the normal symbol variation control section 236 stops the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display 223 (S1810). Then, the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1805 is winning (S1811). If it is elected (Yes in S1811), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1812). On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (No in S1811), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[First big winning slot process by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first big winning opening process in the electric accessary product process shown in S904 of FIG.
In this first big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the big winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning to the first big winning hole 125, so the first big winning hole process is ended (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 controls the opening of the jackpot game operation control started in the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop process (FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not it is in the middle of an operation (S1902).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1902), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the first big winning hole 125 is continued, so the first big winning hole process is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), then the big winning gate operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the first big winning gate 125 (S1904), and initializes the number of winning prizes C (C= 0) (S1905), 1 is added to the value of the number of rounds R for operation of the first large prize winning port 125 from the current value (S1906), and the operation of the first large prize winning port 125 is started (opened) (S1907). .

In the operation setting of S1904, the operation pattern of the first big winning hole 125 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the operation of the first big prize opening 125 is continuously performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, 15 rounds (15R) are activated, and one release of 29.5 seconds is performed in one round. In another example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and one opening of 0.9 seconds is performed in one round. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the open state of the first big winning hole 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1908), then the big winning hole operation control section 237 determines that the winning number C to the first big winning hole 125 is specified. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, nine) is equal to or more (S1909). When the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operating state (open state) of the first big winning prize port 125 is continued, so the first big winning prize port process is ended. (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the big winning gate operation control unit 237 terminates the operation of the first big winning gate 125 ( close) (S1910).

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of the operation of the first big winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the first big winning hole process is terminated (No in S1911).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the first big winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1913). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the first big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1914), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation with the preset elapsed time from the start of the ending operation. It is determined whether or not the time (ending time) to be performed has passed (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation is continued, so the first big winning hole process is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 turns OFF the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), The first big winning opening process is ended (S1919). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1902), the big winning opening operation control section 237 then determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1915). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes at S1915), the operations after S1917 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not ending (No in S1915), then the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the first big winning hole 125 is in operation (open) (S1916). . If not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onward are executed.

[Second Grand Winning Port Processing by Game Control Unit]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second big winning opening process in the electric accessary product process shown in S904 of FIG.
In this second big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the small winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2001). If the small winning game flag is OFF (No in S2001), there is no winning to the second big winning opening 126, so the second big winning opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if the small winning game flag is ON (Yes in S2001), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 controls the operation at the time of the small winning, which is started in the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop processing (FIG. 16). (S2002).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S2002), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S2003). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the second big winning opening 126 is continued, so the second big winning opening process is terminated (No in S2003). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S2003), then the big winning gate operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the second big winning gate 126 (S2004), and initializes the number of winning prizes C (C= 0) (S2005), 1 is added to the value of the number of rounds R for the operation of the second big prize opening 126 (S2006), and the operation of the second big prize opening 126 is started (opened) (S2007). .

In the operation setting of S2004, the operation pattern of the second big winning hole 126 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the type of small hit in the special symbol lottery. In addition, it is stipulated that the opening cumulative time of the second big winning opening 126 must be set within 1.8 seconds in the case of a small win.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S2004 has elapsed (S2008). If the open state of the second big winning hole 126 has not passed the opening time (No in S2008), then the big winning hole operation control section 237 determines that the winning number C to the second big winning hole 126 is specified. It is determined whether or not the number is greater than or equal to the number (S2009). When the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operating state (open state) of the second big winning port 126 is continued, so the second big winning port process is terminated. (No in S2009). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2008) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the prescribed number (Yes in S2009), the big winning gate operation control unit 237 terminates the operation of the second big winning gate 126 ( close) (S2010).

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of the operation of the second big winning opening 126 has reached the maximum value set in S2004 (S2011). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the second big winning opening process is terminated (No in S2011).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the second big winning hole 126 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S2011), then the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines that the game ball is the second big winning hole during the small winning game. 126 is determined (S2012). This determination is made based on the determination of the second big winning opening switch process (S1202 in FIG. 12).
When the game ball has passed through the second big winning hole 126 (YES in S2012), the game control section 200 turns on the jackpot game flag (S2013). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S2014). Then, in the effect control unit 300, an opening command for effecting the opening operation corresponding to the jackpot game flag is set in the RAM 203 (S2015). Further, the first big winning opening process (see FIG. 19) of another routine is executed, and the second big winning opening process ends (S2016).

On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the second large winning opening 126 (NO in S2012), the large winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S2017).
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the small winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S2018). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the second big winning opening 126 to 0 (S2019), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the time (ending time) to be performed has passed (S2020). If the ending time has not passed (No in S2020), the ending operation is continued, so the second big winning hole process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S2020), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 generates a game state command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2021). Furthermore, the small winning game flag is turned OFF, and the second big winning opening process is ended (S2022).

When it is determined in S2002 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S2002), the big winning opening operation control section 237 then determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S2023). Then, if it is during the ending (Yes in S2023), the operations after S2020 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not ending (No in S2023), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the second large winning opening 126 is operating (opening) (S2024). . If not in operation (No in S2024), the operations from S2005 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S2024), the operations from S2008 onward are executed.

[Game state setting process]
The contents of the game state setting process (S1618, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 determines whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win (S2101, S2103). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the big hit judging process (FIG. 14). These determinations are generally the same as S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 14), so the determination results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may be used.

If it is a jackpot (YES in S2101), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as the setting information in the RAM 203 (S2102). This initial value is, for example, 30 times. When the lottery of the set number of lotteries J is performed, the time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is entered.
If it is a small hit (NO in S2101, YES in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J based on the type of the small hit symbol set as the setting information in the RAM 203 (S2104). This initial value is, for example, 30 times.

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of number of times of variation) (S2105). Also, the game control unit 200 generates a variation count command indicating the number of times of variation display, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2106). This variation count command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the special time saving flag (S2107). Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 turns into a special time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win (NO in S2101, NO in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S2108). In this embodiment, the initial value of the lottery number J is 295 times. Therefore, when the lottery is performed 295 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the specific time reduction flag (S2109). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the specific time-saving game state.

Next, the game control section 200 generates a game state command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2110). This game state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control section 238 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2201). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip 123 is not opened, the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S2201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S2201), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S2202).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2202), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S2203), and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S2204). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2107, S2109 in FIG. 21, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S2203, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open An operating pattern is set to open three times in time. Thus, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electric chew support) that makes it easier to win the second start port 122 is done. It should be noted that the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 in the case of the time saving flag is ON or OFF (type of auxiliary game) is prepared a plurality, normal design process (see FIG. 18) according to the type of hit determined by the operation It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S2202 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2202), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S2204, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2205). If the open time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 continues to operate (open state), so the electric tulip process ends (No in S2205). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S2205), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S2206).

[Method of judging by random numbers]
Here, a method of determination based on random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 15), normal symbol process (FIG. 18), etc. will be described in detail.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (decision table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
Fig. 23(a) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Fig. 23(b) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, and Fig. 23(c) shows a special pattern lottery. An example of the configuration of the small hit symbol random number used, FIG. 23(e) shows configuration examples of winning random numbers used in normal symbol lottery.

Referring to FIG. 23(a), a big hit and a small hit are set as the determination value of the big hit random number. The range of values of random numbers (random numbers for big hits) is 300 from 0 to 299. In addition, while the jackpot winning value is set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which triggers the special symbol lottery, the small winning winning value is set only for the second starting port 122. is set. For the jackpot, three winning values are set for both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100). Also, 10 winning values are set for the small winnings, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30).
Here, to explain an example of the special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number value (see S1003, S1010) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the jackpot in FIG. It is determined whether it matches any of the lottery winning values "8", "58", and "208". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery for the small hit.

Referring to FIG. 23(b), five types of jackpot patterns are prepared: jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, jackpot pattern D, and jackpot pattern E. Here, the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern B, and the jackpot pattern C are patterns that indicate that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery performed with the winning of the first starting port 121 as a trigger is a jackpot. Symbol A indicates an 8-round jackpot. The jackpot pattern B indicates that the jackpot is four rounds. The jackpot pattern C indicates that the jackpot is 15 rounds. Also, the jackpot pattern D and the jackpot pattern E are patterns indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is a jackpot, and among these, the jackpot pattern D is a jackpot of 15 rounds. indicates that The jackpot pattern E indicates that the jackpot is 8 rounds. The range of random number values is 100 from 0 to 99.

In the jackpot symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values to the first starting port 121 . Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol A when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 20/100 (=2/10).
In the jackpot symbol B, 70 values are assigned as winning values to the first starting port 121 . Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 70/100 (=7/10).
In the jackpot symbol C, 10 values are assigned as winning values to the first starting port 121 . Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol C when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 10/100 (=1/10).

In the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 50/100 (=5/10).
In the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 50/100 (=5/10).

Here, taking the jackpot pattern A as an example, the jackpot pattern random number (see S1003) obtained with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 is the winning value of the jackpot pattern A in FIG. 23(b). It is determined whether it matches with some "0 to 19". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery of other jackpot symbols such as the jackpot symbol B.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment is capable of setting a set value which is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game. In the pachinko game machine 100, the set value can be set to any one of six levels of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is the lowest when the set value is set to "1". For example, when the set value is "1", the winning probability is 1/100.
Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is the highest when the set value is set to "6". For example, when the set value is "6", the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to FIG. 23(c), there are three types of small winning symbols: a small winning symbol A, a small winning symbol B, and a small winning symbol C. Here, the small winning symbol A, the small winning symbol B, and the small winning symbol C all indicate two rounds of small winning. The range of random number values is 100 from 0 to 99.

In the small winning symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the small winning symbol A in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 20/100 (=2/10).
In the small winning symbol B, 50 values are assigned as winning values to the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the small winning symbol B in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 50/100 (=5/10).
In the small winning symbol C, 30 values are assigned as winning values to the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the small winning symbol C when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 30/100 (=3/10).

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described. In addition, the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is one will be described.
Referring to FIG. 23 (d), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) lottery result ( 22 random numbers are assigned to "with reach", and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that does not make the ready-to-win effect a viable variation pattern (for example, less than 15.0 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery does not win big, the ready-to-win effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-win effect is a effect performed in the image display section 114 when special symbols are changed. Hereinafter, the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that does not make the reach production a variable pattern that can be executed is called a production without reach, and the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that makes the reach production a variation pattern that can be executed in response to this is a production with reach. call.

Here, if reach is explained as an example, the reach random number (see S1003) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 is the reach value winning value in FIG. 21" is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach. In addition, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 have the same number of winning values. There may be, or there may be different. In addition, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the normal game state, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state, and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving game state are each elected. The number of values may be the same or different.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol fluctuation, the display control of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222 when not distinguished) is interlocked. , the image display unit 114 performs an effect using decorative patterns. The decorative pattern is formed by displaying three lines of patterns each consisting of a series of numerals 1 to 9, for example, written in succession in the vertical direction. Then, when the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbols (start of scrolling of the decorative symbols), the decorative symbols are also fixed and stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, in the stop display of the decorative symbols, three identical numbers line up on a horizontal or oblique straight line. The effect performed with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable effect.

In the ready-to-win production, the following operations are performed with respect to decorative symbols as a variable production. First, any two patterns (sequences) are temporarily stopped before the decorative patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixed and stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed for the last line is gradually slowed down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up on a straight line. After the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the SP reach effect is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a effect that makes you expect a bigger hit than reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and stories develop. . In addition, the SPSP reach production is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than the SP reach production, and is a moving image in which various characters appear and a story develops. It is a production of
Further, as shown in FIG. 24, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, until the decorative pattern that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixed and stopped, the production that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as the production with reach, is not performed. The symbols are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a diagonal straight line.

In this way, when the judgment result of the hit random number is a loss, the image display unit 114 performs a ready-to-win effect as a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed, or the ready-to-win effect can be executed. Decide whether to perform a no-reach production that is not a variation pattern. In addition, the ready-to-win random number changes the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect according to the number of reservations, thereby enabling the game to progress efficiently and giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a jackpot is won, a reach effect is performed, and finally, the decorative patterns are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. can be done. On the other hand, in the ready-to-win effect in the case of winning a small prize or losing, the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 23 (e), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the winning value when the time saving flag is ON Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed when there is no time-saving state, the game is won with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 in the time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1103) acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in e). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

In addition, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of wins with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, like the jackpot pattern random number (see FIG. 23(b)) for specifying the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the winning pattern random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number together with the random number of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquiring unit 231, and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number. Determine the type of win based on random numbers.
Note that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 23 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a setting example of variation patterns and tables used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 24 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 24, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the big winning symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (Yes in S1502 of FIG. 15). . Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. determine the variation pattern based on whether For example, if the jackpot design is "jackpot design C" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" allocated to "jackpot design C" in FIG. "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, the special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost (both of S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the first special symbol lottery holding number U1, reach random number, and variation A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern random numbers. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the reach random number (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquiring unit 231 , determines whether it is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the pending number "1" of "missing" in FIG. 23 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) obtained together with the jackpot random number value by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random numbers assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR7" is selected as the variation pattern.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 25 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the second starting port in the normal game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 25, a variation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, there are provided variation patterns in which the "judgment result" is associated with "big hit", "small hit", and "losing".
In the table shown in FIG. 25, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.00" is provided as the "jackpot symbol D". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.01" is provided as the "jackpot symbol E". In addition, a variation pattern in which the “time” is “6.00” is provided as the “small winning symbol A”. Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.01" is provided as the "small hit symbol B". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.02" is provided as the "small hit symbol C". In addition, a variation pattern with a "time" of "0.50" is provided as a "loss".

It should be noted that, in this table, winning values in reach random numbers are not assigned to "lost". Therefore, the reach is not performed in the special symbol variation in which the lottery result based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state is lost.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 26 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are provided.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, a variation pattern is provided in which the "holding number" is "1" and the "time" is "2.50" and "4.00" as "no reach". The "time" of "2.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with "holding number" of "1" in the table shown in FIG. ' is shorter than '8.00'. In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 26, a variation pattern is provided in which the "holding number" is "2 to 3" and the "time" is "2.00" and "4.00" as "no reach". . This "time" of "2.00" and "4.00" is the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with "holding number" of "2 to 3" in the table shown in FIG. It is shorter than "6.80" which is "time". In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 26, there are provided fluctuation patterns in which the “holding number” is “4” and the “time” is “1.50” and “4.00” as “no reach”. The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with "holding number" of "4" in the table shown in FIG. is shorter than "4.60".

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, in FIG. 27, the example of a setting in the case of the fluctuation|variation of a special design based on the prize-winning to the 1st starting mouth 121 in a special time-saving game state is shown.
In the table shown in FIG. 27, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number are provided. In this table, winning values in reach random numbers are not assigned to "fluctuation patterns" whose "judgment result" is "loss". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning prize to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is lost, reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 27, a variation pattern is provided in which the “holding number” is “1 to 4” and the “time” is “14.00”. The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than the "time" of any of the "variation patterns" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in FIG. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is "missing" and "no reach", than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning of the first start port 121, the second start The variation time of the special symbol variation based on the winning to the mouth 122 is shorter.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, in FIG. 28, the example of a setting in the case of the fluctuation|variation of a special design based on the prize-winning to the 2nd start mouth 122 in a specific time saving game state is shown.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In this table, winning values in reach random numbers are not assigned to "fluctuation patterns" whose "judgment result" is "loss". Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "holding number" is "1" and the "time" is "2.01". The "time" of "2.01" is the "time" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with the "holding number" of "1" in the table shown in FIG. 50" and shorter than 4.00". Further, in the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "holding number" is "2 to 3" and the "time" is "1.01". The "time" of this "1.01" is the "time" of the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" with the "holding number" of "2 to 3" in the table shown in FIG. 2.00" and shorter than 4.00". Also, in the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "holding number" is "4" and the "time" is "1.00". The "time" of "1.00" is the "time" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with the "holding number" of "4" in the table shown in FIG. 50" and shorter than 4.00". That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is "missing" and "no reach", than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state, the specific time saving game The variation time of the special symbol variation based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the state is shorter.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 29 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In this table, winning values in reach random numbers are not assigned to "fluctuation patterns" whose "judgment result" is "loss". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern is provided in which the “holding number” is “1 to 4” and the “time” is “14.01”. The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than the "time" of any of the "variation patterns" provided as "missing" and "no reach" in the table shown in FIG. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is "missing" and "no reach", than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the specific time saving game state The fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in is longer.

The game control unit 200 is based on which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 the game ball has won, and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a table used for selecting a variation pattern of special symbols. to decide. Then, as described above, the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 121 and the second start port 122, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the number of reservations, etc. Based on the conditions of, etc., to determine the variation pattern of the special design. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as the effect at the time of the special symbol variation, the effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) is produced. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) of the game control section 200 according to this embodiment. 30(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 30(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 30(a).

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the RAM 203 has a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum value of the number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4) . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area for storing information indicating whether the starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) has won a prize. , an area for storing the acquired jackpot random numbers, an area for storing the pattern random numbers, an area for storing the reach random numbers, and an area for storing the fluctuation pattern random numbers. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4) of the effect control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 31(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 31(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 31(a).
As shown in FIG. 31(a), the RAM 303 has a first reservation storage area 305 and a second reservation storage area 306 as reservation status storage areas for storing the status of the reservation ball. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 correspond to the reservation of the winning to the first start opening 121 and the reservation of the winning to the second opening opening 122, respectively. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the hold flag and a notification flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the notification flag. and a region. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a reserve ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is 3, the pending flags are turned ON in the three pending flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the result of prior determination according to the game state and effect situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the announcement effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the announcement effect is not performed. For example, when the notice effect is performed for the third held ball out of the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage section 305c.

Although not shown, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a prior determination information storage area) in which prior determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 30(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination processing (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) based on the above random numbers. The content of the prior determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13), specifically, whether or not the big hit (and whether or not the small hit), the big hit In the case of , it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, whether the variation pattern (variation time) is a length capable of executing the ready-to-win effect, and the contents of the variation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is stored together with information (hereinafter referred to as retention information) related to the hold corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process has been performed, or independently of this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination processing (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the configuration example of random numbers described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29 .

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing details of the preliminary determination processing (S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state (S3201), selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, A determination is made (S3202).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table corresponding to the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and determines the reach random number in advance (S3203). Furthermore, a table corresponding to the current gaming state is selected, and preliminary determination of the variation pattern random number is performed (S3204).
Although illustration is omitted, in S3202, S3203 and S3204, a dedicated table is selected depending on which of the first starting gate 121 and the second starting gate 122 the winning is based on. .

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of pre-determination in S3202, S3203, and S3204 (S3205).
After that, the game control unit 200, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the prior determination of the reach random number, the result of the prior determination of the variation pattern, and the prior The judgment pattern is stored as advance judgment information in the advance judgment information storage area (S3206). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control section 300, the preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3207).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is used in the jackpot determination process with the random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. The determination table (see FIG. 23) and the determination table having the same configuration were used. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the big win determination process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (see S1309 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called to determine the random number in the prior determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers in addition to the jackpot determination process in order to determine random numbers in the preliminary determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big win determination, the determination table used for the big win determination may also be used for the preliminary determination.

In addition, here only the prior determination (whether it is a big hit or not) on the special symbol lottery was described, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (preliminary determination). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is a random number for variation pattern selection (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained according to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. The fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 24 to 29) is used (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the variation pattern, using the random number value for selecting the variation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table of the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process, it is selected. Fluctuation patterns can be read ahead. That is, different look-ahead tables can be used for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Also, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on which one of the first starting gate 121 and the second starting gate 122 is won.

In this case, in order to foresee the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1310 of FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called and used. be able to. Moreover, regarding the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in program size.

It should be noted that, if the pre-determination process and the jackpot determination process at the time of special symbol variation are performed in the same subroutine using the same determination table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-determination result and the special symbol variation There may be a case where the judgment result by the big hit judging process of (1) is different. That is, after the execution of the prior determination process, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (regular game state, special time-saving game state, and specific time-saving game state) is changed by the time of special symbol fluctuation start. . In this case, since different types of determination tables are used according to the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between when the preliminary determination process is executed and when the big win determination process is executed. . Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained at the time of winning the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. can be done.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of the door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message such as "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state to the image display unit. 114 to display. In addition, the effect control unit 300 causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 lights the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example as a mode which shows an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it was explained that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred. A mode using a part may be used. Also, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when a door open error occurs, all of the image display unit 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Also, when a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a game parlor (pachinko hall) clerk or the like to easily determine the degree of urgency of an error that has occurred in a game machine.

[Setting example of pre-judgment pattern]
Next, a setting example of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 33 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state.

In the table shown in FIG. 33, "judgment result", "symbol", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "scheduled fluctuation pattern", and "pre-judgment pattern" are provided in association with each other. .
The game control unit 200 determines a scheduled variation pattern and a pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination result of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number, the pre-determination result of the reach random number, and the pre-determination result of the variation pattern random number.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. In addition, in FIG. 34, the example of a setting in the case of the fluctuation|variation of a special design based on the prize-winning to the 2nd start mouth 122 in a special time-saving game state is shown.
In the table shown in FIG. 34, "judgment result", "symbol", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "scheduled fluctuation pattern", and "pre-judgment pattern" are provided in association with each other. .

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a setting example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. In addition, in FIG. 35, the example of a setting in the case of the fluctuation|variation of a special design based on the prize-winning to the 2nd start mouth 122 in a specific time saving game state is shown.
In the table shown in FIG. 35, "judgment result", "symbol", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "scheduled fluctuation pattern", and "pre-judgment pattern" are provided in association with each other. .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as a setting example of the table and the pre-determination pattern, a setting example when the special symbol variation is performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and in the specific time-saving gaming state A setting example is not provided when the special symbols are changed based on the winning to the first starting port 121 . That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, in the prior determination process A pre-determination result command is not generated, and a pre-determination effect, which will be described later, is not executed. However, even if the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and even if the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the preliminary determination result in the preliminary determination process A command may be generated and set in RAM 203 . As a result, the prior determination effect may be executed.

Also, in the illustrated example, one "preliminary determination pattern" is associated with one "scheduled variation pattern", but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of "predetermined patterns" may be associated with one "scheduled variation pattern". Then, when this "scheduled variation pattern" is selected, one of the plurality of "preliminary determination patterns" may be selected by lottery.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control section 300 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the operation of the effect control section 300. As shown in FIG.
The operation of the effect control section 300 consists of main processing shown in FIG. 36(a) and interrupt processing shown in FIG. 36(b). Referring to FIG. 36(a), the effect control unit 300 first performs initial setting at the time of activation (S3601), and after performing cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), according to the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S3603), interrupt processing is accepted.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 36(b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S3611). In this command reception process, the effect contents (effect pattern) are selected. Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 performs the specific time reduction related production|presentation process for performing production|presentation regarding specific time reduction gaming state (S3612). In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting the player's operation of the effect button 161 or the like (S3613). Thereafter, the effect control unit 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, movement of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command reception process (S3611 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command have been received (S3701). It should be noted that the pre-determined result command and the pending number increase command are set in the starting opening switch process shown in FIG. ) is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
And, when the effect control unit 300 determines that it has received the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command (Yes in S3701), it adds 1 to the pending number value held in the RAM 303 (S3702).
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (S3703). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the prior determination result command and the pending number increase command (No in S3701), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation start command (S3704). This variation start command is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 in the game control unit 200 (S1312), and is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 9 (S906).
If the received command is a variation start command (Yes in S3704), the effect control section 300 executes effect selection processing (S3705). In addition, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number is a random number that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main processing shown in FIG. 36(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command, the hold number increase command and the variation start command (No in S3701 and S3704), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation stop command (S3706). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 in the game control unit 200 (S1318) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3707), the effect control section 300 executes the process during the end of the fluctuation effect (S3707). In addition, in the processing during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM303.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command and a variation stop command (No in S3701, S3704 and S3706), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for opening (S3708). This opening command is set (S1618) in the stop process (S1618) shown in FIG. 16 or the second big winning opening process (S2015) shown in FIG. This is the command sent to the control unit 300 .
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3708), the effect control unit 300 executes a jackpot effect selection process (S3709). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command and an opening command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706 and S3708), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game (S3710). This ending command is a command that is set in the first big winning slot process shown in FIG. 19 (S1913) and transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process (S906) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes at S3710), the effect control unit 300 executes ending effect selection processing (S3711). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command and an ending command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, S3708 and S3710), then the effect control unit 300 , a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S3712). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S3703) and the effect selection process (S3705) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects the effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the predetermined effect based on the predetermination result command and the pending number increase command (S3803).

Here, as the pre-judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that give advance notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the variation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a pending display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the second special symbol reservation display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 3). At the same time, the image display unit 114 performs a hold display suggesting the occurrence of a hold or the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this holding display effect, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode etc. of the holding display, the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that concerning the holding ball is sent to the player. It can be a pre-judgment production to suggest.

In addition, although the case where the pending display effect is used as a pre-determination effect is explained here, by reflecting it in the contents of various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of the random number by the special symbol processing, various notice effects It becomes possible to do For example, a production using a production image displayed on the image display unit 114, a production by light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, a production by the movement of movable accessories, a production by sound output such as music and sound effects, etc. It can be set as a judgment production pattern.

In addition, the pre-determination effect may be executed along with the symbol variation for other winning balls performed prior to the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination was performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of retained balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 10). Moreover, priority is given to digestion of the ball held in the second starting port 122 . In this case, for example, if the preliminary determination is made for the held ball with the second starting port 122, before the pattern fluctuation for the held ball is performed, including the fluctuation currently fluctuating (referred to as the fluctuation), Symbol variation is performed for a maximum of four winning balls. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been pre-determined, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball, the notice effect that spans the multiple pattern changes (continuous notice effect ).

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the pending number command including the value of the added pending number and the information of the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process to the RAM 303 (S3804). In order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determined effect pattern, the number-of-holds command includes information indicating the pattern. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S3811). Also, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 (S3812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, and the fluctuation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation production pattern for symbol variation by image is selected (S3813). After the variable effect pattern is selected, the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 may be decremented by one. That is, the variable effect pattern may be selected before the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 is decremented by one.

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets a variable production start command for instructing the execution start of the selected production in the RAM303 (S3814). The variable effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. When the CPU 311 receives the variable effect start command, the VDP 314 draws images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern, and creates a display list or the like for output processing. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data for representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting the variation performance pattern of the symbol variation in S3813, the variation performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are determined. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is effect display performed by the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbols performed by the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, the effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of FIG. 36(a) , Acquire production random value when receiving fluctuation start command) may be used to select a fluctuation production pattern by lottery.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S3709) in FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3901), and selects a pattern of effect (jackpot effect pattern) (S3902). . Then, the performance control unit 300 reads out the image data and sound data used for the performance by the selected jackpot performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win performance start command instructing the selected performance together with these data in the RAM 303, The jackpot effect selection process is ended (S3903). As a result, the effect during the jackpot is determined. It should be noted that, in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3902), determination may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending effect selection process (S3711) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S4001), and selects a pattern of effect (ending effect pattern) (S4002). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, Ending effect selection processing is ended (S4003). It should be noted that in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S4002), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S3712) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S4101). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S4101), the effect control section 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102), and turns ON the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S4104). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S4104), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after turning ON in Yes or S4103 in S4104), the effect control unit 300 next determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). is determined (S4105). If the time has not expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when time is up (Yes in S4105), the effect control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the specific time-saving gaming state (S4107). If it is in the specific time-saving gaming state (YES in S4107), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable effect (NO in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets the customer waiting effect command for performing the first customer waiting effect in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process ( S4109).
In addition, if it is not in the specific time-saving gaming state (NO in S4107) or if it is before the start of the first variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state (YES in S4108), the production control unit 300 is the second customer waiting production (demonstration production ) is set in the RAM 303, and the customer waiting command receiving process is terminated (S4110). The second customer waiting effect is a different mode of effect from the first customer waiting effect.

When the command receiving process is completed as described above, any one of a variable performance start command, a variable performance end command, a big win performance start command, an ending performance start command, and a customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the content of the specific time reduction related effect process (S3612) in FIG. 36(b).
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the normal game state (S4201). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S4201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the specific time-saving game state has been controlled to the normal game state (S4202). If it is controlled from the specific time-saving game state to the normal game state (YES in S4202), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated. In addition, when not being controlled from the specific time saving game state to the normal game state (NO in S4202), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the variable effect is being executed (S4203). When it is not during fluctuation production (it is NO at S4203), specific time reduction related production processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the variable effect is being performed (YES in S4203), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the RAM clear has been executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is most recently restored from the power-off state. (S4204). If the RAM clear is not executed (NO in S4204), the effect control section 300 determines whether or not the number of variations of the decorative symbols after the most recent return is equal to or greater than the first number (S4205). In this embodiment, the first number of times is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. When the number of fluctuations is less than the first number (NO in S4205), the specific time reduction related effect processing is terminated. The effect control unit 300 may determine that the number of times of fluctuation is equal to or greater than the first number of times may be the end of the first number of fluctuations or the start of the first number of fluctuations. good too.
When the number of fluctuations is the first number or more (YES in S4205), the effect control section 300 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbols after returning is the second number or more (S4206). The second number of times is the number of fluctuations that is greater than the first number of times. In this embodiment, the second number of times is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as the number of fluctuations is greater than the first number. In addition, the effect control unit 300 may determine that the number of times of fluctuation is equal to or greater than the second number of times may be the end of the second number of fluctuations or the start of the second number of fluctuations. good too.
When the number of fluctuations is less than the second number (NO in S4206), the effect control section 300 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbols after returning is the third number (S4207). In this embodiment, the third number is 100 times. It should be noted that the effect control unit 300, the condition for determining that the number of times of variation is the third number of times, may be the end of the third number of times of variation, or the fact that the third number of times of variation has started. may be

When the number of fluctuations is not the third number (NO in S4207), the effect control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2) whether or not to execute the clear negative effect (S4208). The clear denial effect is a effect indicating that the RAM clear is not executed. When it is determined not to execute the clear negative effect (NO in S4208), the specific time reduction related effect processing is terminated.
When it is determined to execute a clear negative effect (YES in S4208), the effect control section 300 executes a clear negative effect and a remaining number of times notification effect (S4209). The remaining number of times notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times of the necessary fluctuation effect until the specific time saving game state is reached.

Moreover, when the number of fluctuations is the third number (YES in S4207), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the clear negative effect has been executed (S4210). If the clear negative effect has not been executed (NO in S4210), the effect control section 300 executes the clear negative effect and the remaining number of times notification effect (S4211).

On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is most recently restored from the power-off state, if the RAM clear is executed (YES in S4204), the effect control unit 300 determines that the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations is It is determined whether or not the reset is based on a big hit (S2105 in FIG. 21) (S4212). If the reset is not based on the jackpot (NO in S4212), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations after the most recent recovery from the state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is the fourth number or more. It judges (S4213). The fourth number of times is the number of fluctuations that is greater than the first number of times. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100 times. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as the number of fluctuations is greater than the first number. When the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4213), the specific time reduction related effect processing is terminated. Incidentally, the effect control unit 300, the condition for determining that the number of times of variation is equal to or greater than the fourth number, may be the completion of the fourth variation, or the start of the fourth variation. good too.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations is the fourth number or more (YES in S4213), or when the most recent reset is a reset based on a big hit (YES in S4212), the effect control unit 300 has executed the remaining number of times notification effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S4214). If the remaining number of times notification effect has not been executed (NO in S4214), the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification effect (S4215).
In addition, in the case of YES in S4206, in the case of YES in S4210, after the execution of S4209, after the execution of S4211, in the case of YES in S4214, or after the execution of S4215, the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number update effect. (S4216). The remaining number update effect is an effect that notifies the number of times after the update of the necessary variable effect until the specific time saving game state is reached.

On the other hand, if it is not the normal game state (NO in S4201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the specific time-saving game state (S4217). If it is not in the specific time-saving gaming state (NO in S4217), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If it is in the specific time-saving gaming state (YES in S4217), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the first fluctuation effect in the specific time-saving gaming state (S4218). If it is before the start of the first variable production (YES in S4218), the production control unit 300 determines whether or not there is a hold (S4219). When there is a hold (NO in S4219), the specific time reduction related effect processing is terminated.
Moreover, when there is no suspension (YES in S4219), the effect control unit 300 starts hitting to the right (S4220). More specifically, the effect control unit 300 starts notification for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 .

On the other hand, if it is after the start of the first variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state (NO in S4218), the production control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the right-handed notification (S4221). When it is after the start of hitting to the right (NO in S4221), the specific time reduction related effect processing is ended.
If it is before the start of hitting to right information (YES in S4221), effect control unit 300 starts hitting to right information (S4222). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 executes a specific shorter working hours notification effect (S4223). The specific time reduction notification effect is an effect for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time reduction game state.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect button processing (S3613 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective period) (S4301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key or the peripheral key of the effect key 162 to turn it on. In addition, when an operating device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, it includes detecting the operation of the device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If the operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4301), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S4301), the effect control unit 300 sets the effect button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and executes the effect button processing. End (S4302).

Thereafter, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S3614) in FIG. Send to control unit 320 . Based on the received command, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. to execute the set production.

[Information displayed on the information display in each game section]
Next, the information displayed on the information display 230 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 44, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 44 starts when the power is turned on for the first time. In addition, the setting of 60,000 total outs is a value that can approximately guarantee the daily operation of a pachinko game machine that fires 100 shots per minute. For normal medium base values, the numeric segment is always displayed with two digits. Further, when the number of outs during normal operation is "0" and when the base value during normal operation is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numerical segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL." indicating that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 230 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that there is, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of outs during normal is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value is greater than or equal to "100". When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 230, the section counter value is "1", the number of outs during normal operation is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 blinks "bL." ” is lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

In addition, by the out ball detection switch 227, the game ball that has won the normal winning opening 127, the first starting opening 121, the second starting opening 122, the first big winning opening 125, and the second big winning opening 126, and the discharge opening Instead of detecting an out ball made up of game balls that have flowed into 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may detect only a game ball that has flowed into the out port. In that case, out ball detection switch 227, normal winning opening switch 217, first starting opening switch 211, second starting opening switch 212, first large winning opening switch 215, second large winning opening switch 209 The number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) should be incremented by one each time it is detected.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the image/sound control unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing main processing of the image/sound control unit 310 . This main processing is performed by inputting to the CPU 311 a system reset that occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown).

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial setting such as internal register setting, access permission to RAM 313, initialization of all RAM areas of RAM 313 (0 clear), CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupt Start-up etc. are performed, and all interrupts are permitted in step T3.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs adjustment mode switching processing. Specifically, the sound volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 are controlled by referring to an input signal from a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. ), and adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume adjustment is possible, light intensity adjustment is possible, initial value of volume value (any of 0 to 5) and initial value of light intensity value (0 to 5 Either), processing for switching the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) or the light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, the changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board as the main board, and the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the display device (image display section 114, sub display device (image display section 114 and A display device that separately displays an image related to production)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, board lamp 116).
It should be noted that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch (not shown) can always be performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power ON state (after the image/sound control unit 310 is activated). It has become.

The CPU 311 performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 operable by the player. Perform processing to adjust (value).

The CPU 311 performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, based on the detection signal (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that the player can operate, the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 ( value).

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the production key 162 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the decorative pattern 41). . In addition, during the period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on until the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RAM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, various driving sources Until the timer interrupt is started on the game control board during initial operation, etc.), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery) that should be notified with priority over plate full errors and payout abnormalities , illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are controlled (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound is terminated, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The CPU 311 performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 300 has been received. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The CPU 311 performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 .

The CPU 311 performs sound pattern setting processing in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 is performed.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the RAM 313 to indicate that it is time to update the image displayed on the image display unit 114. FIG. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set every time the image/sound control unit 310 receives a V blank signal that is transmitted from the VDP 314 every 1/30 second (the time at which rendering and display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed at the beginning. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The CPU 311 clears the frame switching flag set in the RAM 313 in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The CPU 311 performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the VDP 314, and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114 . will be done. In other words, the frame update timing coincides with the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, big hit notice effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the image display unit 114. . Note that the performance directly controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the lamp control unit 320 (the performance operation of the movable accessory 115) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The CPU 311 performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating a voice control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this voice control command to the image/sound control unit 310 is performed.

As a result, the image/sound control unit 310 performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the speaker 156 based on the voice control command. When this processing ends, the processing moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the decorative pattern 41), it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light with a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the operable effect keys 162 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of door open error), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but volume adjustment is possible with the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. and light amount adjustment are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound is terminated, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

During the notification of the abnormality (the output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the sound volume value and the light intensity value by the effect key 162 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the sound volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 320 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the game control unit 200 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 executes origin return processing of the role object (movable role object 115, sub-image display section (not shown), effect button 161) to the initial processing number updated in each process of the role object initial process. set to "1" for

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the character (movable character 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) returns to the origin position, and the initial processing Processing such as setting the number to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial process number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 46, the origin return processing for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 46, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 320 .

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is "0". judge. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is moved. It is set to the accessory 115 (movable effect device), and the process moves to step R105-5.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. A sub display device (not shown) is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the board accessory is moved. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets, in the RAM 323, return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and step R105. At -10, clear the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-image display unit (not shown) is to be driven. If the processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin. do.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the origin return state of the frame role object (production button 161) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the effect button 161 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 161 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 161 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 161 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 161 is pressed within a predetermined time. +1 update the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 161, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets return abnormality information indicating that return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 in the RAM 323, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 161) to the origin.

The CPU 321 determines in step R105-20 whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, executes the initial operation process of the accessory in the initial processing number described above. 2” is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

In this way, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 47, when the power is turned on, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown), which overlap the performance position (movement area), are positioned at the origin position (standby position). If not, both of them are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub image display unit (not shown) order) It has become. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two accessories from applying loads to each other, and both the accessories are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress such inconvenience.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 47, the operation of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position, and the operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute a return operation to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 47, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 47, the operation of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position, and the operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) When both of the return operations to the origin position are completed, processing for shifting to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

It should be noted that the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) return to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the movable accessory 115 → the sub-image display section (not shown)). At the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 320 .

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is set in the RAM323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 49(a)) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. FIG. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine one initial operation pattern.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 161) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 161 is set in the RAM323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a frame role-play initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 49(b)) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-play. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161) and sets it in the RAM323. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b), one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command. .

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial action of the frame role-playing product.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame role-playing object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial action of the frame role-playing object has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and terminates this initial operation processing.

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 48, the initial action of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 48, when there is a return abnormality in the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) constituting the board accessory, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display The initial operation of the unit (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely out of order or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 48, the initial operation of the effect button 161 is not executed when the effect button 161 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 161 by forcibly initializing the performance button 161 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 48, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed, and the recovery error occurs. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 48, both the initial action of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 161) are performed. is finished, the initial operation process is finished. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining an initial motion pattern of a board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

The "movable effect device small descent" is an action in which the movable accessory 115 moves (lowers) from the standby position to a midway position slightly below the standby position, and the "movable effect device large descent" The movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to the production position below the middle position, and "return to the origin of the movable presentation device" is the action of returning the movable accessory 115 to the standby position. It's becoming

"Movement of the sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-image display section (not shown) rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "Return to the origin of the sub-display device" is the movement of the sub-image display section (not shown). returns to the standby position.

"Movable production device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable accessory 115, and "sub display device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub image display section (not shown). LED.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the movable effect device LED is not described. This is because the red blinking occurs due to the anomaly notification.

Also, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described. This is because the LED of the display device blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board role item initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial actions of the objects (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) are the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Also, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 and/or the sub-image display unit (not shown) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a) is that the board accessories (movable accessories 115, The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-image display section (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the mode is the same, the point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

When the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is made different, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. The aspects may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. . In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a), when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, during the variable display of special symbols, or during the jackpot game, it is restored. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be lit in the same light-emitting manner as when power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable accessory 115, and the return error in the movable accessory 115 is performed. If there is a return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 is performed and the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. mentioned. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 161 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position). It is an operation to return to

As a first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial action of the object (the effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b), the initial action of the effect button 161 at the time of power on does not have the initial action of the effect button 161 at the time of power restoration. The point is that it is designed to execute an action. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 161 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

As a third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fourth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial action of the frame role (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b), the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on and the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored , the number of emitted colors is different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored, it may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it includes an emission color that is not in the emission color in . Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial light emission color of the effect button 161 upon power restoration may include a light emission color that is not included in the initial light emission color of the effect button 161 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is different from the time during which the production button 161 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 161 in the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 161 .

As an eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 161 in which the detection of whether or not is performed. Therefore, it is possible to check the operation of the effect button 161 and the operation of the button vibration motor at the same time, and it is possible to shorten the time required for checking the operation.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 50, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when initializing various drive sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 , the second big prize winning opening door opening/closing unit 210) is stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state indicator 224, the state confirmation indicator 226), the image display section 114, and the information indicator 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting change mode. It will be in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 226, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (“6” in this case) is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 230 d of the information display 230 .

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source is repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230. finish. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game-enabled state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and initialize, and information All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d in the display 230 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RAM clearing)
With reference to FIG. 51, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RAM clearing will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for RAM clearing.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) is in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state indicator 224, the state confirmation indicator 226), the image display section 114, and the information indicator 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and the RAM clearing operation (the RAM clearing switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clearing preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It becomes a pre-start state before starting.

At this time, the state confirmation display 226 displays a state confirmation display indicating that RAM clearing is being prepared, and various drive sources start to operate (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RAM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RAM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Please press RAM clear again" and "Check the operation of the solenoid Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "please" is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RAM clear approval operation (the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and the RAM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the game control unit 200 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started to return and initialize, and information All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d in the display 230 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 52, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) is in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state indicator 224, the state confirmation indicator 226), the image display section 114, and the information indicator 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 226, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also completed. do. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game-enabled state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable body (the electric tulip 123, the first big winning entrance door 125D, the second Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large winning opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the large winning opening door 126D) are initially operated. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the state display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing burden to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. can be concentrated on.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various driving sources. (RAM clearing preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RAM clearing preparations and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and confirmation of operation of various drive sources) is performed, the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 can be informed that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately. can be performed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RAM clearing preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the pachinko game machine 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is immediately completed even before the operation time of various drive sources has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in the state where the game can be played, and it will be confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be checked in order, and the motion can be properly checked. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize gate door 125D and the second big prize gate door 126D are initially operated, the big prize gate LED is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize gate 125D and the second big prize gate 126D due to the light from the big prize gate LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the first big winning gate 125D and the second big winning gate 126D are initially operated, the first big winning gate 125 and the second big winning gate 125D Since an opening signal is not output even though the big winning opening 126 is open, it is possible to prevent the game control part 200 from being given an extra processing load, and the pachinko game machine 100.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 230 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. regulated), it is possible to prevent the game control unit 200 from being given an extra processing burden.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RAM clearing preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, ``driving source is initializing'' or ``please check the operation of the solenoid'' prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources. Although such characters are not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RAM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example for initial operation of various drive sources)
Modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above-described embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode is ended.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 53, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change in the modified example will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting change in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) is in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state indicator 224, the state confirmation indicator 226), the image display section 114, and the information indicator 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting change mode. It will be in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 230d are erased and hidden. At this time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various driving sources after RAM clearing)
With reference to FIG. 54, a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after RAM clearing in the modified example will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after RAM clearing in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) is in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state display 224), the image display section 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and the RAM clearing operation (the RAM clearing switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clearing preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It becomes a pre-start state before starting. At this time, the above-described RAM clearing preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RAM clear approval operation (the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 55, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126) (entering difficulty level). Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) is in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the indicator 130 (first special Symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, first special symbol reservation display device 218, second special symbol reservation display device 219, normal design reservation display device 220, round number display device 225, The state indicator 224, the state confirmation indicator 226), the image display section 114, and the information indicator 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the electric tulip 123, the first big winning entrance door 125D, the second Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large winning opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the large winning opening door 126D) are initially operated. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the state display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing burden to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. can be concentrated on.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to perform the operation check appropriately. It becomes possible to

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the game result is not affected after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the various drive sources for operating the movable body to be given are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of the various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation). It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, after the setting change mode (RAM clearing preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed, after the operation waiting time has passed, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are activated. Since the operation is to be started, it is possible to have time to check the operation of various drive sources after the setting change (setting confirmation) is completed, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the RAM clear preparation mode is finished. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is finished, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the pachinko game machine 100 is reduced. reduction (shortening of development period, etc.).

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize gate door 125D and the second big prize gate door 126D are initially operated, the big prize gate LED is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize gate 125D and the second big prize gate 126D due to the light from the big prize gate LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be checked in order, and the motion can be properly checked. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the first big winning gate 125D and the second big winning gate 126D are initially operated, the first big winning gate 125 and the second big winning gate 125D Since an opening signal is not output even though the big winning opening 126 is open, it is possible to prevent the game control part 200 from being given an extra processing load, and the pachinko game machine 100.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 230 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. regulated), it is possible to prevent the game control unit 200 from being given an extra processing burden.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, the RAM clearing preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d displaying the current setting values By not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, according to this modification, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 230 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

[Pre-judgment effect pattern table]
56 to 58 are diagrams showing setting examples of the pre-determined effect patterns and tables used in the pre-determined effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determined effect selection process of FIG. 38(a). Incidentally, FIG. 56 shows a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. Moreover, FIG. 57 shows the preliminary determination effect|presentation pattern table used when a game ball wins the 2nd starting hole 122 in a special time-saving game state. Moreover, FIG. 58 shows the prior determination effect|presentation pattern table used when a game ball wins the 2nd starting hole 122 in a specific time saving game state.

A plurality of pre-determined effect patterns are set in the pre-determined effect pattern table shown in FIG. 56, which is used when a game ball wins in the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. For the pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA6", "JB1" to "JB6", "JR1" to "JR3", and "JR6" to "JR13" set using FIG. Judgment production patterns "AA1" to "AA6", "AB1" to "AB6", "AR1" to "AR3", and "AR6" to "AR13" are associated one-to-one. Further, the pre-determined effect patterns "AR4-1" and "AR4-2" are associated with the pre-determined pattern "JR4". Further, the pre-determined effect patterns "AR5-1" and "AR5-2" are associated with the pre-determined pattern "JR5".

When "JR4" is set as the pre-determined pattern, the effect control unit 300 determines the pre-determined effect pattern by the number of times X of the variable effect executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation). to decide. More specifically, when the number X of variable effects is not within a specific range, the effect control section 300 determines the pre-determined effect pattern to be "JR4-1". In this embodiment, the specified range is a range of 297 times or more and 300 times or less. That is, the specific range is a range from the variable performance in which the number of remaining variable performances until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state is the specific number of times to the variable performance that reaches the specific time-saving gaming state. However, the specific number of times may be any value. In addition, when the number of times X of the fluctuation production executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) is within a specific range, the production control unit 300 sets the pre-determined production pattern to "JR4-2". to decide. Even when "JR5" is set as the pre-determined pattern, the pre-determined effect pattern is determined in the same manner.

In addition, a plurality of pre-determined effect patterns are set in the pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball has won the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. With respect to the pre-determination patterns "JF1", "JF2", "JG1" to "JG3", and "JH1" to "JH8" set using FIG. 34 above, the pre-determination effect patterns "AF1", "AF2","AG1" to "AG3", and "AH1" to "AH8" are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of pre-determined effect patterns are set in the pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball has won the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. With respect to the pre-determined patterns "JK1", "JK2", "JL1" to "JL3", and "JM1" to "JM3" set using FIG. AK2", "AL1" to "AL3", and "AM1" to "AM3" are associated on a one-to-one basis.

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, in the illustrated pre-judgment effect pattern, "holding image", "display color", "chance eye", "zone", "effect", "sound", "character", and "light emission" are set. ing. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is reserved. Reserved images will be described later in detail.
"Display color" indicates the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the pending image, the player is notified or suggested the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the pending image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow so that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. Also, the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the rainbow-colored pending image may have a degree of expectation of 100%.

"Chance eye" indicates the type of the chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect of displaying a chance eye based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. A chance eye is three decorative patterns that are combined with patterns of the same color and containing different numbers. The chance game effect informs or suggests, for example, that there is a high possibility of a big win in the special symbol changes after the special symbol change in which the chance game effect is started. Also, in the plurality of variable performances, the chance performance may be performed multiple times. In the illustrated example, one of "RO1" and "RO2" is executed as the type of chance effect. Also, the order of "RO1" and "RO2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Zone" indicates the type of zone effect. The zone effect is, for example, a effect to expect a big win in the variation of the special symbols. The zone production performed based on the result of prior determination may be a production that makes one expect a big hit in the special pattern variation in which the zone production is started, or a special next to the special pattern variation in which the zone production is started. It may be an effect to expect a big hit in the pattern variation. In the illustrated example, either "ZO1" or "ZO2" is executed as the type of zone effect. In addition, the order of "ZO1" and "ZO2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect rendering. The effect effect is a effect by displaying an effect image on the image display unit 114 to expect a big win in the variation of the special symbols. An effect image is an image, such as an image of any one of a plurality of colors, used to enhance the effect of the effect image on the player's vision. For example, in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, the color of the effect image may be set such that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. Further, in the variable performance in which the rainbow effect image is displayed, the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot may be used. That is, the rainbow-colored effect image may have a degree of expectation of 100%. Also, the effect image may be, for example, an image imitating light. The effect production performed based on the result of the prior determination may be a production expected to be a big hit in the special pattern variation in which the effect production is started, or a special next to the special pattern variation in which the effect production is started. It may be an effect to expect a big hit in the pattern variation. In the illustrated example, one of "EF1" and "EF2" is executed as the type of effect production. In addition, the order of "EF1" and "EF2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Sound" indicates the type of sound effect. A sound effect is a effect of outputting sound from the speaker 156 . The sound production performed based on the result of prior determination may be a production to expect a big hit in the special symbol variation in which the sound production is started, or the special next to the special symbol variation in which the sound production is started. It may be an effect to expect a big hit in the pattern variation. In the illustrated example, one of "SO1" and "SO2" is executed as the type of sound effect. In addition, the order of "SO1" and "SO2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Character" indicates the type of character presentation. The role production is a production in which the movable accessory 115 moves. The character production performed based on the result of the prior determination may be a production that makes one expect a big win in the special pattern variation in which the character production is started, or a special symbol variation in which the character production is started. It may be an effect to expect that it will be a big hit in the next special symbol variation. In the illustrated example, one of "CH1" and "CH2" is executed as the type of character effect. Also, the order of "CH1" and "CH2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Luminance" indicates the type of lighting effect at the time of winning. Winning lighting effects are effects in which the winning first starting hole 121 or second starting hole 122 is illuminated by a lamp when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 121 or second starting hole 122 . For example, the luminescent colors may be set in the order of blue, green, red, and iridescent so that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. Further, in the variable performance relating to the light emission performance at the time of winning in which the light emitting color is rainbow color, the variable performance may be such that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. That is, the rainbow emission color may have a degree of expectation of 100%. In the illustrated example, one of "LU1" and "LU2" is executed as the type of the lighting effect at the time of winning. Also, the order of "LU1" and "LU2" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines a pre-determined effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a pre-determined effect pattern corresponding to the pre-determined pattern set in the pre-determination process (see FIG. 32) based on the tables shown in FIGS.
For example, in FIG. 56, when the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-determined pattern is "JR6", "AR6" is selected as the pre-determined effect pattern. And in this pre-judgment effect pattern "AR6", "holding image", "display color", "chance eye", "zone", "effect", "sound", "role", "light emission" are set It is That is, in the pre-determination effect pattern “AR6”, the “holding image” is displayed, the “display color” becomes “blue”, “RO1” is executed as the “chance eye”, and “ZO1” is executed as the “zone”. is executed, "EF1" is executed as "effect", "SO1" is executed as "sound", "CH1" is executed as "character", and "LU1" is executed as "light emission".

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-determination effect pattern table used when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state, and the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state There is no pre-determination effect pattern table used in the case of That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, pre-judgment production is not performed. However, the pre-determination effect pattern table used when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state, and the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state Used when the game ball wins A pre-determined effect pattern table may be provided. Then, the effect control unit 300 uses these pre-determined effect pattern tables, and when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state, the game is played in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state When the ball wins a prize, a pre-judgment effect may be performed.

[Variation effect pattern table]
59 to 64 are diagrams showing setting examples of the variable effect patterns and tables used in the variable effect pattern selection (S3813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 38(b). Note that FIG. 59 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 60 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state is performed. Moreover, FIG. 61 shows a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state is performed. Moreover, FIG. 62 shows a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is performed. Moreover, FIG. 63 shows a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. Moreover, FIG. 64 shows a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. 59, which is used when the variable performance is performed based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB6", "PR1" to "PR3", and "PR6" to "PR13" set using FIG. The patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB6", "ER1" to "ER3", and "ER6" to "ER13" are associated on a one-to-one basis. Further, the variation pattern "PR4" is associated with the variation effect patterns "ER4-1" and "ER4-2". Further, the variation pattern "PR5" is associated with the variation effect patterns "ER5-1" and "ER5-2".

When "PR4" is set as the variation pattern, the effect control unit 300 determines the variation effect pattern by the number of times X of the variable effect executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation). do. More specifically, when the number X of variable effects is not within a specific range, the effect control section 300 determines the variable effect pattern to be "ER4-1". This specific range is the same as the range used in the setting of the pre-determined effect pattern (see "number of fluctuations (X)" in "AR4-1" and "AR4-2" in FIG. 56). In addition, when the number of times X of the variable performance executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) is within a specific range, the performance control unit 300 sets the variable performance pattern to "ER4-2". decide. Even when "PR5" is set as the variation pattern, the variation effect pattern is determined by the same method.

In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. 60, which is used when the variable performance is performed based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state. For the variation patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3" and "PE1" set using FIG. 25 above, the variation production patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3" and "EE1" are associated one-to-one.
Moreover, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. Variation pattern "EF1", "EF2" for the variation patterns "PF1", "PF2", "PG1" to "PG3", and "PH1" to "PH8" set using FIG. , “EG1” to “EG3” and “EH1” to “EH8” are associated one-to-one.
Moreover, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. Fluctuation patterns "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are associated one-to-one with the fluctuation patterns "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using FIG. there is

Also, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. For the fluctuation patterns "PK1", "PK2", "PL1" to "PL3", and "PM1" to "PM3" set using FIG. 28 above, "EK1", "EK2", "EL1 ” to “EL3” and “EM1” to “EM3” are associated one-to-one.
Also, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. "EN1" to "EN3" and "EO1" are associated one-to-one with the variation patterns "PN1" to "PN3" and "PO1" set using FIG. .

Incidentally, the number of variable effect patterns is not limited to the number shown in FIGS.
For example, the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is larger than the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. The number of variation effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on is a loss may be greater. In addition, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the prize winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a big hit, and the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 1 is a loss may be larger. And, in this case, than the number of fluctuation production patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a big hit, the first in the special time-saving game state The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the starting port 121 is a loss may be smaller.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state, or when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. Even in this case, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by various effects. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 is a loss in the special time-saving game state, it is difficult to improve the interest of the game because the number of variable performance patterns is small. Therefore, the player should recognize that the game ball should be entered into the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be entered into the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state. can be done.

In addition, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a big hit, is larger than the number of variation production patterns to be used in the first start port 121 in the normal game state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 1 is a loss may be larger. In addition, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is lost is more than the number of fluctuation performance patterns used in the special time-saving game state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of (1) is a jackpot may be larger. And, in this case, than the number of variable production patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the first in the special time-saving gaming state The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the prize winning to the starting port 121 is a loss may be smaller.

Also, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a big hit, is larger than the number of variation production patterns used in the normal game state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 1 is a loss may be larger. In addition, to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the number of fluctuation performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a big hit. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 1 is a loss may be larger. And, in this case, than the number of variable production patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the first in the specific time-saving gaming state The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the starting port 121 is a loss may be smaller.
Also, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a big hit, is larger than the number of variation production patterns used in the normal game state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 1 is a loss may be larger. In addition, to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the number of fluctuation performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of (1) is a jackpot may be larger. And, in this case, than the number of variable production patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the first in the specific time-saving gaming state The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the starting port 121 is a loss may be smaller.

Here, the variable performance is a performance for notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not the player has won a big hit) in a dramatic manner by variably displaying the decorative symbols and then stopping displaying them.
In addition, in the variable effect pattern shown in the figure, "Pseudo continuous number", "Normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "Final display color", "Zone", "Reach fan", "Effect", "Role","Sound","Button","Promotion", and "Promotion" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-runs). This pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear as if the decorative symbols are being variably displayed a plurality of times during the variably displaying of the special symbols for one variability. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 temporarily stops the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols before entering the ready-to-win state, and then restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed. End the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" means a pseudo-stopped state in which the symbols appear to be stopped at first glance, but actually the symbols are slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the symbol is a state treated as a continuation of the fluctuation on the game control. Further, the determination stop of the symbol means a state in which the special symbol is determined as the symbol in the variable display for one variation. Incidentally, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after setting the ready-to-win state. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 may restart the variable display of the decorative symbols without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-consecutive number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the pseudo-continuous number of times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability), which is the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the degree of expectation is set to be higher as the number of times of pseudo continuation is larger.

"Normal" indicates the type of ready-to-win effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
"SPSP reach" indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2" and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Final display color" indicates the final display color of the variation image (described later). In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is notified or suggested to the player. In the illustrated example, one of "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variation image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent so that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. Also, the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the rainbow-colored fluctuation image may have a degree of expectation of 100%.

"Zone" indicates the type of zone effect. In the illustrated example, one of "ZO3", "ZO4", and "ZO5" is executed as the type of zone effect. In addition, the order of "ZO3", "ZO4", and "ZO5" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
"Reach fanning" indicates the type of reach fanning effect. The ready-to-win production is a production to incite whether or not to execute the ready-to-win production. In the illustrated example, one of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect rendering. In the illustrated example, one of "EF3" and "EF4" is executed as the type of effect production. In addition, the order of "EF3" and "EF4" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
"Character" indicates the type of character presentation. In the illustrated example, any one of "CH3", "CH4", and "CH5" is executed as the type of character performance. In addition, the order of "CH3", "CH4", and "CH5" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
"Sound" indicates the type of sound effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SO3", "SO4", and "SO5" is executed as the type of sound effect. In addition, the order of "SO3", "SO4", and "SO5" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Button" indicates the type of button operation effect. The button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161 . The button operation effect may be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. The button operation performance performed based on the result of the prior determination may be a performance that makes the player expect a big win in the special symbol variation in which the button operation performance is started, or the special symbol variation in which the button operation performance is started. It may be an effect to expect that it will be a big hit in the next special symbol variation. In the illustrated example, one of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3" is executed as the type of button operation effect. In addition, the order of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

“Promotion incitement” means a performance inciting promotion. The promotion promotion effect is whether or not to change the decorative pattern to inform that the game state will be more advantageous for the player after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. It is a performance that stirs up something.
"Promoting" means promotion performance. The promotion performance is a performance of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, and then changing it to a decorative pattern that informs that the game state will be more advantageous for the player. . In this promotion effect, for example, after the decorative symbol "555" is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol "777" is displayed as the stop symbol.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 64. FIG. Specifically, the effect control section 300 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 15) based on the tables shown in FIGS.
For example, in FIG. 59, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", "-" is set for "pseudo-continuous number", "zone", "ready-to-reach", "promotion" and "promotion". That is, when "EB1" is selected as the variable production pattern, the pseudo-continuous production, zone production, ready-to-reach promotion production, promotion promotion production and promotion production are not executed. In addition, in the variable effect pattern "EB1", "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "final display color ' becomes 'red', 'EF3' is executed as 'effect', 'CH3' is executed as 'character', 'SO3' is executed as 'sound', and 'BU1' is executed as 'button'. executed.
Also, shown in FIG. 64, in the variable effect pattern table used when the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed, the "determination result" associated with the "off"" Pseudo Consecutive Count", "Normal", "SP Reach", "SPSP Reach", "Final Display Color", "Zone", "Reach Up", "Effect", "Character", "Sound", "Button" , “Promotion Instigation” and “Promotion” are set to “-”. That is, when the variation production that the determination result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is wrong is performed, pseudo continuous production, reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, fluctuation None of the change of the display color of the image, the zone production, the ready-to-win production, the effect production, the character production, the sound production, the button operation production, the promotion promotion production, and the promotion production are executed.

[Production image]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65 , an effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300 . In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, and the number of times of execution image 501. . The image display unit 114 also displays a change image 62, an omen image 502, a remaining number of arrivals image 503, a chance image 63, a zone notification image 64, a zone identification image 65, a zone effect image 66, an SP reach image 67, and an SP SP reach image. Image 68, button operation image 69, menu display image 504, customer waiting image 505, menu image 506, clear negative image 507, pseudo-repeat image 70, pseudo-repeat effect image 71, pseudo-repeat count image 72, opening image 74, promotion image 508, specific area image 509, first right shot image 75, round image 76, round number image 77, special working hours selection image 510, special working hours start image 78, second hitting right image 511, special working hours remaining number image 79, Reach fan effect image 94, first transition image 512, result image 513, left-handed image 514, winning notification image 515, continuous image 516, specific time reduction start image 517, third right-handed image 518, second transition image 519, mode Start image 520, specific time saving selection image 521, specific time saving remaining number image 524, 4th hitting right image 525, arrival notification image 526, end image 527, first per suggestion image 528, remaining time image 529, second per suggestion image 91, a character effect image 92, a second starting effect image 93, a radio wave error notification image 530, a returning image 531, and a magnetic error notification image 532 may be displayed.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), three decorative designs 41 are displayed on the image display section 114 . In addition, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern on the right side. The pattern arranged in the 2 is sometimes called a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41". Also, when the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three decorative designs 41". Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 41 with the same numbers may be referred to as "coordinated decorative patterns 41".

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, there is a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 65(1)) in which characters such as numbers are displayed and character images are displayed, and a display mode in which characters such as numbers are displayed. There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 68 (20) and FIG. 74 (22)) that is mainly displayed. Images such as characters provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and the pattern can be identified by the image of the character or the like. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness has a higher proportion of the region of the character portion in the decorative pattern 41 than the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change of the game state or the progress of the production. Although details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach production, the special time-saving game state, and the specific time-saving game state, etc. The decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is in cases other than these Is displayed. Further, the display mode and display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be different between the special time-saving gaming state and the specific time-saving gaming state.
The decorative design 41 with low decorativeness may also display images such as simple pictures and characters in addition to characters such as numbers. 68(20), 74(22), etc., are more decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in FIG. 65(1), etc. Anything with a low

In the variation effect of the decorative symbols 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downward). ”) is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number “3”) is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number “1”) is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped according to the stop display of the special pattern. Note that the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65(1) is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 65(2), the image display unit 114 is in the process of displaying the special symbols (the decorative symbols 41 are being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the stop display is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variation image 51 has a spherical shape. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

In addition, the variable image 51 changes its display mode such as display color, and notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is set to be displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the variation image 51, the degree of expectation may be higher in the later order. Further, the degree of expectation of the rainbow-colored variation image 51 may be 100%.

(Holding image 52)
As shown in FIG. 65(3), the image display unit 114 displays the pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). That is, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51 . Also, in the illustrated example, the retained image 52 has a spherical shape. In addition, a holding base is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes. Hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 51 and the display mode of the white reserved image 52 may be referred to as the normal display mode.

Here, as described above, winning at the first starting port 121 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the first starting port 121 . In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 52 generated by winning the first start opening 121 are arranged in the area on the left side of the moving image 51, in order from a position close to the moving image 51 to a position away from the moving image 51. That is, they are displayed side by side from the right side to the left side.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, even when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a maximum of four reservations are generated. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the second starting port 122 . In the present embodiment, the plurality of holding images 52 generated by winning the second start opening 122 are arranged in a region on the right side of the moving image 51 in order from a position close to the moving image 51 to a position away from the moving image 51, that is, on the left side. are displayed side by side from the top to the right.
Further, in this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. In addition, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 displayed by winning the first starting port 121 and the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 displayed by winning the second starting port 122 are different display modes. good too.

Further, in the following description, the maximum of four reserved images 52 displayed are "first reserved image 52", "second reserved image 52", and "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

(hold number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . In the pending number display 55, the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the pending number of winnings to the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small pattern 56)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the image display unit 114 displays a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). A small pattern 56 is displayed to indicate that the variable display is being performed (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner). The small pattern 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300 to be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to be stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbols.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images respectively corresponding to the decorative patterns 41 and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display section 114 . The small pattern 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁As described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode. It is displayed only in a less sensitive display mode. However, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. In other words, the small pattern 56 should be less decorative than the decorative pattern 41, which is highly decorative.
When the three patterns constituting the small pattern 56 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the upper side is the "upper small pattern 56", the pattern arranged in the center is the "medium and small pattern 56", and the lower side. The pattern arranged in the . is sometimes called a "lower small pattern 56". When the upper small pattern 56 and the lower small pattern 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "upper and lower small patterns 56". Also, when the upper small pattern 56, the medium and small pattern 56, and the lower small pattern 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three small patterns 56". Furthermore, the three small patterns 56 with the same numbers may be referred to as "double small patterns 56".

The small symbols 56 are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner indicating that the special symbols are variably displayed as the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is won. In the small pattern 56, during scrolling, the numerical image is repeatedly displayed from "1" to "9" while incrementing by one, and then again from "1" to be incremented by one. Then, when the special symbol is stop-displayed, the small symbol 56 is stop-displayed. In the illustrated example, the numbers indicated by the stopped small symbols 56 match the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols 41 . To explain further, in the example of FIG. 65(1), as the small pattern 56, a number corresponding to "213" of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. Incidentally, the small pattern 56 is also an example of a decorative pattern in a broad sense.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the image display section 114 displays a stage image 61 as a background of the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Also, the stage image 61 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61 . The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when a variable effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variable effect (for example, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed) is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 61 may be switched for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . More specifically, the stage image 61 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, and the specific time-saving game state.

(Execution count image 501)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the image display section 114 displays an execution count image 501 . This number-of-executions image 501 is an image showing the number of times of variable display newly performed after the number of times of variable display of special symbols is reset (the number of times of variable presentation of decorative symbols 41). The display content of the execution count image 501 is updated each time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the number-of-executions image 501 shows the text "99GAME" including the number of times the variable effect has been performed. It should be noted that the number of variable effects shown in the execution count image 501 may be the number of times that the variable effects have been executed, or the number of variable effects including not only the number of times that has been executed but also the variable effects that are being executed. There may be. Further, the timing at which the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the variable effect is finished.

(Change image 62)
As shown in FIG. 66(7), the image display section 114 displays a changing image 62. FIG. This changing image 62 is an image displayed in the changing image 51 and the pending image 52, which are in a display mode different from the normal display mode. The change image 62 is displayed, for example, when a change effect is executed. A change effect is a effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 . More specifically, the change effect is a effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “display color, etc.”) of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 . The change effect may be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. Note that the changing image 62 may be displayed without performing the changing effect. That is, the changing image 62 may be displayed when the changing image 51 or the pending image 52 starts to be displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the third reserved image 52 as the change image 62 .
Further, the changing image 62 may be displayed overlapping the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 , or the changing image 62 may be displayed instead of the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 . When the changing image 62 is displayed instead of the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 , the changing image 62 is captured as the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 .

(Omen image 502)
As shown in FIG. 66(7), an omen image 502 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This portent image 502 is an image that is displayed before a remaining number of arrivals image 503, which will be described later, is displayed when the remaining number of times notification effect (see S4215 in FIG. 42) is executed. The portent image 502 is displayed in the area where the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed in the image display unit 114 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating light is displayed as the precursor image 502 .

(Remaining number of arrivals image 503)
As shown in FIG. 66(8), the image display unit 114 displays a remaining number of times of arrival image 503 . This reach remaining number of times image 503 is an image showing the number of times of variation production required until the specific time-saving gaming state. The remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is displayed after the precursor image 502 is displayed when the remaining number of times notification effect is executed. In addition, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated each time the variable effect is performed. In other words, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated by the remaining number of times update effect (see S4216 in FIG. 42). In the illustrated example, as the reaching remaining number image 503, the text of "200 more" including the number of fluctuation effects required until the specific time-saving gaming state is reached is shown. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the remaining number-of-reaches image 503 may be the number of times including the variable effects being executed, or the number of times excluding the variable effects being executed. Further, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the end of the variable effect.

(Chance eye image 63)
As shown in FIG. 66( 9 ), the image display section 114 displays a chance image 63 . The chance eye image 63 is an image displayed when the chance eye effect is being executed. The chance eye image 63 is displayed in the decorative pattern 41 . In the illustrated example, as the chance image 63, a blue image is displayed on each character of the three decorative patterns 41. As shown in FIG. Note that the chance eye image 63 may be displayed on the characters of each of the three decorative symbols 41, but may not be displayed on the character. Also, the chance eye image 63 may be displayed on the character of each of the three decorative symbols 41 but not displayed on the character. That is, the chance eye image 63 may be displayed on at least part of each of the three decorative symbols 41 .

(Zone notification image 64)
As shown in FIG. 67(13), a zone notification image 64 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This zone notification image 64 is an image for notifying that the zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 64 shows the text "Enter the chance zone!"

(Zone identification image 65)
As shown in FIG. 67(14), a zone identification image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This zone identification image 65 is an image for identifying the type of zone effect being executed. In the illustrated example, the text of "chance zone" is shown as the zone identification image 65. FIG.

(Zone effect image 66)
As shown in FIG. 67(15), a zone effect image 66 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This zone effect image 66 is an effect image displayed when the zone effect is executed. The zone effect image 66 may be displayed based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the image display section 114 as the zone effect image 66 .

(SP reach image 67)
As shown in FIG. 68(20), the SP reach image 67 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. This SP reach image 67 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 67 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 68 ( 21 ), the SPSP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This SPSP ready-to-win image 68 is an image showing that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Button operation image 69)
As shown in FIG. 68(22), the image display section 114 displays a button operation image 69. FIG. The button operation image 69 is an image displayed when the button operation effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 69 , the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 69 . In this embodiment, the button operation image 69 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and when the effect button 161 is operated within the predetermined period of time after the button operation image 69 is displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the button operation effect, the effective period of the operation of the effect button 161 is set as the display period of the button operation image 69 .

(Menu display image 504)
As shown in FIG. 69 ( 26 ), the image display section 114 displays a menu display image 504 . The menu display image 504 is an image that informs the player that a menu image 506, which will be described later, can be displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display image 504 shows the text "Show menu".

(Customer waiting image 505)
As shown in FIG. 69 ( 28 ), the image display section 114 displays a customer waiting image 505 . The customer waiting image 505 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 505 is displayed over the entire surface of the image display section 114 . However, the customer waiting image 505 may be displayed on a part of the image display unit 114 and not displayed on the other part. The customer waiting image 505 is displayed when the second customer waiting effect (see S4110 in FIG. 41) is being executed. On the other hand, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed when the first customer waiting effect (see S4109 in FIG. 41) is being executed. Also, the customer waiting image 505 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, as the customer waiting image 505, a moving image related to the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed.

(Menu image 506)
As shown in FIG. 69 ( 30 ), the menu image 506 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The menu image 506 is a screen displaying items of effects that can be set by operating the effect buttons 161 and the effect keys 162 by the player. In the illustrated example, the menu image 506 is provided with "start", "customize", "demo movie", and "recommended character" as items of effects. When any of the items in menu image 506 is selected, an image for setting the selected item is displayed on image display portion 114 . In this embodiment, the menu image 506 is displayed by operating the effect button 161 while the menu display image 504 (see FIG. 69 (26)) is being displayed.

(Clear negative image 507)
As shown in FIG. 70( 2 ), the image display section 114 displays a clear negative image 507 . The clear negative image 507 is displayed when the clear negative effect (see S4209 in FIG. 42) is executed. The display of the clear negative image 507 suggests to the player that the RAM clear has not been executed. In the illustrated example, as the clear negative image 507, a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed.

(Pseudo-continuous image 70)
As shown in FIG. 71(3), the image display section 114 displays a pseudo-continuous image 70 . This pseudo-continuous image 70 is an image indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "NEXT" is shown as the pseudo-continuous image 70 .

(Pseudo-ream effect image 71)
As shown in FIG. 71(3), the image display section 114 displays a pseudo-continuous effect image 71 . This pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is an effect image displayed when the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 70 as the pseudo-continuous effect image 71 .

(Pseudo consecutive count image 72)
As shown in FIG. 71(4), the image display section 114 displays a pseudo consecutive number image 72 . The pseudo consecutive number image 72 is an image indicating the pseudo consecutive number. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 72 displays the text “×2”.

(Opening image 74)
As shown in FIG. 73(17), an opening image 74 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This opening image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the start of a big win game or the start of a small win game. In the illustrated example, as the opening image 74, text "BIG Bonus! Configurations" indicating the start of the jackpot game is displayed. The opening image 74 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished.

(promoting image 508)
As shown in FIG. 73(18), the promotion image 508 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The promotion image 508 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, the promotion image 508 includes the text "Aim!!" and an image simulating the game area 111. Further, a specific area image 509 is shown in the promotion image 508 .
The specific area image 509 is an image for prompting the player to let the game ball flow down to the specific area. In this embodiment, the specific area is the right side of the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, an image of an arrow pointing to the right side of the game area 111 in the promotion image 508 is displayed as the specific area image 509 .

(First right shot image 75)
As shown in FIG. 74(19), the image display section 114 displays the first right shot image 75 . This first hitting image 75 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the first right-handed image 75, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. The first hitting right image 75 is displayed in, for example, the execution of the jackpot game, the special time-saving game state, and the specific time-saving game state.

(Image 76 during round)
As shown in FIG. 74(19), the image display section 114 displays an in-round image 76 . This in-round image 76 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The in-round image 76 is displayed during the round in the jackpot game.

(Round number image 77)
As shown in FIG. 74(19), a round number image 77 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This round number image 77 is an image for notifying the player of the round number of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 77. FIG.

(Special time saving selection image 510)
As shown in FIG. 74 ( 20 ), the image display section 114 displays a special time saving selection image 510 . The special time saving selection image 510 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of production in the special time saving game state. In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 510, two modes of "A" and "B" are selectable. The player can select any mode by operating the production key 162 when the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed.

(Special time saving start image 78)
As shown in FIG. 74 ( 21 ), a special time saving start image 78 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This special time saving start image 78 is an image for notifying the start of the special time saving game state. In the example of illustration, the text of "A mode plunge!" is displayed as special time saving start image 78. "A mode" currently displayed on the special time saving start image 78 is the mode selected in the special time saving selection image 510 (refer FIG. 74 (20)).

(Second right shot image 511)
As shown in FIG. 74 ( 21 ), the image display section 114 displays the second shot-to-right image 511 . The second hitting image 511 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the second right-handed image 511, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. The second shot-to-right image 511 has a larger display size in the image display section 114 than the first shot-to-right image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)). Moreover, the 2nd hitting-right image 511 is displayed when the special time saving start image 78 is displayed, and is not displayed when the special time saving start image 78 is not displayed. However, the 2nd hitting-right image 511 may be displayed when the special time saving start image 78 is not displayed.

(Special time saving remaining number image 79)
As shown in FIG. 74 ( 22 ), the image display unit 114 displays a special time saving remaining number image 79 . This special time saving remaining number image 79 is an image showing the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the special time saving remaining number image 79, the text of "30 times" indicating that the special symbol lottery remaining number of times in the special time saving game state is 30 times is displayed.

(Reach fan effect image 94)
As shown in FIG. 77(13), the image display section 114 displays a reach-flavor effect image 94 . The ready-to-win fan effect image 94 is an image displayed when the ready-to-win fan effect image 94 is being executed. In the ready-to-win performance, after the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the scrolling right decorative pattern 41 is decelerated, and a performance is executed to encourage whether or not the pattern coinciding with the left decorative pattern 41 is stopped.
The reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41 as the reach fanning effect image 94 .

(First transitional image 512)
As shown in FIG. 78(21), the first transitional image 512 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The first transition image 512 is an image displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 512 . Also, the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 512 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transitional image 512 . The first transitional image 512 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display section 114 . However, the first transitional image 512 may be displayed on a part of the image display unit 114 and not displayed on the other part. In addition, the first transition image 512 displayed when switching from the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state to the normal game The display mode may be different from the first transition image 512 displayed when switching to the stage image 61 according to the state.

(Result image 513)
As shown in FIG. 78(22), a result image 513 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The result image 513 is an image showing the result of the jackpot game. The result image 513 is displayed when the first transition image 512 is displayed when a jackpot game is played. Further, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed before the first transition image 512 is displayed, the result image 513 shows the cumulative result of the jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 513 includes a text of "A mode" indicating that it was in a special time-saving game state, a text of "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times, and a jackpot game , the text of "3024 Pt Acquisition" corresponding to the prize ball is displayed.

(Left shot image 514)
As shown in FIG. 80 ( 31 ), the image display section 114 displays a left-handed image 514 . The left-handed image 514 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the left-handed image 514, an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left-handed" are displayed. The left shot image 514 is displayed when switching from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, or when switching from the specific time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Prize notification image 515)
As shown in FIG. 84 ( 21 ), the image display section 114 displays a winning notification image 515 . The winning notification image 515 is an image for notifying that the game ball has won the second big winning hole 126 . The winning notification image 515 is displayed when the game ball wins the second big winning hole 126 in the small winning game. In the illustrated example, as the winning notification image 515, the text "Winning!"

(continuation image 516)
A continuation image 516 is displayed in FIG. 84 (23). The continuation image 516 is an image that notifies the continuation of the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Continue A mode!!"

(Specific time reduction start image 517)
As shown in FIG. 86( 6 ), the image display unit 114 displays a specific short working hours start image 517 . The specific time saving start image 517 is an image that notifies the start of the specific time saving gaming state. In the example of illustration, as specific time saving start image 517, the text of "specific game START!" Moreover, the 3rd hitting image 518 to the right is displayed on the specific time saving start image 517 .
The third hitting image 518 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the third shot-to-right image 518 . The third shot-to-right image 518 has a larger display size in the image display section 114 than the first shot-to-right image 75 (see FIG. 74(19)). Moreover, the 3rd hitting right image 518 is displayed when the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed, and when the specific time saving start image 517 is not displayed, it is not displayed. However, the 3rd hitting right image 518 may be displayed when the specific time saving start image 517 is not displayed.

(Second transitional image 519)
As shown in FIG. 87(7), the image display section 114 displays the second transition image 519 . The second transition image 519 is an image displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In the present embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state via the second transition image 519 . In the illustrated example, an image simulating a shutter is displayed as the second transitional image 519 . The second transitional image 519 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display section 114 . However, the second transitional image 519 may be displayed on a part of the image display unit 114 and not displayed on the other part.

(Mode start image 520)
As shown in FIG. 87(8), a mode start image 520 is displayed on the image display portion 114 . The mode start image 520 is an image that notifies that the production of the mode in the specific time-saving gaming state is started. In the illustrated example, the mode start image 520 shows the text "Enter chance mode!"

(Specific short working hours selection image 521)
As shown in FIG. 87( 9 ), the image display unit 114 displays a specific short working hour selection image 521 . The specific time saving selection image 521 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of production in the specific time saving game state. In the example of illustration, in the specific time saving selection image 521, any of the three modes of "a", "b" and "c" can be selected. The player can select any mode by operating the production key 162 when the specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed.

(Specific time saving remaining number image 524)
As shown in FIG. 87(10), the image display unit 114 displays a specific reduced working hours remaining number image 524 . Specific time saving remaining number image 524 is an image that suggests the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the specific time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, as the specific time saving remaining number image 524, the text of "294" indicating that the special symbol lottery remaining number of times in the specific time saving gaming state is 294 times is displayed. In addition, unlike the special time saving remaining number of times image 79 (see FIG. 74 (22)), the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 does not include the text of "times" in the image.

(Fourth right shot image 525)
As shown in FIG. 87(12), the image display section 114 displays the fourth right shot image 525 . The fourth hitting right image 525 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the fourth right-handed image 525, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. Further, the fourth shot-to-right image 525 has a larger display size in the image display section 114 than the first shot-to-right image 75 (see FIG. 74(19)) and the third shot-to-right image 518 (see FIG. 85(6)). .

(Arrival notification image 526)
As shown in FIG. 89(4), an arrival notification image 526 is displayed on the image display section 114 . Arrival notification image 526 is required until the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols (number of times of fluctuation production) executed from establishment of predetermined conditions (execution of RAM clear, reset of number of fluctuations) is in a specific time saving gaming state. This is an image for notifying that the number of times has been reached. The arrival notification image 526 is displayed when the final variation effect required to enter the specific time-saving gaming state is completed. In the illustrated example, as the arrival notification image 526, an image of "0" is displayed, which indicates that the number of fluctuation effects required to enter the specific time-saving gaming state is 0 times.

(end image 527)
As shown in FIG. 96(18), an end image 527 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The end image 527 is displayed when the specific time-saving gaming state ends without the jackpot game being performed. In the illustrated example, the end image 527 shows the text "End...".

(First hit suggestion image 528)
As shown in FIG. 101(3), the image display unit 114 displays a first winning suggestive image 528 . The first win suggesting image 528 is an image suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state is a big win or a small win. In this embodiment, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery performed when the first transition image 512 (see FIG. 100 (2)) is displayed is a big hit or a small hit, the first hit suggestion image 528 is displayed. Is displayed. That is, the display of the first win suggestion image 528 suggests to the player that the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In the illustrated example, as the first winning suggestive image 528, a text of "It's still going on" and an image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are displayed. In addition, in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the variable production in the special time-saving game state, and the fluctuation production in the specific time-saving game state, the first hit suggestion image 528 is not displayed. good too. However, the first hit suggestion image 528 may be displayed even in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the variable production in the special time saving game state, and the fluctuation production in the specific time saving game state. .

(Remaining time image 529)
As shown in FIG. 102(8), a remaining time image 529 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The remaining time image 529 is an image showing the remaining time until the second big winning door 126D is opened and closed. In this embodiment, the remaining time image 529 is displayed when the game ball does not enter the second large winning opening 126 within a predetermined time after the second large winning opening door 126D opens. In the illustrated example, the remaining time image 529 shows the text “3:00 seconds left”.

(Second win suggestion image 91)
As shown in FIG. 109 ( 3 ), the image display section 114 displays a second win suggestion image 91 . This second win suggestion image 91 is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, and is not displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is neither a big win nor a small win. Therefore, by displaying the second winning suggestion image 91, it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. The second winning suggestive image 91 may be a moving image. In addition, while the second hit suggestion image 91 is displayed in the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state and the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state , Variable production based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state , the second hit suggestion image 91 may not be displayed. That is, a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state and the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit or a small win. The second winning suggestive image 91 may be displayed only in the case.

(Character effect image 92)
As shown in FIG. 112(12), the character object effect image 92 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This character effect image 92 is an effect image displayed when the character effect is being performed. In the illustrated example, a blue image as the role object effect image 92 is displayed around the area overlapping the medium movable role object 115B in the image display section 114 .

(Second starting effect image 93)
As shown in FIG. 116(5), the image display section 114 displays the second starting effect image 93 . This second start effect image 93 is displayed in a variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 . That is, the second start effect image 93 is not displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start hole 121 .

(Radio wave error notification image 530)
As shown in FIG. 118(2), a radio wave error notification image 530 is displayed on the image display section 114 . A radio wave error notification image 530 is an image for notifying a radio wave error. In the illustrated example, as the radio wave error notification image 530, the text "Radio wave error" is shown.

(Returning image 531)
As shown in FIG. 119 ( 2 ), the image display section 114 displays a returning image 531 . The recovering image 531 is an image indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on, the returning image 531 is displayed before the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "returning" is shown as the during-returning image 531. FIG.

(Magnetic error notification image 532)
As shown in FIG. 119(3), the image display section 114 displays a magnetic error notification image 532 . A magnetic error notification image 532 is an image for notifying a magnetic error. In the illustrated example, the text "magnet detected" is shown as the magnetic error notification image 532 .

(Variation production example 1)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 69, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variable effect example 1) will be specifically described. Variation production example 1 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 121 in the normal game state. Further, in the variation production example 1, the variation production is performed five times.
65 to 69 are selected in order of "ER1", "ER3", "ER2", "ER2", and "ER6" as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. It is a variable production that is executed in the case. In addition, the 5-time variable effect is the 100th to 104th variable effect after resetting the number of times of variable display of special symbols by clearing the RAM. In addition, the pre-determination effect is executed in these five times of variation effect. This pre-determined effect is an effect executed when "AR1", "AR3", "AR2", "AR2", and "AR6" are selected in order as the "pre-determined effect pattern" in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65(1), the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, at this time, the image display section 114 displays the decorative pattern 41 , the pending number display 55 , the small pattern 56 , the stage image 61 , and the execution count image 501 . Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "0", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 2 Shows "0", which is the number of pending prizes for the starting port. Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “99GAME”.

Then, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 65(2), the variation of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. In the present embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 are respectively displayed in order by displaying the numbers "1" to "9" to perform variable display. That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 are individually changeable. The left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, the right decorative design 41, and the small design 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English characters. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 121, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加Further, in the present embodiment, during execution of the variable production, the speaker 156 outputs a production sound corresponding to the variable production being executed. Further, although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emission mode according to the variable effect being executed during execution of the variable effect.

In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are fluctuated (scrolled) at a particularly high speed to indicate that they are in a difficult-to-recognize state, in order to make it easier to understand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed respectively. indicated by an arrow (↓). In the example shown in FIG. 65(2), the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and are moved in the vertical direction during the variable display. (Scrolling), but not limited to this aspect. For example, the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 may be arranged vertically and each of them may move (scroll) in the horizontal direction.
Further, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see. For example, the state in which the decorative design 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be the state in which the decorative design 41 is not displayed. That is, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, as in the state shown in FIG. 65 (1), in a state where the winning of the first start port 121 is not suspended and the special symbol is not changed, the game ball is inserted into the first start port 121. wins a prize, first, a hold for winning a prize to the first starting port 121 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24). Therefore, the "holding number" is "1" when the variation pattern is selected. Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 121 is subtracted. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in a state where the winning of the second starting port 122 is not suspended and the special symbol does not change, first, the second There is a hold about the winning to the 2 starting port 122 . Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "holding number" is "1" when the variation pattern is selected. Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the number of pending prizes for the second starting port 122 is subtracted.

Also, as in the state shown in FIG. 65 (1), in a state where the winning of the first start port 121 is not suspended and the special symbol is not changed, the game ball is inserted into the first start port 121. wins, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the pending image 52 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(2), "0" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121. FIG. Also, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 .
In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in a state where the winning of the second starting port 122 is not suspended and the special symbol does not fluctuate, the number of pending second starting ports 122 is displayed. A "1" is displayed in 55, and a pending image 52 is displayed. After that, “0” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 . Also, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 .

Next, when three game balls enter the first starting hole 121, three pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 65(3). At this time, every time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加In addition, "3" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first start port 121. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(4), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, and the fourth pending image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, based on the winning to the first starting port 121, the lighting effect at the time of winning is performed. In the illustrated example, the first starting port 121 emits light in blue due to the winning lighting effect. In addition, the speaker 156 outputs a sound effect of lighting effect at the time of winning. This sound effect is different from the prize-winning sound that informs of the prize-winning to the first starting port 121 .
In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 or the small pattern 56 is temporarily stopped, a display similar to double quotation marks is displayed around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 or the small pattern 56 in order to make it easier to understand. expressed using

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(5), the right decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed, and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, after the middle decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed, it temporarily stops at the position fixed and stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. After the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 65(6) as the special symbols stop changing. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, the three small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this variable effect, all the small symbols 56 are fixedly stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "100 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(7), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Also, the second, third, and fourth pending images 52 move closer to the display position of the moving image 51 . Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 . Also, after the pending image 52 is moved, the change effect is executed, and the changed image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52 . In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52 by the change effect. Also, when the change production is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound of the change production. Also, after the start of this variation, the remaining number of times notification effect is started. In the illustrated example, the precursor image 502 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(8), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. In addition, the remaining number of times notification effect is continuously performed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text "200 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(9), "125", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. At this time, the first chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, a blue chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the first chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "199 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(10), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "3" to "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 66(11), "853", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. At this time, the second chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, green eye-of-chance images 63 are displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the second eye-of-chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “853” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "102 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "198 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (12), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "2" to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(13), the zone effect is started. In the illustrated example, a zone notification image 64 is displayed by the zone effect. The zone notification image 64 includes the text "entering the chance zone!". Also, at this time, a character production is executed. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(14), "553", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. At this time, the third chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In other words, the final chance game effect of the three chance game effects is executed. In the illustrated example, a red chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the third chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “553” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "103 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "197 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (15), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, an effect production is started. In the illustrated example, a zone effect image 66 is displayed by effect production. More specifically, a blue zone effect image 66 is displayed. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and a voice saying “Let’s go” is output from the speaker 156 . The sound effect of outputting the sound "I'm here" is the effect that makes the player expect that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(16), a character effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover part of the image display section 114 by the accessory effect. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 . In the illustrated example, a green change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 by the change effect. Also, when the change production is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound of the change production.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67(17), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67(18), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the ready-to-win effect with the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (19), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (20), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, the stage image 61, the execution count image 501, and the remaining reach count image 503 are hidden, and the SP reach image 67 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a display mode with a reduced display size and low decorativeness. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display section 114 . In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display section 114 and the right decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114 . In addition, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 when the SP ready-to-win effect is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP ready-to-win effect is being performed, if the left and right decorative patterns 41 are at positions different from the display positions before execution of the SP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 68 (19)), any position on the image display unit 114 may be displayed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (21), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 68 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, at this time, the number "4", which is the upper and lower small symbols 56, is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the medium and small pattern 56 maintains high speed fluctuation. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(22), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 68(23). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (24), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the execution count image 501, and the remaining reach count image 503 are displayed again. In this case, the execution count image 501 is displayed according to the display contents (see FIG. 68 (19)) before being hidden. On the other hand, the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is displayed with updated contents from the display contents (see (19) in FIG. 68) before being hidden. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text "196 more". Also, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 69 (25), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "104 GAME". On the other hand, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated when it is redisplayed (see (24) in FIG. 68), so it is not updated at this timing.
The update timing of the display content when the execution count image 501 is redisplayed may be the same as the update timing of the display content when the remaining reach count image 503 is redisplayed. In this case, both the execution count image 501 and the remaining reach count image 503 may be redisplayed according to the display contents after the update, or may be redisplayed according to the display contents before the update.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the special symbol stopped changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (26). At this time, the speaker 156 is outputting an effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect. Also, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a color corresponding to the previous variation effect. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light.

Next, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the menu display image 504 is displayed, the lighting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change as shown in FIG. 69(27). In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit green light. Also, at this time, the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect from the speaker 156 is smaller than that during execution of the variable effect or when the display of the menu image 506 is started (see FIG. 69 (26)). It is output by volume. Note that the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect may be output from the speaker 156 at a volume smaller than that during execution of the variable effect when the display of the menu image 506 is started.
Further, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a customer waiting image 505 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (28). Further, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the execution count image 501, the remaining reach count image 503, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61 are hidden. Also, at this time, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit red light. Also, at this time, sound is no longer output from the speaker 156 . Note that the pending number display 55 may be displayed even when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the customer waiting image 505 is hidden as shown in FIG. 69 (29), and the stage image 61, A decoration pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, an execution number image 501, an arrival remaining number image 503, and a menu display image 504 are displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 161 while the menu display image 504 is being displayed, the menu image 506 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69(30). When the menu image 506 is displayed, the execution count image 501, the remaining reach count image 503, the decoration pattern 41, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 are not displayed. Note that the pending number display 55 may be displayed even when the menu image 506 is displayed.

In addition, in the variation production example 1, the role production of the middle movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 67 (16)), the change production of the variable image 51 (see FIG. See), reach production (see FIG. 68 (19)), SP reach production (see FIG. 68 (20)), SPSP reach production (see FIG. 68 (21)), button operation production (see FIG. 68 (22)) , is an effect that is included to be executed in "ER6" (see FIG. 59), which is the variable effect pattern selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 38(b)). On the other hand, the lighting effect at the time of winning (see FIG. 65 (4)), the change effect of the pending image 52 (see FIG. 66 (7)), and the three-time chance effect (FIGS. 66 (9), (11) and FIG. 67 (14)), role production of the left movable accessory 115A (see FIG. 67 (13)), zone production (see FIG. 67 (13)), sound production (see FIG. 67 (15)), and effect production ( (15) in FIG. 67) is an effect that is not included in any of the variable effect patterns selected in the effect selection process. That is, each of the effects based on the pre-determination result can be executed in the pre-determined effect pattern "AR6" (see FIG. 56) selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). It is a performance that is included.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a special effect based on the number of executions of variations in the normal game state. Here, as a special effect, for example, the display of the remaining number of times of reaching image 503 may be mentioned. Then, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the special effect when the number of times of variation in the normal game state is less than the predetermined number of times, and executes the special effect when the number of times of change in the normal game state is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times. It is viable.
In this case, compared with the case where the special performance is executed irrespective of the number of times the variation is executed, the player can be given a special feeling that the variation is executed in the normal game state, and the highly entertaining performance is executed. A possible pachinko game machine 100 can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the menu image 506 is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 161 while the menu display image 504 and the customer waiting image 505 are being displayed. On the other hand, for example, even if the effect button 161 is operated while the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed in the variable effect (see (20) in FIG. 68), the menu image 506 is not displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the period during which the menu display image 504 and the customer waiting image 505 are displayed is determined as the valid period for operating the effect button 161 .

(Variation production example 2)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Variation production example 2 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. Incidentally, the variable effect shown in FIG. 70 is a variable effect executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable effect" in FIG. In addition, this variable performance is the 51st variable performance after the pachinko game machine 100 is restored from the power-off state without clearing the RAM, and after the number of times of variable display of the special symbols is reset. This is the 193rd variable performance. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points that are different from the example 1 of variable production will be explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the example 1 of variable production will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 in the image display section 114 in accordance with the end of the variation of the previous special design. there is Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, and an execution count image 501 are displayed. Also, at this time, “4” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “50 GAME”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, a clear denial effect is started. In the illustrated example, a clear negative image 507 is displayed by the clear negative effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(3), a remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is displayed in the area where the clear negative image 507 was displayed on the image display unit 114 . More specifically, the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is displayed in an area including at least a part of the area where the clear negative image 507 was displayed. Remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “108 more”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(4), "421", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "51 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "107 remaining".

(Variation production example 3)
FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. Variation production example 3 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 41 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 121 in the normal game state.
71 to 73 show variable effects executed when "EB4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. Also, in this variable production, a prior determination production is executed. This pre-determination effect is an effect executed when "AB4" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 71(1), the effect control section 300 confirms and stops the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. there is Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “200 GAME”. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text "100 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and a voice saying “Big win!?” is output from the speaker 156 . The sound performance of outputting the voice "big win!" That is, the sound effect of outputting the sound of "big hit!?" The sound effect indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is not limited to the above example, and any sound effect may be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(3), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous image 70 is displayed. Also, at this time, a pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 70 . At this time, the execution count image 501 and the remaining reach count image 503 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 72 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive count image 72 includes the text “×2”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(5), the zone effect is executed and the zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 64 includes the text "Rush into the hot zone!". This zone effect is a effect to expect a big win in the variation of the special symbols being executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the number "5" which is the left and right decorative symbols 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(7), the variation effect of the variation image 51 is executed, and the variation image 62 is displayed on the variation image 51 . In the illustrated example, a red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 by the change effect. Also, when the change production is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound of the change production.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(8), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(9), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, the number "5", which is the upper and lower small symbols 56, is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the medium and small pattern 56 maintains high speed fluctuation. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(10), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the character effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72(11). In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover part of the image display section 114 by the accessory effect. Also, at this time, the small symbols 56 temporarily stop at the combination of "555", so that the player is informed that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(12), the decorative pattern 41 of double stitches is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as a combination of "555". Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 72(8)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(13), a promotion promotion effect is executed. A button operation effect is executed in the promotion fan effect. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 69 is displayed by the button operation effect.
When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73(14). In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped by the combination of "777" by the promotion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(15), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again. On the other hand, the variation image 51, the execution count image 501, and the remaining reach count image 503 are not displayed.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 73 (16). The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, "777" as the small symbol 56 is determined and stopped. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777".

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(17), an opening image 74 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 73(18), a promotional image 508 is displayed. A specific area image 509 is displayed in the promotion image 508 .

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the promotion image 508 was displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(19), the first right-handed image 75, the in-round image 76, and the number-of-rounds image 77 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the round number image 77 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the last round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74(20). In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 510, the cursor is match|combined with the mode of "A".
And if predetermined time passes after the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 74 (21), the special time saving start image 78 will be displayed. Also, at this time, the second shot-to-right image 511 is displayed together with the first shot-to-right image 75 .

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 74 (22), "777", which is the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. FIG. The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "777" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed. In the illustrated example, a moving image with the theme of the sea is displayed as the stage image 61 . In addition, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. In the illustrated example, as the special time saving remaining number image 79, the text of "30 times" indicating the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state is displayed. Although illustration is omitted, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a color (for example, blue) corresponding to the "A" mode. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting an effect sound corresponding to the most recent "A" mode.

In addition, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the stage image 61 and the decoration pattern 41 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state are displayed, the menu display image 504 (see FIG. 69 (26)) may be displayed. Also, at this time, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may change. For example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may emit green light when the menu display image 504 is displayed. In addition, at this time, from the speaker 156, the production sound, compared to when the display of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is started (see FIG. 74 (22)), from a small volume may be output.
Furthermore, the speaker 156 may stop outputting sound after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, the lighting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 do not have to be changed. After that, the customer waiting image 505 (see (28) in FIG. 69) does not have to be displayed even after a certain amount of time has passed. That is, in the special time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether it is before or after the execution of the first fluctuation production, even if there is no hold in the state where the fluctuation production is not performed, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed, and the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 do not have to be hidden. However, at this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed according to the operation of the production button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 may be hidden. Then, even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the first shot-to-right image 75 may be displayed. When sound is no longer output from the speaker 156, the lighting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may change, for example, red light may be emitted.

Moreover, after this, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a variable effect based on the winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state is started. If there is no suspension when this variable effect ends, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change from blue to green as time elapses, and the menu display image 504 is displayed. Further, as the time elapses, the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect is output with a smaller volume, and then the sound is no longer output from the speaker 156 . Further, when there is no suspension when the variable performance ends, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed regardless of the length of time during which the variable performance is not performed.

In the variable production example 3, pseudo-continuous production (see FIG. 71 (3)), effect production (see FIG. 71 (3)), zone production (see FIG. 71 (5)), reach production (see FIG. 71 (6) ), change effect of the variable image 51 (see FIG. 72 (7)), SP reach effect (see FIG. 72 (8)), SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 72 (9)), button operation effect (see FIG. 72 (10 )), the role production of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 72 (11)), the promotion promotion production (see FIG. 73 (13)), and the promotion production (see FIG. 73 (14)) are the production selection processing. (See FIG. 38(b).) This is an effect including what is executed in the variable effect pattern "EB4" (see FIG. 59). On the other hand, the sound effect (see FIG. 71(2)) is a effect that is not included in the variation effect pattern selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 38(b)). That is, this sound effect based on the result of the prior determination includes execution in the pre-determined effect pattern "AB4" (see FIG. 56) selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). It is a production that is done.

(Variation production example 4)
FIGS. 75 to 80 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. FIG. In the variation production example 4, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the normal game state, and the first in the normal game state A variable effect based on the winning to the starting port 121 is included. In addition, in variation production example 4, the variation production is performed ten times.

In addition, the first five variable performances of the ten times of variable performances shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are variable performances based on winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state. These five variable performances are variable performances executed when "EH1", "EH3", "EH2", "EH2", and "EH5" are selected in order as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. . In addition, the pre-determining effect is executed in the five fluctuation effects. This pre-determination effect is an effect executed when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG.
Further, the 6th to 9th variable performances among the 10 variable performances shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are variable performances based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the normal game state. The sixth to ninth variable performances are all variable performances executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG.
In addition, the final variable performance of the ten variable performances shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 is a variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. This final variable effect is a variable effect executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. It has been permanently stopped. Moreover, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the special time-saving remaining frequency|count image 79 are displayed at this time. In the example of illustration, the text of "five times" is displayed as special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79. FIG. In addition, the reservation number display 55 of the first start opening 121 indicates "3", which is the number of reservations for winning the first start opening 121, and the reservation number display 55 of the second start opening 122 is the second start opening. "0", which is the pending number for winning a prize.

Then, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 75(2), the variation of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, at this time, the special time saving remaining number of times image 79 is switched from "five times" to "four times". Also, at this time, a variation image 51 is displayed. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting hole 122. - 特許庁

Next, when four game balls enter the second starting hole 122, four pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 75(3). At this time, every time the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting hole 122.例文帳に追加In addition, "4" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the second starting port 122. FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(4), "421", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(5), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "4 times" to "3 times."
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(6), "125", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(7), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "3 times" to "2 times."
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(8), "853", which is the three decoration patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “853” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(9), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "2 times" to "1 time."
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(10), "731", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “731” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "1 time" to "0 times." Also, at this time, a character production is executed. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and a voice saying "Let's go" is output from the speaker 156. - 特許庁It should be noted that, when the last variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state is executed, the special time-saving remaining number of times 79 may indicate the text of "LAST" instead of the text of "0 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(12), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(13), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the ready-to-win effect with the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is executed. Also, at this time, a reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue ready-to-win effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(14), the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, a character production is executed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover part of the image display section 114 by the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(15), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden. When the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is reduced and the display area in the image display section 114 is changed. In the illustrated example, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display section 114 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (16), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, the number "4", which is the upper and lower small symbols 56, is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the medium and small pattern 56 maintains high speed fluctuation. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(17), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 77(18). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, three small patterns 56 are temporarily stopped by a combination of "454". Also, at this time, when four game balls enter the second starting port 122, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122. - 特許庁Also, at this time, every time a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting hole 122. - 特許庁On the other hand, the pending image 52 is not displayed. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the winning sound may not be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (19), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped according to the display size before execution of the SP ready-to-win effect. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are displayed again. On the other hand, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 78 (20), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state with the end of the final special symbol variation in the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(21), the first transitional image 512 is displayed. When the first transition image 512 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41, the variation image 51, the pending image 52, the stage image 61, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are not displayed. On the other hand, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 are displayed.
Note that the first transitional image 512 may be displayed while moving from one side (for example, the right side) of the image display section 114 toward the opposite side (for example, the left side). In this case, the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the pending image 52, and the stage image 61 can be shown to the player so as to be hidden by being covered with the first transition image 512. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(22), a result image 513 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (23), the variation of the small symbol 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. This variation is a variation based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state. Also, in this variation, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, the variation effect using the small pattern 56 is performed without using the decorative pattern 41 . Also, in this variation, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3".
Next, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 78 (24), three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "721" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (25), the variation of the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2".
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 79 (26), three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "638" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (27), the variation of the small symbol 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1".
Next, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 79 (28), three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "583" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (29), the variation of the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 79 (30), three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "421" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 ends in a state where there is no suspension based on the winning to the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns 41 and the combination of the small patterns 56 match. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, three pending images 52, an execution count image 501, and a left-handed image 514 are displayed. The number-of-executions image 501 shows the text of "34GAME" including the number of times of the variable performance newly performed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbols was reset. At this time, the number of times shown in the number of times of execution image 501 is the number of times of the variable performance performed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (32), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Also, the second and third pending images 52 move closer to the display position of the moving image 51 . Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 . Also, at this time, the remaining number of times notification effect is started. In the illustrated example, the precursor image 502 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (33), the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect. Remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “266 more”.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 80 (34), the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination “125” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "35 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "265 remaining".

In addition, in the variation production example 4, the ready-to-win production (see FIG. 77 (13)), the effect production (see FIG. 77 (13)), the ready-to-reach production (see FIG. 77 (14)), and the middle movable accessory 115B. Effects (see FIG. 77 (14)), SP ready-to-win effects (see FIG. 77 (15)), SPSP ready-to-win effects (see FIG. 77 (16)), button operation effects (see FIG. 77 (17)) are effect selection processes. (See FIG. 38(b)) This is an effect that is included to be executed in the variable effect pattern "EH5" (see FIG. 61). On the other hand, the character effect and sound effect of the left movable accessory 115A (see FIG. 76 (11)) are effects that are not included in any of the variable effect patterns selected in the effect selection process. . That is, the above-mentioned performance and sound effects based on the result of prior determination are executed in the pre-determined effect pattern "AH5" (see FIG. 57) selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). It is a production that includes being done.

As described above, in the variable effect example 1, the display of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is started in the 100th variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state (see FIG. 66 (8) ). On the other hand, in the variable effect example 4, the display of the remaining number of times image 503 is started in the first variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state (see FIG. 80 (33)). . That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, when the number of times the variation is executed in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to execute a special effect based on the number of times of variation, from the specific time-saving game state to the normal game When the state is controlled, a special effect can be executed before the number of times of variation in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number of times. As a special effect, for example, the display of the number-of-reaches remaining image 503 is exemplified.

In this case, the execution condition of the special effect in the case of being controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, compared to the case that the number of times the variation is executed in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number of times, special time-saving It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of giving a player a special feeling of being controlled from a game state to a normal game state and capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.
In particular, when the variable performance is performed in the special time-saving game state, the number of variable performances in the normal game state required to reach the specific time-saving game state is higher than when the RAM is cleared by the number of times of this variable performance. fewer times. In this case, if the reaching remaining number image 503 is not displayed when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the player is required to reach the specific time-saving game state. It may not be possible to recognize that the number of times is decreasing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the remaining number image 503 is displayed before the number of fluctuations in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the number of fluctuation effects in the normal game state required to reach the specific time-saving game state is reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 determines that when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from a power-off state and the RAM is not cleared, the number of fluctuations in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number of times. Before that, a special effect (display of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503) is performed for the variation that is won in the lottery (see S4207 in FIG. 42) performed for each variation. In addition, when the RAM clear is not executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored from a power-off state, if the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed, before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off A smaller number is displayed in the remaining number of arrivals image 503 at the start of the display by the amount of change executed in .
In this case, regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, the number of times the execution condition of the special effect changes in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to make the player feel the unexpectedness of the execution of the special performance, compared to the case where the performance is to be performed.

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of times of reaching image 503 has been described as an example of a special effect based on the number of executions of variation, but the special effect is not limited to displaying of the image of remaining number of reaching 503 .
For example, the effect control unit 300 does not display the execution count image 501 when the number of executions of variation is less than a predetermined number of times, and displays the execution count image 501 when the number of executions of variation is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. may be displayed. In this case, the display of the execution count image 501 is also regarded as an example of a special effect.
Also, the special effect is not limited to the effect performed over a plurality of variable effects. For example, when the number of variable effects (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state and the number of remaining variable effects (fluctuations) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reach a predetermined number of times, the rest until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state A suggestive effect may be performed to suggest that the number of times of the variable effect (fluctuation) of is a predetermined number of times. This suggestive performance is executed during execution of one variable performance or at the end of one variable performance, and does not have to be executed over a plurality of times of variable performance. The special production includes this suggestive production. This suggestive effect may be a display of an image including characters indicating the number of remaining variable effects (fluctuations) until reaching a specific time-saving gaming state, or may be a display of an image in a specific color or the like. Further, the suggestive effect may be display of the stage image 61 . For example, when the number of times of variation production (variation) in the normal game state and the number of times of remaining variation production (variation) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the production control unit 300 You may switch to the stage image 61 of the display mode according to the frequency|count of the remaining fluctuation|variation production|presentation (fluctuation) until it reaches|attains a time saving game state is predetermined times. That is, the special effects may be not only image display of specific characters, but also image display of specific colors or image display of specific backgrounds. Furthermore, when the number of times of variation production (variation) in the normal game state and the number of times of remaining variation production (variation) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reach a predetermined number of times, the production control unit 300, frame lamp 157 and The board lamp 116 may be lighted in a mode suggesting that the number of times of the remaining variation production (fluctuation) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number of times. That is, the special effect may be not only the effect by the image display unit 114 but also the effect by the frame lamp 157 or the board lamp 116 .

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored from a power-off state, if the RAM clear is not executed, a special effect may be executed in the first fluctuation in the normal game state. Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored from a power-off state, if RAM clearing is not executed, a special effect may be executed before the first fluctuation is started in the normal game state. .

In addition, in variation production example 4, the variation in the special time-saving game state is performed multiple times, so that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state is three (see FIG. 75 (4)). Thus, after the number of times of variation in the special time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state reach a predetermined number of times, the effect control unit 300, every time the variation starts, special By displaying a frequency image indicating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state may be counted down. This frequency image is not displayed until the number of times of variation in the special time-saving gaming state or the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. In addition, when the Pachinko game machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, the RAM clearing is performed and not performed, and the variation necessary in the special time-saving game state in order to display the number of times image. number of times does not change. However, when the display condition of the number image is that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the initial value of the number of lotteries in the special time-saving game state is the first When the initial value of the number of lotteries in the special time-saving gaming state is set to the second number (for example, 30 times) larger than the first number, the number is set to the number of times (for example, 10 times). In order to display the image, the number of times of change required in the special time-saving game state increases.

(Variation production example 5)
FIGS. 81 to 85 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. FIG. Variation production example 5 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 41 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the variation production example 5, the variation production is performed four times.
81 to 85 are executed when "EH3", "EH2", "EH2", and "EG2" are selected in this order as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. It is a variable performance. In addition, in these four fluctuation productions, the pre-determining production is executed. This pre-determination effect is an effect executed when "AG2" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. It has been permanently stopped. At this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122, and four pending images 52 are displayed. Moreover, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the special time-saving remaining frequency|count image 79 are displayed at this time. In the example of illustration, the text of "10 times" is displayed as special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "10 times" to "9 times." Also, at this time, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is executed, and the changed image 62 is displayed in the third reserved image 52 . In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52 by the change effect. Also, when the change production is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound of the change production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(3), "125", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. At this time, the first chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, a blue chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the first chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "9 times" to "8 times."
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(5), "853", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. At this time, the second chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, green eye-of-chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 by the second eye-of-chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “853” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(6), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "8 times" to "7 times."
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(7), the zone effect is started. In the illustrated example, a zone notification image 64 is displayed by the zone effect. This zone effect is a effect to expect a big hit in the next variation of the special pattern variation being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(8), "553", which are the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. At this time, the third chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In other words, the final chance game effect of the three chance game effects is executed. In the illustrated example, a red chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the third chance effect. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “553” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(9), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0". Moreover, special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 switches from "7 times" to "6 times." Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, an effect presentation is started. In the illustrated example, a zone effect image 66 is displayed by effect production. More specifically, a blue zone effect image 66 is displayed around the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and a voice saying “Big win!?” is output from the speaker 156 . The sound effect of outputting the sound of "big hit!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 ( 10 ), the changing effect of the changing image 51 is performed, and the changing image 62 is displayed on the changing image 51 . In the illustrated example, a red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 by the change effect. Also, when the change production is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound of the change production.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(11), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (12), the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(13), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (14), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, the upper and lower small symbols 56 of the number "3" are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the medium and small pattern 56 maintains high speed fluctuation. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(15), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the character effect is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (16). In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover part of the image display section 114 by the accessory effect. In addition, at this time, the double small pattern 56 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the small symbols 56 are displayed in a combination of "333" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (17), the decorative pattern 41 of double stitches is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "333" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 83 (18), the three decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "333" of the decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the stage image 61 does not have to be displayed even when the double decorative symbol 41 is displayed. That is, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a big hit or a small hit, the stage image 61 is redisplayed after the SP reach performance is started and the stage image 61 is hidden. The variable performance may end without

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(19), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the opening image 74 to indicate the start of the big winning game or the small winning game.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(20), a promotional image 508 is displayed. A specific area image 509 is displayed in the promotion image 508 .
Then, when a game ball wins in the second big winning hole 126 while the promotion image 508 is being displayed, a winning notification image 515 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(22), a first right shot image 75, an in-round image 76, and a number-of-rounds image 77 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the round number image 77 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the last round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (23). In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 510, the cursor is match|combined with the mode of "A".
And if predetermined time passes after the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG.84(24), the continuation image 516 will be displayed. Also, at this time, the second hitting image 511 is displayed.

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 85 (25), "333", which is the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. FIG. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "333" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Moreover, the text of "30 times" is displayed as special time saving remaining frequency|count image 79 at this time.

In addition, in the variation effect example 5, the change effect of the variable image 51 (see FIG. 82 (10)), the reach effect (see FIG. 82 (12)), the SP reach effect (see FIG. 83 (13)), the SPSP reach effect ( (See FIG. 83 (14)), the button operation effect (see FIG. 83 (15)), and the role object effect of the middle movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 83 (16)) are the effect selection processing (see FIG. 38 (b)). It is an effect that includes being executed in "EG2" (see FIG. 61), which is the variation effect pattern selected in . On the other hand, the change effect of the pending image 52 (see FIG. 81 (2)), chance eye effect (see FIGS. 81 (3), (5), and FIG. 82 (8)), zone effect (see FIG. 82 (7)) , effect effect (see FIG. 82 (9)), and sound effect (see FIG. 82 (9)) are effects that are not included in any of the variable effect patterns selected in the effect selection process. . That is, each of the effects based on the result of the prior determination can be executed in the pre-determined effect pattern "AG2" (see FIG. 57) selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). It is a performance that is included.

Also, in the variation production example 5, the promotion promotion production (see FIG. 73 (13)) is not executed in the variation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state is a big hit or a small hit, but limited to this not. In the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit, the promotion-inciting performance may be always performed.

(Variation production example 6)
FIGS. 86 to 88 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. In variation production example 6, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, and the second in the specific time saving game state 2 and a variable effect based on the winning to the starting port 122 are included.

Of the variable effects shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 59 "ER5-2". It is a variable effect that is executed when it is done. Also, in this variation production, a prior determination production is executed. This pre-determination effect is an effect executed when "AR5-2" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG. Also, this variable performance is the 300th variable performance after the number of times of variable display of special symbols is reset by clearing the RAM.
In addition, among the variable effects shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 63. It is a variable effect that is executed when
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 in the image display section 114 in accordance with the end of the variation of the previous special design. there is Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Also, at this time, “3” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “299GAME”. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “1 more”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "3" to "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(3), "421", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together, and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "300 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "0 remaining". At this time, the sub-right-handed indicator 87 lights up. Also, at this time, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) reaches 300 times, which is the specific number of times, Control to the specific time saving game state be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "2" to "1".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(5), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. Also, at this time, the first hitting image 75 is displayed.
In addition, in the variation production example 6, after the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed in the specific time-saving gaming state and becomes difficult to see or invisible, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed, but it is not limited to this. . After the start of the first variation effect in the specific time-saving gaming state, the first right-handed image 75 may be displayed before the decorative symbol 41 is variably displayed at high speed. That is, when the decorative pattern 41 is easily visible, the first right shot image 75 may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(6), a specific shorter working hours start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, the third hitting image 518 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right shot image 75 are displayed. Also, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(7), a second transitional image 519 is displayed. If the 2nd transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the specific time reduction start image 517 will become non-display. On the other hand, the first shot-to-right image 75 is displayed. That is, the display time of the first shot-to-right image 75 is longer than that of the third shot-to-right image 518 . Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, the decorative pattern 41 may be changed and displayed at high speed and may be in a state where it is difficult to see or is invisible.
Note that the second transitional image 519 may be displayed so as to move from one side (for example, the upper side) of the image display section 114 toward the opposite side (for example, the lower side). In this case, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 can be shown to the player so as to be hidden by being covered with the second transition image 519 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(8), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right shot image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(9), a specific time reduction selection image 521 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the specific time saving selection image 521, the cursor is united with the mode of "a". Also, at this time, when four game balls enter the second starting port 122, "4" is displayed on the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122. - 特許庁On the other hand, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. In addition, every time a game ball wins the second starting hole 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting hole 122.例文帳に追加

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state is displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (10). In the illustrated example, as the stage image 61, a park-themed moving image is displayed. Also, at this time, "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, four pending images 52 are displayed. These four pending images 52 are the pending images 52 displayed based on the winning of the second starting port 122 . On the other hand, neither the moving image 51 nor the pending image 52 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number image 524 is displayed. A text of “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (11), "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. In addition, the small patterns 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (12), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "294" to "293." Also, at this time, the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(13), three decorative patterns 41 and "853", which are small patterns 56, are displayed together and the game is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the fourth shot-to-right image 525 is not displayed. That is, the display time of the first shot-to-right image 75 is longer than that of the fourth shot-to-right image 525 .

As described above, in the variable effect example 6, "ER5-2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. A production based on that is being executed. Also, as a pre-judgment effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, an effect based on the selection of "AR5-2" as the "pre-judgment effect pattern" in FIG. 56 is executed. It is Here, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, the number of variable performances executed after the number of times of variable display of special symbols is reset by clearing the RAM is less than 297 times. In this case, "ER5-1" (see FIG. 59) is selected as the "fluctuation effect pattern", and "AR5-1" (see FIG. 56) is selected as the "predetermined effect pattern". Further, when "ER5-1" is selected as the "fluctuation effect pattern", reach effect, effect effect, button operation effect and the like are performed in the change effect. In addition, when "AR5-1" is selected as the "preliminary determination effect pattern", the zone effect, the character effect, the lighting effect at the time of winning, etc. are performed as the predetermination effect. On the other hand, in the variable production example 6, "ER5-2" is selected as the "variable production pattern", and "AR5-2" is selected as the "preliminary judgment production pattern". None of the button operation effect, the zone effect, the accessory effect, and the winning light effect is performed.
That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined effect when the variation is performed in the normal game state, in the normal game state, the remaining until it is controlled to the specific time-saving game state To limit the execution of a predetermined performance from a variation in which the number of times of variation reaches a specific number.

When the predetermined effect is executed without being restricted even if the number of remaining fluctuations before being controlled to the specific time-saving game state is reduced, the player is distracted by the predetermined effect, and the specific time-saving game is played. There is a possibility that the player may not notice that the number of remaining fluctuations until the state is controlled is small, or that the specific time-saving gaming state has been controlled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled decreases, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted, so that the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled. To provide a Pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly amusing presentation by heightening the degree of excitement of a player with respect to the fact that the game is controlled to a specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in the variation effect example 6, "PR5" which is "with reach" is selected as the "variation pattern" in FIG. there is Even in this case, as described above, the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the variation effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state. That is, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled from the fluctuation to the specific number of times, in the game control unit 200 "with reach""variation pattern is selected, the effect control unit 300 performs a variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed.
In this case, even if the variation pattern set in the game control unit 200 is "with reach", the number of remaining variations until it is controlled to the specific time-saving game state is small, and the specific time-saving game It is possible to increase the degree of excitement of the player for being controlled by the state.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that execution of the ready-to-win effect, effect effect, button operation effect, zone effect, character object effect, and winning light effect is restricted as the predetermined effect. is not limited to the production of
In the variable production patterns of "ER4-1" (see FIG. 59) and "ER5-1", as predetermined productions, pseudo-continuous production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, change production, zone production, reach fanning production, effect It may be set to execute any one of a production, a character production, a sound production, and a button operation production. And even in this case, when the variable effect pattern of "ER4-2" or "ER5-2" is selected, the effect control unit 300 restricts execution of any predetermined effect. good too.
In addition, in the pre-determined production pattern of "AR4-1" (see FIG. 56) and "AR5-1", as predetermined production, change production, chance eye production, zone production, effect production, sound production, role production, , and a prize-winning light-emitting effect may be set to be executed. Then, even in this case, when the pre-determined effect pattern of "ER4-2" or "ER5-2" is selected, the effect control unit 300 restricts the execution of any predetermined effect. may

Further, the conditions under which the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted are that "PR4" or "PR5" (see FIG. 24) is selected as the variation pattern, or "JR4" or "JR5" (see FIG. 33) is selected as the pre-determination pattern. ) is selected. In the case where the variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a loss, the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time reduction game state is controlled is the specific number of times. , the effect control unit 300 may restrict the execution of the predetermined effect even when any of the pre-determined effect pattern and the variable effect pattern are selected. In addition, in the case where the variation effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a big hit, the number of remaining variations until the specific time-saving game state is controlled The effect control section 300 may limit the execution of the predetermined effect even when any of the pre-determined effect pattern and the variable effect pattern is selected from the variation that reaches the specific number of times.

Further, in the variable performance example 6, when the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the first variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is executed. Thus, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed (before the specific time-saving start image 517 is displayed, before the mode start image 520 is displayed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state 41 is displayed)) when the variation performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, even if a variation performance pattern different from the variation performance pattern shown in FIG. 64 is selected good. That is, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed, a variation production pattern peculiar to the case where the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed is selected, A variable performance corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern may be executed.

(Variation production example 7)
FIGS. 89 to 91 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. FIG. Variation production example 7 includes a variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state and a variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.

Of the variable effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state has "ER1" selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. It is a variable production that is executed in the case. Also, this variable performance is the 300th variable performance after the number of times of variable display of special symbols is reset by clearing the RAM.
In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(1), the effect control section 300 confirms and stops the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. there is Also, at this time, a stage image 61, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Also, at this time, “0” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “299GAME”. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “1 more”.

Then, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 89(2), the variation of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 121, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加Also, in this variable performance, the speaker 156 outputs a performance sound corresponding to the variable performance being executed. Also, although illustration is omitted, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emission mode according to the variable effect being executed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 89(3), "421", which is the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56, is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "300 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 503 is updated to "0 remaining". At this time, the sub-right-handed indicator 87 lights up. In addition, at this time, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) reaches 300 times, which is the specific number of times, Control to the specific time saving game state be done.
Further, as shown in FIG. 89(4), the first right shot image 75 is displayed. Also, at this time, an arrival notification image 526 is displayed.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the special symbol stopped changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89(5). At this time, the speaker 156 is outputting an effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect. Also, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a color corresponding to the previous variation effect. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light.

Next, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the menu display image 504 is displayed, the lighting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change as shown in FIG. 89(6). In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit green light. Also, at this time, the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect from the speaker 156 is smaller than that during execution of the variable effect or when the display of the menu image 506 is started (see FIG. 89 (5)). It is output by volume. At this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, the execution count image 501, and the remaining reach count image 503 are hidden. may Then, even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the pending number display 55 and the first right shot image 75 may be displayed. In addition, when the menu image 506 is displayed, the arrival notification image 526 may be displayed or may not be displayed.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, a customer waiting image 505 is displayed as shown in FIG. 90(7). Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the execution count image 501, the remaining reach count image 503, the decoration pattern 41, the pending number display 55, and the small pattern 56 are not displayed. On the other hand, the first hitting image 75 and the arrival notification image 526 are displayed. Also, at this time, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit red light. Also, at this time, sound is not output from the speaker 156 . Note that the pending number display 55 may be displayed even when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed.

Then, when two game balls enter the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 90(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. In addition, when two game balls enter the first starting hole 121, a variable image 51 and a pending image 52 are displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 . In addition, every time a game ball wins the first starting hole 121, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting hole 121. - 特許庁At this time, the stage image 61, the execution count image 501, and the remaining reach count image 503 are displayed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(9), a specific shorter working hours start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, the third hitting image 518 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right shot image 75 are displayed. Also, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(10), a second transitional image 519 is displayed. When the second transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the third right-handed image 518 are hidden. On the other hand, the first shot-to-right image 75 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(11), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right shot image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (12), a specific time reduction selection image 521 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the specific time saving selection image 521, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state is displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (13). Also, at this time, "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number image 524 is displayed. A text of “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 . Note that neither the moving image 51 nor the pending image 52 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (14), "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. In addition, the small patterns 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . At this time, the fourth shot-to-right image 525 is hidden.
In addition, after this, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a variable effect based on the winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state is started.

Further, in the variation effect example 7, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed in the variation effect in which the mode start image 520 (see (11) in FIG. 90) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the variation effect example 7, similarly to the variation effect example 6, the fourth hitting right image 525 may be displayed in the variation effect subsequent to the variation effect in which the mode start image 520 is displayed. In addition, in the variation production example 6, similarly to the variation production example 7, in the variation production in which the mode start image 520 (see FIG. 87 (8)) is displayed, when the decorative pattern 41 is redisplayed (see FIG. 87 (10 )), the fourth right-handed image 525 may be displayed.

As described above, in the variation production example 7, after the 300th variation production is completed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing, the first right-handed strike is performed before the next variation production is started. An image 75 is displayed (see FIG. 89(4)). That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled is stored in the game control unit 200 pending memory when the symbol in the final fluctuation stops If not, it is possible to start a specific notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 when the symbols in the final variation are stopped. As the specific notification, for example, the display of the first shot-to-right image 75 is exemplified.
In this case, before the variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state is started, the player recognizes that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111, and shoots the game ball to the right side of the game area 111. can do. Therefore, to provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance by changing the first variable performance in a specific time-saving game state to the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122.例文帳に追加be able to.

Note that in the present embodiment, the display of the first hit-to-right image 75 has been described as an example of the specific notification, but the specific notice is not limited to the display of the first hit-to-right image 75 . For example, the effect control unit 300 may output from the speaker 156 a sound (for example, a sound such as “Please hit to the right”) prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 as the specific notification. That is, the specific notification is not limited to displaying an image.

Moreover, in the example 7 of variation production|presentation, the 1st hitting-right image 75 is displayed before the start of the variation production|presentation in which the specific time reduction start image 517 (refer FIG.90(9)) is displayed. (See FIG. 89 (4)) In addition, during the fluctuation effect in which the specific time reduction start image 517 is displayed, the third hitting image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) and the fourth hitting image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13) reference) is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific notification that prompts the launch of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, and when controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state, the specific time-saving gaming state It is possible to execute a specific effect to be notified. Here, as the specific effect, for example, display of the specific short working hours start image 517 is exemplified. The specific notification includes a first notification that can be executed before the start of the specific effect, and a second notification that is a variation that is executed after the start of the first notification and that can be executed in the variation in which the specific effect is executed. be. The first notification includes, for example, the first hitting image 75 . In addition, the second notification includes, for example, the third shot-to-right image 518 and the fourth shot-to-right image 525 . As the first notification, instead of the first right-handed image 75 , a sound prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 may be output from the speaker 156 . Also, as the second notification, instead of the third hit-to-right image 518 and the fourth hit-to-right image 525 , a sound prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 may be output from the speaker 156 .
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the second notification is performed after the start of the first notification and is performed in the variation in which the specific effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second notification may be performed in the variation next to the variation in which the specific effect is performed. As an additional remark, the second notification may be executed at any timing as long as it is after the variation in which the specific effect is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific notification includes the first notification that can be executed before the start of the specific effect, and the variation that is executed after the start of the first notification and that can be executed after the variation in which the specific effect is executed. There is a second notification.

Before the specific effect is started, the player may not recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 even when the first notification is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specific notification is executed not only before the start of the specific effect, but also after the variation when the specific effect is executed. As a result, even if the player cannot recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 before the specific effect is started, the player can play the game after the change when the specific effect is started. It can be recognized that the game ball should be shot to the right of area 111 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of performing a variable performance based on winning a prize to the second start port 122 from an early stage in the specific time-saving game state, thereby executing a highly entertaining performance. can.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the production|presentation control part 300 can perform specific notification, when displaying a specific image, before specific production|presentation is started in a specific time saving game state. As a specific effect, for example, display of a specific short working hours start image 517 is exemplified. Further, examples of the specific image include the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 .
Before starting the specific effect, the player may not be aware that the game is controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, if the specific notification is not executed while the specific image is being displayed, the player may not be able to recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the specific notification while the specific image is being displayed before the start of the specific effect, the player pays attention to the image that is displayed only when the variation is not being executed. Even if it does, the player is made to recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 . To provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of performing a variable performance based on winning a prize to a second start port 122 from an early stage in a specific time-saving game state, thereby executing a highly entertaining performance. can be done.

In addition, in the variation production example 3, before the start of the variation production performed after the display of the special time saving start image 78 (see FIG. 74 (21)), the specific area image 509 (see FIG. 73 (18)), the first right shot The image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)) and the second right shot image 511 are displayed. In addition, in the variation production example 7, before the start of the variation production performed after the display of the specific time reduction start image 517 (see FIG. 90 (9)), the first right shot image 511 (see FIG. 89 (4)), the third A right shot image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) and a fourth right shot image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13)) are displayed.
That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display a specific image on the image display section 114 to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 . Further, the specific images include a first image having a predetermined display size on the image display section 114, and a second image and a third image having a display size larger than the first image on the image display section 114. FIG. Then, when controlled to the second mode, the effect control section 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image before the start of the variation performed after the specific effect is executed. As the second mode, for example, a special time-saving game state, a specific time-saving game state, and the like are included. Moreover, as specific production|presentation, the display of the special time saving start image 78, the display of the specific time saving start image 517, etc. are mentioned, for example. Further, as the first image, for example, the first right shot image 75 can be cited. Further, examples of the second image include the specific region image 509 and the third right-handed image 518 . Further, examples of the third image include the second shot-to-right image 511 and the fourth shot-to-right image 525 .

When only a single specific image is displayed, the player recognizes that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 if the player recognizes this specific image as a decorative image. may not be Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of specific images with different display sizes are displayed before the start of the variation that is performed after execution of the specific effect. As a result, it becomes easier for the player who sees the specific image to recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of performing variable presentation and highly entertaining presentation.

Further, in the variation production example 7, in the first variation of the specific time-saving gaming state, the first shot to the right image 511 (see (8) in FIG. 90), the third shot to the right image 518 (see (9) in FIG. 90), the fourth A right shot image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13)) is displayed.
That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display a specific image on the image display section 114 to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 . Further, the specific images include a first image having a predetermined display size on the image display section 114, and a second image and a third image having a display size larger than the first image on the image display section 114. FIG. Then, when being controlled to the second mode, the effect control section 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image in the first change in the second mode. As the second mode, for example, a specific time-saving game state and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the first image, for example, the first right shot image 75 can be cited. Further, as the second image, for example, the third right shot image 518 can be used. Further, as the third image, for example, the fourth right shot image 525 can be cited.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the first image, the second image, and the third image are displayed in the first change in the second mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. In subsequent variations of the first variation of the second mode, the first image, the second image and the third image may be displayed. Additionally, the first image, the second image, and the third image may be executed at any timing after the first change in the second mode. Also, some of the first, second, and third images (for example, the first and second images) are displayed in the first variation of the second mode, and some of the other images ( 3rd image) may be displayed in the next variation of the first variation of the second mode. That is, in the present embodiment, when the second mode is controlled, the effect control section 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image after the first change in the second mode.

When only a single specific image is displayed, the player recognizes that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111 if the player recognizes this specific image as a decorative image. may not be Therefore, in this embodiment, after the first change in the second mode, a plurality of specific images with different display sizes are displayed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player who sees the specific image to recognize that the game ball should be shot to the right side of the game area 111. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of performing variable presentation and highly entertaining presentation.

In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated that the 2nd hitting-right image 511 (refer FIG. 74 (21)) is displayed before the start of the variation of the first time in a special time-saving game state, it is not limited to this. In the first variation of the special time-saving gaming state, the second hitting to right image 511 may be displayed. Moreover, the 3rd hitting-right image 518 (refer FIG.90(9)) and the 4th hitting-right image 525 (refer FIG.91(13)) may be displayed in the first time fluctuation|variation of a special time saving game state. In this case, the special time-saving gaming state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the second shot-to-right image 511, the third shot-to-right image 518, and the fourth shot-to-right image 525 are captured as second images. In addition, the second shot-to-right image 511, the third shot-to-right image 518, and the fourth shot-to-right image 525 are also captured as third images.

In addition, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed when the first start port 121 is won in the special time-saving game state or the specific time-saving game state, and the first start port 121 is won in the special time-saving game state or the specific time-saving game state. If not, it may not be displayed. That is, in the first variation of the second mode, when the first start opening 121 is won, the first image, the second image, and the third image may be displayed. Then, in the first variation of the second mode, if the first starting gate 121 is not won, the first image and the second image can be displayed, even if the third image is not displayed. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the first image is the first shot-to-right image 75 . Here, a different image may be displayed as an image prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 depending on whether it is the special time-saving gaming state or the specific time-saving gaming state. That is, the first image, if the display size in the image display unit 114 is smaller than the second image and the third image, even if it is a different image in the case of the special time-saving gaming state and the specific time-saving gaming state good. For example, the first image displayed in the special time-saving gaming state may have a larger display size on the image display unit 114 than the first image displayed in the specific time-saving gaming state. Also, the first image displayed in the special time-saving gaming state may have a smaller display size on the image display unit 114 than the first image displayed in the specific time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the variation production example 7, the specific time reduction start image 517 is displayed when the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 90 (9)), and the stage image corresponding to the specific time reduction game state 61 is displayed (refer to FIG. 91 (13)), the specific time reduction start image 517 is hidden. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the specific image on the image display unit 114 in a display mode according to the controlled game state of the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state. When controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state, a specific effect that notifies the specific time-saving gaming state is started when a specific image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, and a specific image corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed. end before it is done.
Here, the specific image is, for example, the stage image 61 . Further, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, the display mode of the variable image 51, and the display mode of the reserved image 52 may be different between the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state. Therefore, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, and the reserved image 52 are also regarded as specific images.

In this case, compared to the case where the specific effect is started after the display of the specific image corresponding to the normal game state is finished, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the start of the specific effect, and the interest is increased. It is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing high performance.

In addition, in the variation performance example 7, when the 300th variation performance is completed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing, it is controlled to the specific time reduction game state, and when the next variation performance is started, the specific time reduction is performed. A start image 517 is displayed (see FIG. 90(9)). That is, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 can be controlled to a specific time-saving game state when the pattern in the final variation of the predetermined number of times is stopped in the normal game state, and the effect control unit 300 , when the variation next to the variation of the final round is started, the specific effect to notify the specific time-saving gaming state is started.
While the player pays attention to the effect during the fluctuation, there is a case where the player does not pay attention to the effect while the fluctuation is stopped. In this case, if the specific effect is started while the fluctuation is stopped, the player may not pay attention to the specific effect, and the specific effect may not be able to enhance the interest. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation next to the final variation starts, the specific effect is started, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the specific effect. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of improving the interest by the specific effect and executing highly interesting effect.

(Variation production example 8)
FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 8) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. Variation production example 8 is a variation production example based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This variable production is the first variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 92(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. there is Here, the fluctuation of the previous special symbol is the final fluctuation of the number of fluctuations required until the specific time-saving gaming state is reached. Therefore, by completing this variation, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the specific time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the number-of-executions image 501, the remaining-number-of-reaches image 503, the first right-handed image 75, and the achievement notification image 526 are displayed. Also, the stage image 61 at this time is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal game state. Also, at this time, “0” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “300 GAME”. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text of "0 more".

When the game ball enters the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 92(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 start to fluctuate along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, in accordance with the winning of the second start opening 122 , the notification sound for notifying the winning of the second starting opening 122 is output from the speaker 156 . On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, in this variable performance, the speaker 156 outputs a performance sound corresponding to the variable performance being executed. Also, although illustration is omitted, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emission mode according to the variable effect being executed.
At this time, when the game ball further wins the second starting port 122, the speaker 156 further informs the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 122, and the second starting port 122 is updated. On the other hand, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(3), a specific shorter working hours start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, the third hitting image 518 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right shot image 75 are displayed. Also, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(4), a second transitional image 519 is displayed. When the second transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the third right-handed image 518 are hidden. On the other hand, the first shot-to-right image 75 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92(5), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right shot image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92(6), a specific time reduction selection image 521 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the specific time saving selection image 521, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".
In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the display of the second transition image 519 is started (see (4) in FIG. 92), the third hitting to right image 518 may be displayed. Then, when the mode start image 520 is displayed, the third hitting image 518 may be hidden.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(7). Also, at this time, "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number image 524 is displayed. A text of “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 . It should be noted that the variation image 51 based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(8), "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. In addition, the small patterns 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination “125” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . At this time, the fourth shot-to-right image 525 is hidden. On the other hand, the first shot-to-right image 75 is displayed. Also, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a color corresponding to the most recent variation effect. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting an effect sound corresponding to the most recent variation effect.

Next, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the special symbol stopped changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(9). Also, at this time, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit green light. Also, at this time, the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect is output from the speaker 156 at a lower volume than during execution of the variable effect.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, sound is no longer output from speaker 156, as shown in FIG. 93(10). On the other hand, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 do not change. Further, after this, even if time passes, the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 90 (7)) is not displayed, and the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are not hidden. However, at this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the specific time reduction remaining number image 524 may be hidden. Then, even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the first shot-to-right image 75 is displayed.
When sound is no longer output from the speaker 156, the lighting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may change, for example, red light may be emitted.

As described above, in the variable effect example 8, the menu display image 504 continues to be displayed without displaying the customer waiting image 505 even if the variable effect ends without any suspension. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 1, the menu display image 504 is hidden by displaying the customer waiting image 505 (see FIGS. 69(27) and 69(28)). In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the menu display image 504 is hidden by displaying the customer waiting image 505 (see FIGS. 89(6) and 90(7)). That is, in the present embodiment, the menu display image 504 is better when the variable effect is not performed after the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state is completed than when the variable effect is not performed in the normal game state. Display time is long. Also, if the fluctuation production is not performed after the first fluctuation production in the specific time reduction gaming state is completed than if the fluctuation production is not performed before the start of the first fluctuation production in the specific time reduction gaming state, the menu The display time of the display image 504 is long.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a special image on the image display unit 114 based on the number of times the variation is performed, and displays the specific image on the image display unit 114 when the variation is not performed. It is possible to hide the special image while displaying the specific image. As a special image, the number-of-executions image 501, the reach|attainment remaining number of times image 503, the special working hours remaining number of times image 79, the specific working hours remaining number of times image 524 grade, etc. are mentioned, for example. Further, examples of specific images include the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 .
When special symbol variations are not being performed, the player may be more interested in images that are displayed only when variations are not being performed, rather than images related to variations. In this case, if the special image is displayed even when the specific image is displayed, the special image may prevent the player from paying attention to the specific image, and the specific image may hinder the improvement of interest. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special image is hidden while the specific image is being displayed, thereby preventing the player from paying attention to the specific image. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of improving the interest by the specific image and executing highly interesting effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as an example of the special image, the execution number image 501, the reach remaining number image 503, the special time saving remaining number image 79, the specific time saving remaining number image 524, etc. were described, but the special image is the image described above. is not limited to
For example, when the number of variable effects (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state and the number of remaining variable effects (fluctuations) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reach a predetermined number of times, the rest until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state A suggestive image may be displayed to suggest that the number of times of the variation effect (variation) of is a predetermined number. This suggestive image is displayed during execution of one variable performance or at the end of one variable performance, and may not be displayed over a plurality of times of variable performance. The special image also includes this suggestive image. This suggestive image may include characters indicating the number of remaining fluctuation effects (fluctuations) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state, or may be an image of a specific color or the like. Furthermore, the stage image 61 may be displayed as the suggestive image. For example, when the number of times of variation production (variation) in the normal game state and the number of times of remaining variation production (variation) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the production control unit 300 You may switch to the stage image 61 of the display mode according to the frequency|count of the remaining fluctuation|variation production|presentation (fluctuation) until it reaches|attains a time saving game state is predetermined times. That is, the special image may be not only an image made up of specific characters, but also an image made up of a specific color or an image made up of a specific background. These special images may be hidden while the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 are displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special image is hidden while the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the special image may be displayed. Furthermore, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the special image may be hidden.

As described above, in the variable production example 1, if there is no suspension when the variable production ends, the production sound is silenced from the sound corresponding to the variable production, and the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (Fig. 69 (28 )reference). On the other hand, in the variable performance example 3, when there is no suspension when the variable performance ends, the performance sound is silenced from the sound corresponding to the variable performance, but the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed. Furthermore, in the variation production example 8, if there is no suspension when the variation production ends, the production sound is silenced from the sound corresponding to the variation production, but the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed (see FIG. 93 (10)). ). That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, if the game control unit 200 does not store a hold when the variation ends in the first mode, changes the effect sound from the first mode to the second mode, and specifies It is possible to display an image, and when suspension is not stored in the game control unit 200 when the variation ends in the second mode, the effect sound is changed from the third mode to the second mode, and the specific image is not displayed. It is possible. Here, as the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a special time-saving game state and a specific time-saving game state are mentioned. Further, as the first mode and the third mode, for example, there is a sound corresponding to the variable effect. Further, as the second mode, for example, there is a mode in which the dramatic sound is not output. Moreover, the customer waiting image 505 is mentioned as a specific image. The first mode and the third mode may be sounds output from the speaker 156 according to the displayed stage image 61, or may be sounds output from the speaker 156 according to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. can be any sound.

When the customer waiting image 505 is displayed in the specific time saving game state, the player may be distracted by the customer waiting image 505 and forget the specific time saving game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation ends with no suspension, while making the same effect sound mode as when the variation ends with no suspension in the normal game state, the specified By not displaying the image, the player is made to recognize that the variation has ended and there is no suspension, and that it is in a specific time-saving gaming state. As a result, the player can enjoy the next variation while recognizing that it is in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the variation ends without holding in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing high performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example of the first mode and the third mode as the effect sound is the sound corresponding to the variable effect. Here, the sound corresponding to the variable performance may be a performance sound corresponding to the previous variable performance, and may be a sound having a lower volume than that during execution of the previous variable performance. Further, the sound corresponding to the variable performance may be a performance sound corresponding to the previous variable performance, and may be a sound having the same volume as during execution of the previous variable performance.
Also, although the second mode as the effect sound is a mode in which the effect sound is not output, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second mode may be specific BGM that is output from the speaker 156 only when the variable effect is not being executed.

Further, in the variable effect example 8, it has been described that the menu image 506 is displayed when there is no suspension when the variable effect ends (see (10) in FIG. 93), but the present invention is not limited to this. The production control unit 300 changes the production sound from the third mode to the second mode so that the menu image 506 is not displayed when the game control unit 200 does not store the hold when the variation ends in the second mode. may Therefore, the menu image 506 is also regarded as a specific image.

In addition, in variation effect example 7, the customer waiting image 505 is displayed when the variation is stopped in the state where there is no suspension. On the other hand, in variation effect example 8, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed when the variation is stopped without any suspension. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the specific image before starting the specific effect in the specific time-saving gaming state, and does not display the specific image after starting the specific effect. An example of the specific image is the customer waiting image 505 .
When the customer waiting image 505 is displayed when it is in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player may be distracted by the customer waiting image 505 and forget that it is in the specific time-saving gaming state, so the specific time-saving gaming state By not displaying the customer waiting image 505, the player can recognize that it is in a specific time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed even before the start of the specific effect, the player may notice that the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed and is controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, even if the specific time-saving game state is notified by the specific effect, the interest may not be improved. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the customer waiting image 505 only before the start of the specific production in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player is in a special time-saving gaming state even though the specific production is not started. It suppresses being noticed when controlled by As a result, the pachinko game machine 100 capable of improving the interest of the specific performance and executing highly interesting performance can be provided.

In addition, in the variation production example 8, when the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the first variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is executed. Thus, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed (before the specific time-saving start image 517 is displayed, before the mode start image 520 is displayed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state 41 is displayed) when the variation performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, even if a variation performance pattern different from the variation performance pattern shown in FIG. 63 is selected good. That is, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed, when the variation performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, a unique variation performance pattern is selected, A variable performance corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern may be executed.

Moreover, although variable production|presentation example 8 demonstrated that the menu image 506 was displayed after the start of specific production|presentation (refer FIG.93(10)) in a specific time saving game state, it is not limited to this. The effect control unit 300 can display the menu image 506 before starting the specific effect, and does not display the menu image 506 after starting the specific effect. You may do so. Therefore, the menu image 506 is also regarded as a specific image.

Moreover, although the display of the specific time saving start image 517 has been described as an example of the specific effect in the present embodiment, the specific effect is not limited to the display of the specific time saving start image 517 .
In the specific time saving game state, an effect corresponding to the mode selected in the specific time saving selection image 521 is performed. Here, the mode displayed in the specific time saving selection image 521 is a specific mode in the specific time saving gaming state. Therefore, the display of the mode start image 520 that notifies the mode started in the specific time-saving gaming state is also regarded as a specific effect that notifies the specific time-saving gaming state. Also, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player shoots the game ball to the right area of the game area 111, thereby enabling the winning to the second start hole 122.例文帳に追加Therefore, the display of the first hitting right image 75, the third hitting right image 518, the fourth hitting right image 525, etc., which is a notification for winning the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, is also, in a broad sense, specified It can be regarded as a specific effect that notifies the time-saving gaming state.
In addition to the production described above, when it is controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, the production control unit 300 displays an image only when it is controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, and is controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state. The frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may emit light in a lighting mode limited to the case. In this case, the display of the image only when it is controlled to the second mode, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 by the light emission mode only when it is controlled to the specific time-saving game state, the specific time-saving game state It can be regarded as a specific effect to be notified.

(Variation production example 9)
FIGS. 94 to 97 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. The variable performance shown in the variable performance example 9 is a variable performance performed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 6 (see FIGS. 86 to 88). More specifically, the variation performance shown in the variation performance example 9 is a variation performance in the specific time-saving gaming state controlled in the variation performance example 6. In this variation production example 9, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the normal game state, and the second in the normal game state It includes a variable performance based on the winning to the 1 start port 121. In addition, in this variation production example 9, the variation production is performed seven times.

In addition, the first five variable performances of the seven variable performances shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 are variable performances based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. These five variable performances are variable performances executed when "EM1", "EM3", "EM2", "EM2", and "EM1" are selected in order as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. .
Further, the sixth variable performance among the seven variable performances shown in Figs. 94 to 97 is a variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the normal game state. This sixth variable effect is a variable effect executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG.
Further, the final variable performance of the seven variable performances shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 is a variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. This final variable effect is a variable effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG.
In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

In the variation production example 6 (see FIGS. 86 to 88), it was explained that the game is controlled to the specific time-saving game state in a state in which a hold based on the winning to the first start port 121 is occurring in the normal game state. After that, by repeatedly performing the variable effect in the specific time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 94 (1), the specific time saving remaining number image 524 displayed on the image display unit 114 shows "5" is shown, which means that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries is five. In addition, with the completion of the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped in the image display portion 114 by the effect control section 300 . Also, at this time, the stage image 61 and the first right shot image 75 are displayed. In addition, the reservation number display 55 of the first start opening 121 indicates "1", which is the number of reservations for winning the first start opening 121, and the reservation number display 55 of the second start opening 122 is the second start opening. "0", which is the number of pending prizes for winning.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 94(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 start to fluctuate along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "5" to "4." Also, at this time, a variation image 51 is displayed. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(3), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, four game balls enter the second starting port 122, and four pending images 52 are displayed. At this time, every time a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加In addition, "4" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the second starting port 122. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(4), the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 94(5), the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.
After the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 94(6) as the special symbols stop changing. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, three small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(7), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "4" to "3."
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(8), "125", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(9), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "3" to "2."
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(10), "853", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "2" to "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (12), "712", which is the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the determination is stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (13), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "1" to "0."
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(14), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(15), the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (16), the number "1", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, and the pending image 52 is displayed. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the speaker 156 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning of the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加In addition, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 .

After the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 96 (17) as the special symbols stop changing. The combination “315” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, three small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(18), the first transition image 512 and the end image 527 are displayed. When the 1st transitional image 512 is displayed, the decoration design 41, the variation image 51, the pending|holding image 52, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting right image 75, and the specific time-saving remaining frequency|count image 524 are non-display. On the other hand, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 are displayed. At this time, the result image 513 (see (22) in FIG. 78) is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (19), the variation of the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. This variation is a variation based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state. Also, in this variation, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, in this variation, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0".
Next, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 97 (20), three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "213" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 ends in a state where there is no suspension based on the winning to the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. "213", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 41 and the combination of small patterns 56 match. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, one pending image 52, execution count image 501, and left-handed image 514 are displayed. This hold image 52 is a hold image 52 based on the hold (see FIG. 86 (5)) that occurs when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is changed from the normal game state to the specific time-saving game state. Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text “596GAME”. This value shown in the execution count image 501 is the total value of the number of times of variable production performed in the normal game state and the number of times of variable performance performed in the specific time saving game state. Also, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (22), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "1" to "0".
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 97 (23), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “421” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 501 is updated to "597 GAME". On the other hand, the remaining number notification effect is not executed, and the arrival notification image 526 (see FIG. 86(1)) is not displayed.

As described above, in the variable effect example 4, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "1" (see FIG. 77 (14)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "off""PH5" and "PH8" are associated with the "fluctuation pattern". Then, when "PH5" or "PH8" is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when the game ball wins the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, ""EH5" and "EH8" associated with "normal" meaning ready-to-win effect are selected as "fluctuation effect pattern". In other words, there is a possibility that the ready-to-win performance is executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state is lost. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 9, the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the variable effect based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "1". Here, in the variation effect pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variation pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss” is “ "Normal" is not associated. In other words, the ready-to-win performance is not executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on In the special time-saving game state, the ready-to-win performance is more likely to be executed in the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1".

In this case, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state and the variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the reach production is the same, the number of pending start ports that are common is the same number To provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of entertaining a player with performances different in nature according to the type of time-saving game state even when variable performances based on a certain event are performed, and capable of executing highly entertaining performances. can provide.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the specific time-saving gaming state is more likely to set the lottery number in the time-saving gaming state than the special time-saving gaming state. In other words, the number of lotteries of the special symbol lottery in the reduced working hours gaming state is more likely to be set in the specific reduced working hours gaming state than in the special reduced working hours gaming state. Therefore, the performance control unit 300 reduces the execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance in the specific time-saving game state, and executes the variable performance in the time-saving game state set to many times, so that the variable performance with a sense of speed. We are trying to realize

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on Although it was explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being “1” in the special time-saving game state, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The ready-to-win effect may be more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the specific number of holdings of the starting port 122.例文帳に追加In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, to the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state rather than the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The ready-to-win effect may be more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of (1).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the reach effect is not executed (0% ), but is not limited to this. Even if the fluctuation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving game state is executed, even if the ready-to-win performance is executed. good. In addition, even when the fluctuation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss is executed, the ready-to-win performance may be executed.

In addition, in the fluctuation production example 4, in the fluctuation production based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "1", the ready-to-win production is executed (see FIG. 77 (13)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "off""PH5" is associated with the "fluctuation pattern". Then, when "PH5" is selected as the variation pattern, from the variation performance pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, "variation performance pattern" , "EH5" associated with "reach fanning" is selected. In other words, in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "1" in the special time-saving game state is lost, there is a possibility that the reach fanning performance will be executed. . On the other hand, in the variable effect example 9, the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the variable effect based on the number of holds being “1” at the second starting port 122 . Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when the game ball wins in the second start hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the "determination result" is "off" in the "variable effect pattern" There is no associated “reach taunt”. In other words, in the fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "1" in the specific time-saving game state is lost, the ready-to-win performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on , In the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" is easier to execute the reach-flavoring performance.

In this case, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state and the variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the reach fanning performance is the same, the number of common starting openings The number of reservations is common. A pachinko game machine 100 capable of entertaining a player with performances different in nature according to the type of the time-saving game state even when performing variable performances based on , and executing highly entertaining performances. can be provided.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbol lotteries in the special symbol lottery in the short working hours gaming state is more likely to be set in the specific short working hours gaming state than in the special short working hours gaming state. Therefore, in the specific time-saving game state, the performance control unit 300 reduces the execution ratio of the reach-flavoring performance and executes the variable performance in the time-saving game state set to many times, so that the variation with a sense of speed. I'm trying to realize the performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on , It has been explained that the variable performance based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being “1” in the special time-saving game state is easier to execute the reach-flavoring performance, but it is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The change effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, in the special time reduction game state The variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 may be made easier to execute the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the reach fanning production is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. Even when the variation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the ready-to-win performance is executed. good too. In addition, even when the fluctuation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss is executed, the ready-to-win performance may be executed.

In addition, in the variable effect example 4, in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1", the effect of changing the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is performed (Fig. 77 (14) and (15)). Here, the effect of changing the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be hereinafter referred to as size change effect. On the other hand, in the variable performance example 9, the size change performance is not executed in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" is lost.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on In the special time-saving game state, the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "1".

In this case, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state and the variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the size change performance is the same, the number of common starting openings is common. A pachinko game machine 100 capable of entertaining a player with performances different in nature according to the type of the time-saving game state even when performing variable performances based on , and executing highly entertaining performances. can be provided.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbol lotteries in the special symbol lottery in the short working hours gaming state is more likely to be set in the specific short working hours gaming state than in the special short working hours gaming state. Therefore, the production control unit 300 reduces the execution ratio of the size change production in the specific time saving game state, and executes the variable production in the time saving game state set to many times, so that the speedy change. I'm trying to realize the performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on , It has been explained that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being “1” in the special time saving game state, but it is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The size change effect may be executed more easily in the change effect based on the number of holdings of the start opening 122 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, in the special time reduction game state The size change effect may be more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the size change effect is not executed (0 %), but not limited to this. Even when the variation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the specific number of the reserved number of the second starting port 122 is the specific number in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the size change performance is executed. good too. Further, even when the variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the size change performance may be executed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 4, in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" is lost, the image display part of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 An effect of changing the display position at 114 is performed (see (14) and (15) in FIG. 77). Here, the effect of changing the display position of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 on the image display section 114 may be hereinafter referred to as position change effect. On the other hand, in the variable performance example 9, the position change performance is not executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "1" is lost.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on In the special time-saving game state, the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the second start port 122 being "1".

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on , It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being “1” in the special time saving game state, but it is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The position change effect may be executed more easily in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, in the special time reduction game state The position change effect may be more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the position change effect is not executed in the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state is lost (0 %), but is not limited to this. Even when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the holding number of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state is a loss is executed, the position change performance is executed. good too. Further, even when the variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the position change performance may be executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "off". "PH8" is associated with a certain "fluctuation pattern". Then, when "PH8" is selected as the variation pattern, from the variation performance pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, "variation performance pattern" , "EH8" associated with the special effect at the time of change is selected. Here, examples of the change-time special effects include SP ready-to-win effects, SPSP ready-to-win effects, change effects, zone effects, effect effects, character effects, sound effects, button operation effects, and the like. In other words, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving gaming state is lost, there is a possibility that the special performance at the time of fluctuation will be executed. be. On the other hand, in variation production example 9, the special production at the time of fluctuation is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when the game ball wins in the second start hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the "determination result" is "off" in the "variable effect pattern" There is no special effect associated with fluctuations. In other words, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the variable special performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on , In the special time-saving game state, the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" is easier to execute the special performance at the time of fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on Although it has been explained that the variable performance based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being “1” in the special time-saving game state is easier to execute, the variable special performance is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the special effect at the time of change. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, in the special time reduction game state The variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the special effect at the time of fluctuation is not executed ( 0%), but it is not limited to this. Even in the case where the variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state is lost, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed. may In addition, even when the variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state is a loss, the variable special performance may be executed. In these cases, the special effect at the time of fluctuation to be executed is any one of the SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, change effect, zone effect, effect effect, character effect, sound effect, and button operation effect. may

Further, in the present embodiment, the size change effect and the position change effect are effects that are performed along with the SP ready-to-win effect. In other words, when the "fluctuation effect pattern" (see FIGS. 59 to 64) in which the "SP reach" is executed is selected, the size change effect and the position change effect are performed.
However, the size change effect and the position change effect may be performed independently of the SP ready-to-win effect. That is, even if the SP ready-to-win effect is not performed, the size change effect and the position change effect may be performed. Further, even when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, the size change effect and the position change effect may not be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery lottery result is a jackpot in the specific time-saving game state, the variation performance is not performed, and when the specific time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, it is performed in the normal game state. Regardless of the number of executions of the variable effect, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is not displayed (see (23) in FIG. 97). That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal game state returns to the normal game state without performing the fluctuation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the specific time-saving game state that has been transferred from the normal game state, in the normal game state that has returned Regardless of the number of variable performances to be executed, the returned normal game state is not controlled to the specific time-saving game state.

(Variation production example 10)
FIGS. 98 to 100 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 10) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. Variation production example 10 is a variation production example of the decorative design 41 based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
98 to 100 are variable effects executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 98(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness to be displayed on the image display unit 114. It has been permanently stopped. At this time, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122, and one pending image 52 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the image 524 of the specific time saving remaining times are displayed. A text of “100” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "100" to "99."
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(3), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(4), the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(5), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(6), the number "4", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41. - 特許庁Also, the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 98(4)) before the SP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(7), the double decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the display size before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect. That is, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the middle decorative design 41 is displayed in a reduced manner. On the other hand, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(8), a promotion promotion effect is executed. A button operation effect is executed in the promotion fan effect. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 69 is displayed by the button operation effect.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, the promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(9). In the illustrated example, the low-decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed by combining "777" in the promotion effect. In addition, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 of double eyes is enlarged and displayed. More specifically, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed in such a manner that a part of them does not fit in the display area of the image display section 114 , and the middle decorative design 41 is entirely displayed on the image display section 114 . In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 has a larger area displayed on the image display section 114 than the left and right decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the small pattern 56 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "777".

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(10), the decorative pattern 41 of double eyes is displayed in a reduced size.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 99 (11). The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, "777" as the small symbol 56 is determined and stopped. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(12), an opening image 74 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(13), a promotional image 508 is displayed. A specific area image 509 is displayed in the promotion image 508 .
Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the promotion image 508 was displayed, as shown in FIG. 100(14), the first right-handed image 75, the in-round image 76, and the number-of-rounds image 77 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the round number image 77 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the last round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 100(15). In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 510, the cursor is match|combined with the mode of "A".

And if predetermined time passes after the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 100 (16), the special time saving start image 78 will be displayed. Also, at this time, the second shot-to-right image 511 is displayed together with the first shot-to-right image 75 .
Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 100 (17), "777", which is the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. FIG. The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "777" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed. In addition, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. A text of "30 times" is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 79 .

As described above, in the variable effect example 3, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is performed in the normal game state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect. (See FIG. 73 (15)). In addition, in the variation production example 5, when the variation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is performed in the special time-saving game state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win production. (See FIG. 83 (17)). On the other hand, in the variable production example 10, when a variable production is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the specific time saving game state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the execution of the SP reach production. not. However, in the case where the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed in the specific time-saving game state, the hidden stage image 61 may be redisplayed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit in the normal game state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. On the other hand, in the special time-saving game state and the specific time-saving game state, when the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is performed, the hidden stage image 61 is not displayed again after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. You may do so.

In addition, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when the game ball wins in the second start hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the “judgment result” is changed to the “variable effect pattern” in which the “jackpot” A special rendition is associated with it. Here, examples of the change-time special effects include pseudo-continuous effects, SP reach effects, change effects, zone effects, effect effects, character effects, sound effects, button operation effects, and the like. In addition, in the variable performance pattern table used when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “fluctuation performance pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss” is associated with the special performance at the time of fluctuation. Not done. In other words, the variable performance in which the variable special performance is executed based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.
On the other hand, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 59) used when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, the "judgment result" is changed to the "variable effect pattern" of "missing". A special rendition is associated with it. In addition, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the "judgment result" is changed to the "variable effect pattern" that is "missing". A special rendition is associated with it. In other words, a variable effect in which a special effect is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and a special effect at the time of change based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state In the variable performance in which is executed, a variable performance may be performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect in which the special effect is performed at the time of variation is executed, the second start port in the specific time reduction game state rather than the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state The variation performance based on the winning to 122 is more likely to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state is higher than the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time saving game state. The variation performance based on is more likely to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which a special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed without the SPSP ready-to-win effect being performed, a specific The variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the time-saving game state is more likely to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In addition, when the fluctuation production in which the special production is performed at the time of fluctuation without the SPSP reach production being performed, the fluctuation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state is in the specific time reduction game state. The variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is more likely to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable effect in which the special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the second start in the specific time reduction game state is higher than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state The variation performance based on the number of reserved mouths 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when the variable production in which the special production is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the second in the specific time-saving gaming state than the fluctuation production based on the fact that the holding number of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state The variation performance based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value of '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without performing the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the normal game state, The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reserved second start ports 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state may be made easier to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without performing the SPSP reach performance is executed, than the variable performance based on the specific number of the holding number of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state The variation performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the specified time-saving game state may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In these cases, the specific number may be any value of '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is executed in which a special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot Although it has been described that it is always executed (100%), it is not limited to this. Even when a variable performance is executed in which a special performance is performed at the time of variation based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed. good too. In addition, even if the variation performance in which the special performance is performed at the time of variation is executed based on the fact that the holding number of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time reduction game state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. A variation effect may be executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the SPSP reach production is not performed based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state and the fluctuation production is performed, the special symbol lottery lottery result is Although it has been described that the variable effect, which is a big hit, is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the SPSP ready-to-win performance is not performed based on the prize winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state and the variable performance is performed in which the special performance at the time of variation is performed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. Variation production may be performed. In addition, even if the SPSP ready-to-win production is not performed based on the specific number of holdings of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state and the fluctuation performance is performed, the special symbol is executed. A variable effect may be executed in which the lottery result of the lottery is a loss.

In addition, in the variation production example 1, the ready-to-win production (see FIG. 68 (19)) is executed after the ready-to-win production (see FIG. 67 (18)) is executed, and then the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. A decorative design 41 is displayed by a combination of notifying that (see FIG. 69 (25)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 59) used in the normal game state, the "variable effect pattern" whose "judgment result" is "loss" is associated with "ready-to-win" and "normal". In other words, in the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is executed in the normal game state, the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost may be performed.

On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 63) used in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “jackpot” “fluctuation performance pattern”, “reach fan” and “normal” were associated. "EK2" which is a "fluctuation effect pattern" is provided. In the variable production based on this "EK2", the variable production is started as shown in the variable production example 10 (see FIG. 98 (2)), and after the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops (see FIG. 98 (3)), The ready-to-win effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect using the right decorative pattern 41 and the ready-to-win effect image 94 as shown in FIG. (5)), etc., the double decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 98 (6) and FIG. 99 (7)), promotion promotion production (see FIG. 99 (8)) and promotion production (FIG. 99) (9)) is executed, the decorative pattern 41 after the promotion is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 99 (10)) and fixed and stopped (see FIG. 99 (11)). In addition, in the variable production pattern table used in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variable production pattern” in which the “judgment result” is “missing” is associated with “reach swing” and “normal”. is not provided. In other words, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed after the ready-to-win performance is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance for executing the ready-to-win performance is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win performance, the variable performance in the second mode is easier to execute than the variable performance in the first mode. .

In addition, in the variable production example 4, the ready-to-win production (see (14) in FIG. 77) is executed after the ready-to-win production (see (13) in FIG. 77) is executed, and then the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. A decorative pattern 41 is displayed by a combination of notifying that (see FIG. 78 (20)). Here, in the fluctuation production pattern table (see FIG. 61) used in the special time-saving gaming state, the "judgment result" is "off""fluctuation production pattern" is associated with "reach fanning" and "normal" . In other words, in the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed after the ready-to-win performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost may be performed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance of executing the ready-to-win performance is executed after the execution of the ready-to-win excitement performance, the variable performance in the specific mode is easier to execute than the variable performance in the special mode. Here, as a special mode, for example, a special time-saving gaming state is exemplified. Moreover, as a specific mode, for example, a specific time-saving gaming state is exemplified.
In this case, when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the ready-to-win stimulating effect is executed in the variable effect in the specific mode, the player can be strongly expected to execute the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

It should be noted that, when the variable performance for executing the ready-to-win performance is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win performance, the variable performance in the special time-saving game state is more likely to execute the jackpot game than the variable performance in the first mode. good. In this case, the special time-saving gaming state is regarded as the second mode.

In addition, when the variable effect of executing the ready-to-win effect is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the number of reservations is the specific number in the second mode rather than the variable effect based on the specific number of reservations in the first mode. A variable effect based on a certain event may make it easier to execute a jackpot game. In addition, when the variable production of executing the ready-to-win production is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win production, the number of holds is the specific number in the specific mode rather than the variable production based on the specific number of holds in the special mode. The variation performance based on the above may make it easier for the jackpot game to be executed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Further, when the variable performance for executing the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win performance is executed, the second starting port in the second mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. The variation performance based on the winning of the game ball to 122 may make it easier to execute the jackpot game. Further, when the variable effect of executing the ready-to-win effect is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the variable effect in the second mode is performed based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the first mode. The variation performance based on the number of holdings of the 2 start ports 122 being this specific number may make it easier to execute the jackpot game. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Also, the percentage of ready-to-win establishment in the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed may be higher in the first mode than in the second mode.
That is, when the variable performance for executing the ready-to-win excitement performance is performed, the variable performance in the first mode is easier to execute than the variable performance in the second mode, and the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is performed. When the variation performance to be executed is performed, the variation performance in the second mode may be easier to execute than the variation performance in the first mode.
In this case, in the first mode, the player can expect that the ready-to-win will be established more than in the second mode, because the ready-to-win is likely to be executed when the ready-to-win fanning effect is executed. In addition, in the second mode, the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is executed more than in the first mode because the big win game is easily executed in the variable performance in which the ready-to-win excitement performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is performed. A player can be made to expect that a jackpot game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of providing the player with various interests according to the mode and capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

Further, when a variable performance for executing a reach-flavoring performance is performed, the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode. The variable performance based on the winning is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance, and when the variable performance to execute the ready-to-win performance is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win fanning performance, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode. The variation performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode may be easier to execute the big hit game than the variation performance based on. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, when the variable performance for executing the reach-flavoring performance is performed, the first start port 121 in the first mode rather than the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding a specific number in the second mode. The variable production based on the number of reservations being this specific number makes it easier to execute the ready-to-win production, and when the variable production to execute the ready-to-win production is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win excitement production, the first start opening in the first mode. A jackpot game is executed in the variable production based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being this specific number in the second mode rather than the fluctuation production based on the holding number of 121 being this specific number. It can be easy. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Further, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is executed may be executed more easily in the variable performance in the second mode than in the variable performance in the first mode. In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable effect in the first mode than in the variable effect in the second mode. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is more of a reach fanning production than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. After the execution of , the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed may be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more of a reach fanning production than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. After the execution of , the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed may be easily executed. In addition, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the first mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the second start port 122 in the second mode In this case, it may be easier to execute the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, in the second mode, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the second start port 122 in the first mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 In this case, it may be easier to execute the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the variable performance in which the ready-to-win-flavor performance is performed in the second mode than in the first mode. In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the variable performance in which the ready-to-win-flavor performance is performed in the first mode than in the second mode. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is more of a reach fanning production than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. You may make it easy to perform the variation production|presentation which is performed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more of a reach fanning production than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. You may make it easy to perform the variation production|presentation which is performed. In addition, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the first mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the second start port 122 in the second mode In the case of , it may be easier to execute the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed. Also, in the second mode, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the second start port 122 in the first mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 In the case of , it may be easier to execute the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Further, when the variable performance of executing the ready-to-win performance is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win performance, the second start port 122 in the specific mode is selected rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the special mode. The variable performance based on the winning of the game ball may make it easier to execute the jackpot game. In addition, when the variable effect of executing the ready-to-win effect is performed after the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the second start in the specific mode is performed rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special mode. The variation performance based on the number of held mouths 122 being this specific number may make it easier to execute the big winning game. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, the variation performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is executed may be executed more easily in the variation performance in the specific mode than in the special mode. In addition, the variable performance in the special mode, in which the ready-to-win performance is performed after the ready-to-win excitement performance is executed, may be executed more easily than the variable performance in the specific mode. In addition, the variation performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode is better than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode. You may make it easy to perform the variable production|presentation by which a ready-to-win production|presentation is performed later. In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode is better than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode. You may make it easy to perform the variable production|presentation by which a ready-to-win production|presentation is performed later. Also, in the special mode, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the specific mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 However, it is also possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. In addition, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special mode. However, it is also possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the variable performance in which the ready-to-win effect is performed in the variable performance in the specific mode than in the special mode. In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the variable performance in which the ready-to-reach-flavoring performance is performed in the variable performance in the special mode than in the specific mode. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode, the reach fanning production is performed. You may make it easy to perform the variation production|presentation which is given. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode, rather than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode, is a ready-to-win production. You may make it easy to perform the variation production|presentation which is given. Also, in the special mode, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the specific mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 However, it is also possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is performed. In addition, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special mode. However, it is also possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Further, for example, when a variable effect is performed in which a ready-to-win effect is executed in the first pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, the ready-to-win effect in the first pattern is performed. The percentage is the first percentage. The first pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 consisting of even numbers such as "2", "4", "6" and "8". Then, when the variation effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is executed in the second pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, the rate of executing the ready-to-win effect in the second pattern is , a second ratio. The second pattern is a decorative pattern 41 which is more advantageous for the player to match than the first pattern, such as the number of rounds of a jackpot game performed by matching the patterns is larger than the number of rounds by matching the first patterns. . The second pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 such as "3" or specific characters. Also, the second percentage is the same value as or smaller than the first percentage. Furthermore, when a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is executed in the third symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, the rate of executing the ready-to-win effect in the third symbol is , a third ratio. The third pattern is a decorative pattern 41 which is more advantageous for the player to match than the third pattern, such as the number of rounds of a jackpot game performed by matching the patterns is larger than the number of rounds by matching the second patterns. . The third pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 consisting of "7" or specific characters. Also, the third percentage is a value smaller than either of the first percentage and the second percentage.
Further, for example, when a variable effect is performed in which a ready-to-win effect is executed in the first symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode, the ready-to-win effect in the first symbol is performed. The percentage may be a fourth percentage. The fourth percentage may be less than the first percentage, may be the same as the first percentage, or may be greater than the first percentage. Then, when the variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is executed in the second pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode, the rate of executing the ready-to-win effect in the second symbol is , a fifth ratio. The fifth percentage may be less than the second percentage, may be the same as the second percentage, or may be greater than the second percentage. Furthermore, when a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is executed in the third symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode, the rate of executing the ready-to-win effect in the third symbol is , a sixth ratio greater than the third ratio. Further, the rate of increase from the third rate to the sixth rate is greater than the rate of increase from the first rate to the fourth rate and the rate of increase from the second rate to the fifth rate. good too.
Further, for example, when a variable effect is performed in which a ready-to-win effect is executed in the first symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode, the ready-to-win effect in the first symbol is performed. The percentage may be a seventh percentage. The seventh percentage may be smaller or larger than either of the first percentage and the fourth percentage. In addition, the rate at which the variable production is performed in which the reach-flavor production (reach production) in the first symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, and the second start in the second mode The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode is higher than the ratio of performing the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance (ready-to-win performance) is executed in the first pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the port 122. Based on this, the rate at which the fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win effect (ready-to-win effect) is executed in the first symbol is performed may be smaller.
Further, for example, when a variable effect is performed in which a ready-to-win effect is executed in the second pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode, the ready-to-win effect in the second pattern is performed. The percentage may be an eighth percentage. The eighth ratio may be smaller or larger than either of the second ratio and the fifth ratio. In addition, the rate at which variable production is performed in which the reach-flavor production (reach production) in the second symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, and the second start in the second mode The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode is higher than the ratio of performing the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance (ready-to-win performance) is executed in the second pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the port 122. Based on this, the rate at which the variation effect in which the ready-to-win effect (ready-to-win effect) is executed in the second symbol may be smaller.
Further, for example, when a variable effect is performed in which a ready-to-win effect is executed in the third pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode, the ready-to-win effect in the third pattern is performed. The percentage may be a ninth percentage. The ninth ratio may be smaller or larger than either of the third ratio and the sixth ratio. In addition, the rate at which variable production is performed in which the reach-flavor production (reach production) in the third symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the first mode, and the second start in the second mode The winning rate of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode is higher than the ratio of performing the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance (ready-to-win performance) is executed in the third pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the port 122. Based on this, the rate at which the variation effect in which the ready-to-win effect (ready-to-win effect) is executed in the third symbol may be smaller.
Further, each ratio described above may be a ratio in the variable effect executed when the number of holdings of the target starting port of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Moreover, the production control unit 300 may execute the first production when the ready-to-win production in the first symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. The first effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a background image of a specific color or a specific character. The specific color is blue, yellow, or the like, for example. In addition, the production control unit 300 may execute the first production when the ready-to-win production is performed in the second symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. A second effect different from the first effect may be executed. The second effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a background image having a color different from that of the first effect, or a character different from that of the first effect. The color different from the first rendering is, for example, green, purple, or the like. Then, the effect control unit 300 may execute the third effect when the ready-to-win effect is performed in the third symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. The third effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a background image having a color different from that of the first effect and the second effect, or a character different from that of the first effect and the second effect. The color different from the first effect and the second effect is, for example, red, gold, or the like.
Then, the game ball wins to the first start port 121 in the first mode rather than the variable performance in which the reach-flavor performance in the third symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode. The third effect may be easier to be executed in the variable effect in which the reach-flavor effect in the third symbol is executed based on. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more than the variable performance in which the reach-flavoring performance in the first symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. The first effect may be executed more easily in the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect in the first symbol is executed based on. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more than the variable performance in which the reach-flavoring performance in the second pattern is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. The first and second effects may be more likely to be executed in the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect in the second symbol is executed based on.
Also, the execution ratio of the third effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is It may be the same as the execution ratio of the third effect. Also, the execution ratio of the first effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is It may be the same as the execution ratio of the first effect. Also, the execution ratio of the second effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is It may be the same as the execution ratio of the second effect.

In addition, in the variable effect example 3, when the promotion effect is executed, the decoration pattern 41 for doubles is not displayed enlarged (see (14) in FIG. 73), but the present invention is not limited to this. When the promotion effect is performed, the decoration pattern 41 of double eyes may be enlarged and reduced (see FIGS. 99(9) and 99(10)). Further, when the promotion promotion performance is performed, even if the promotion promotion performance is not executed, the double-th decorative pattern 41 may be displayed enlarged and reduced after the promotion promotion performance is executed.

(Variation production example 11)
FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 11) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. Variation production example 11 is an example of variation production based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the normal game state.
101 and 102 are variable effects executed when "ED3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, the variation of the final special symbol in the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 101 (1), A first transition image 512 and a resulting image 513 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the pending image 52, and the stage image 61 are not displayed. On the other hand, the small pattern 56 is displayed. In addition, the reservation number display 55 of the first start opening 121 indicates "3", which is the number of reservations for winning the first start opening 121, and the reservation number display 55 of the second start opening 122 is the second start opening. "1", which is the pending number for winning a prize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(2), the variation of the small symbol 56 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(3), the small symbols 56 are displayed in a row by the combination of "555" and temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the first winning suggestive image 528 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(4), the double decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "555".
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 101(5), the three decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped. The number combination "555" of the decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. Also, "555" as the small pattern 56 is determined and stopped. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "555".
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(6), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the opening image 74 to indicate the start of the big winning game or the small winning game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(7), a promotional image 508 is displayed. A specific area image 509 is displayed in the promotion image 508 .
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the promotion image 508 is displayed without the game ball entering the second big winning hole 126, a remaining time image 529 is displayed as shown in FIG. 102(8). Remaining time image 529 shows the text "3:00 seconds left". After that, a countdown is performed by the remaining time image 529 until the remaining time until the second big winning opening door 126D shifts from the open state to the closed state disappears.

Then, after that, when the remaining time until the second big winning gate door 126D shifts from the open state to the closed state runs out, as shown in FIG. 00 seconds” is displayed. Also, at this time, the promotion image 508 is hidden and the end image 527 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102(10), in the image display section 114, "555" which is the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is confirmed and stopped. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, three pending images 52, an execution count image 501, and a left-handed image 514 are displayed. The number-of-executions image 501 shows the text of "34GAME" including the number of times of the variable performance newly performed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbol was reset. In addition, although illustration is omitted, after this, the variable production based on the holding of the first starting port 121 is started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the normal game state, the second in the small win game When the game ball does not win in the second prize winning opening 126, the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state, and the decoration of doubles are displayed before the start of the first variable performance based on the winning in the first start opening 121 in the normal game state. A pattern 41 and a small double pattern 56 are displayed.

(Variation production example 12)
FIGS. 103 to 107 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 12) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107. FIG. Variation production example 12 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 41 based on the game ball winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In addition, in variation production example 12, the variation production is performed five times.
103 to 107 are all variable effects executed when "EO1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 103(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. It has been permanently stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the image 524 of the specific time saving remaining times are displayed. A text of “294” is displayed in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 103(2), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to fluctuate with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "294" to "293." On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not displayed. In addition, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output. Also, at this time, the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying “Please hit to the right” for prompting the game ball to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 111 .

Next, when four game balls enter the first starting hole 121, a fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed as shown in FIG. 103(3). In the present embodiment, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed each time a game ball wins the first starting hole 121 . Also, every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 121, a voice saying "Please hit right" is output from the speaker 156. - 特許庁On the other hand, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. When the player enters the first starting port 121 four times, no winning sound is output. Also, at this time, "4" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121. FIG. Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displayed as "4" corresponding to the number of reservations for winning to the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, the sub first suspension display 83 is displaying "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(4), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(5), the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(6), the number "1", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(7), "412", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “412” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "293" to "292." Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes “3” display corresponding to the number of reservations regarding the winning to the first start port 121 . Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(9), the number "1" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(10), the figure "5" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(11), the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(12), "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (13), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "292" to "291." Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes “2” display corresponding to the number of reservations regarding winning to the first start port 121 . Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(14), the number "8" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (15), the figure "3" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (16), the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (17), "853", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (18), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "291" to "290." Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "2" to "1". Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes “1” display corresponding to the number of reservations regarding winning to the first start port 121 . Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (19), the number "7" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (20), the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (21), the number "1" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (22), "712", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (23), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "290" to "289." Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes “0” display corresponding to the number of reservations regarding winning to the first start port 121 . Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (24), the number "1" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (25), the figure "6" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (26), the number "3", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (27), "136", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the small symbols 56 are also displayed together and fixed and stopped.

As described above, in the variation effect example 12, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 121 while the first hitting image 75 is displayed, the fourth hitting image 525 is displayed, and from the speaker 156 A voice saying "Please hit to the right" is output. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the first notification to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 while the first notification is being performed, in addition to the first notification, a second notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 is performed. It is possible to do Here, the first notification is, for example, the display of the first shot-to-right image 75 . Further, the second notification is, for example, the display of the fourth right-handed shot image 525 or the output from the speaker 156 of a voice saying, "Please hit right-handed."
In the specific time-saving game state, the first hit-to-right image 75 is displayed, but the player may shoot the game ball to the left side in the game area 111 without noticing the first hit-to-right image 75 . Even in this case, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, by displaying the fourth right-handed image 525 and outputting the sound "Please hit right", the specific time-saving gaming state , the player can be urged to enter the game ball into the second starting port 122 .

In addition, in the variable effect example 10, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed (see FIGS. 94(2) and 94(3)), and the variable effect is performed. , and the display content of the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is updated (see FIG. 94 (2)). On the other hand, in the variation production example 12, even if the game ball wins the first start port 121, the variation image 51 and the holding image 52 are not displayed, but when the variation production is performed, the display content of the specific time reduction remaining number image 524 is updated (see FIG. 103(2)). That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the information display, updates the display mode of the special image, when the game ball wins the second start hole 122 in the second mode, When a game ball wins the first start hole 121, the information display is not displayed and the display mode of the special image is updated. Here, as the second mode, for example, a specific time-saving gaming state can be mentioned. Further, the information display includes, for example, a variable image 51 and a pending image 52 . Moreover, as a special image, the image 524 of the specific time reduction remaining frequency is mentioned, for example.

In this case, even if the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is performed, the player is made aware that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state decreases. can be done. As a result, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player is suppressed from winning the game ball to the first start port 121, and the player can enjoy the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can let Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

It should be noted that the number of times of execution image 501 may be displayed even in the specific time-saving gaming state. Then, when the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state are performed, the execution number image 501 is displayed. Aspects may be updated. In this case, the execution count image 501 is also regarded as a special image.

Further, in the variation production example 1, the ready-to-win production is executed in the variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" (see FIG. 68 (19)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "loss". "PR5", "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", "PR13", etc. are associated with a certain "variation pattern". Then, when "PR5", "PR6", "PR7", "PR10" and "PR13" are selected as the variation pattern, the variation used when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the normal game state. From the production pattern table (see FIG. 59), "ER5-1", "ER6", "ER7", "ER10", "ER13" associated with "normal" meaning reach production as "variable production pattern" ” is selected. In other words, there is a possibility that the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal game state is a loss. On the other hand, in the variation production example 12, the ready-to-win production is not executed in the variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1". Here, in the variation effect pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variation pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss” is “ "Normal" is not associated. In other words, the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving game state is lost.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the second mode, In the first mode, the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1". As the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a specific time reduction game state is mentioned, for example.

In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the ready-to-win effect is the same between the variable effect in the first mode and the variable effect in the second mode, the variable effect based on winning a common start opening is performed. Even in this case, the player can be entertained with performances having different properties depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is "1". Although it has been described that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being “1” in the first mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port in the first mode rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the second mode. The variable effect based on the number of pending 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first The ready-to-win effect may be more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning to the starting port 121. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode is lost (0%). However, it is not limited to this. In the second mode, the ready-to-win performance may be executed even when the variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number is a loss. . In addition, even when the variation effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the second mode is a loss, the ready-to-win effect may be executed.
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second mode in the second mode than the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. The ready-to-win effect may be more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the specific number of holdings of the starting port 122.例文帳に追加In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is performed, the winning to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The ready-to-win effect may be executed more easily in the change effect based on .

In addition, in the variation production example 1, the ready-to-win production is executed in the variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" (see FIG. 67 (18)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "loss". "PR4" and "PR6" are associated with a certain "fluctuation pattern". Then, when "PR4" or "PR6" is selected as the variation pattern, "variation 'ER4-1' and 'ER6' associated with 'ready-to-win' are selected as 'effect pattern'. In other words, there is a possibility that the ready-to-win performance is executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "1" in the normal game state is a loss. On the other hand, in the variation production example 12, the ready-to-win production is not executed in the variation production based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1". Here, in the variation effect pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variation pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss” is “ Reach instigation” is not associated. In other words, in the fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "1" in the specific time-saving game state is lost, the ready-to-win performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the second mode, In the first mode, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is more likely to execute the ready-to-win effect. As the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a specific time reduction game state is mentioned, for example.

In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the ready-to-win effect is the same between the variable performance in the first mode and the variable performance in the second mode, the variable performance based on the winning of the common start opening is performed. Even when the game is played, the player can be entertained with performances having different properties depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is "1". Although it has been described that the reach-flavoring effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being “1” in the first mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port in the first mode rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the second mode. The change effect based on the number of pending 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first The variable performance based on the prize winning to the starting port 121 may make it easier to execute the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode is lost, the reach fanning effect is not executed (0% ), but is not limited to this. Even in the case where the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being the specific number in the second mode is executed is executed, even if the ready-to-win performance is executed. good. In addition, even when the variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the second mode is a loss, the ready-to-win performance may be executed.
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second mode in the second mode than the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. The change effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being a specific number may make it easier for the ready-to-win fan effect to be executed. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is performed, the winning to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The change effect based on .

In addition, as shown in variation production example 9, in the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "4" in the specific time saving game state is lost, three decorations Designs 41 are displayed together (see FIG. 95(8)). On the other hand, as shown in variation production example 12, in the variation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the specific time saving game state is lost, three The decorative designs are displayed in order (see FIGS. 104(9) to 104(11)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" than the variable effect based on , The variation performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "4" is the variation performance in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the invisible or difficult to visually recognized state to the easily visible state is aligned. is easy to execute. Here, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is invisible means the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. Further, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see means the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed. Further, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 can be easily recognized is, for example, a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is easily visually recognized is the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

In this case, the holding number of the second starting port 122 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the fact that the holding number of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state can entertain the player with a high probability of ``a powerful variation performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned''. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the interest in the game can be improved in the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in the variable effect example 1, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the normal game state is lost , three decorative patterns 41 are displayed together (see FIG. 66(9)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is "4" than the variation effect based on In the normal game state, the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is more likely to execute the variation performance in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned.
In this case, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" in the specific time saving game state. The variation performance based on this can entertain the player with a high probability of ``a powerful variation performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned''. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" than the variable effect based on , The variation performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "4" is the variation performance in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the invisible or difficult to visually recognized state to the easily visible state is aligned. explained that it is easy to implement In addition, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, in the normal game state, rather than the variable effect based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "4" in the specific time saving game state It has been explained that the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time reduction game state is performed, the second start port 122 is held rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number. A variable effect based on the fact that the number is a specific number may be made easier to execute a variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is the specific number. The variable performance based on the fact that the holding number of one starting port 121 is a specific number may be made easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. In these cases, the specific number may be any value of '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 in the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state is lost. Although it has been described that the variation production that is aligned is not executed (0%), it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the reserved number of the first start port 121 is the specific number in the specific time-saving game state, the variation performance that the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned even in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "4" than the variable effect based on , The variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" is different in the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visible state to an easily visible state. is easy to execute.
In this case, in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "4" compared to the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can be entertained with the variation performance by the extent that the ``variation performance lacking speediness'' in which the decorative patterns 41 are sequentially displayed as the variation performance based on . Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the interest in the game can be improved in the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the normal game state. , In the specific time-saving game state, the variation production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being “4” is a display in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visible state to an easy-to-view state. Variation performances with different timings are likely to be executed.
In this case, in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the number of reservations is "4" compared to the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. The player can be entertained with the variation performance by the extent that the ``variation performance lacking speediness'' in which the decorative patterns 41 are sequentially displayed as the variation performance based on a certain event is difficult to execute. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "4" than the variable effect based on , The variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" is different in the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visible state to an easily visible state. explained that it is easy to implement In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific time reduction game state is more than the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" in the normal game state. 1 explained that the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute the variable performance in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed in the specific time reduction game state, the first start port 121 is held rather than the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding number being the specific number. The variable performance based on the number being a specific number may make it easier to execute the variable performance with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visually-visible state to an easily-visible state. . In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state In the specific time reduction game state A variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is more likely to be executed with a different display timing when the decorative pattern 41 changes from an invisible or difficult-to-visually-visible state to an easily-visible state. You may do so. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state is lost, the decorative pattern 41 is invisible or visible Although it has been described that the variable effect with different display timings from the difficult state to the easy-to-recognize state is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the specific number of reserved numbers of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 is changed from the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is invisible or difficult to see even if it is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. Variation effects with different display timings for easily recognizable states may not be executed.

In addition, in the variation production example 1, the size change production is performed in the variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" (see FIGS. 68(19) and 68(20). ). On the other hand, in the variation production example 12, the size change production is not executed in the variation production based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1". That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the second mode, In the first mode, the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1". As the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a specific time reduction game state is mentioned, for example.
In this case, compared to the case where the easiness of execution of the size change effect is the same between the variable effect in the first mode and the variable effect in the second mode, the variable effect based on winning a common start opening is performed. Even when the game is played, the player can be entertained with performances having different properties depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is "1". Although it has been described that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the first mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port in the first mode rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the second mode. The variation effect based on the number of pending 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the size change effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first The size change effect may be more likely to be executed in the change effect based on the winning to the starting port 121. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, the size change effect is not executed (0% ), but is not limited to this. Even if the variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode is a loss, even if the size change performance is executed. good. Also, even when the variation effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the second mode is a loss, the size change effect may be executed.
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is performed, the second mode in the second mode rather than the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. The size change effect may be executed more easily in the change effect based on the number of pending starting ports 122 being a specific number. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is performed, the winning to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The size change effect may be executed more easily in the variation effect based on .

In addition, in the variation production example 1, the position change production is performed in the variation production based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" (see FIGS. 68 (19) and 68 (20) ). On the other hand, in the variation production example 12, the position change production is not executed in the variation production based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 is "1". That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the second mode, In the first mode, the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1". As the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a specific time reduction game state is mentioned, for example.
In this case, the variation performance based on the winning to the common starting port is performed as compared with the case where the easiness of execution of the position change performance is the same between the variation performance in the first mode and the variation performance in the second mode. Even when the game is played, the player can be entertained with performances having different properties depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on , It has been described that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start in the normal game state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being the specific number in the specific time reduction game state The variation effect based on the number of held mouths 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the position change effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is the second in the normal game state. The position change effect may be more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the winning to the 1 start port 121.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the position change effect is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. Even when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the holding number of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state is lost is executed, the position change performance is executed. good too. Further, even when the variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the position change performance may be executed.
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state The position change effect may be executed more easily in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being a specific number. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The position change effect may be executed more easily in the variable effect based on the winning of (1).

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "loss". "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", "PR13", etc. are associated with the "variation pattern". Then, when "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", and "PR13" are selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect pattern table ( 59), 'ER6', 'ER7', 'ER10' and 'ER13' associated with the special effect at the time of change are selected as the 'fluctuation effect pattern'. Here, examples of the change-time special effects include SP ready-to-win effects, SPSP ready-to-win effects, change effects, zone effects, effect effects, character effects, sound effects, button operation effects, and the like. In other words, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "1" in the normal game state is a loss, there is a possibility that the special performance at the time of fluctuation will be executed. . On the other hand, in variation production example 12, the special production at the time of fluctuation is not executed. Here, in the variable production turntable (see FIG. 64) used when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "judgment result" is "off" in the "variable production pattern" There is no special effect associated with fluctuations. In other words, in the fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the fluctuation-time special performance is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variation effect based on In the normal game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is easier to execute the special effect at the time of change.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is "1" than the variable effect based on Although it has been described that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1" in the normal game state is easier to execute the special effect at the time of change, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start in the normal game state than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being the specific number in the specific time reduction game state The variation effect based on the number of reserved mouths 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the special effect at the time of change. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'. In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is the second in the normal game state. The variable effect based on the winning to the 1 start port 121 may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the special effect is not executed at the time of fluctuation ( 0%), but it is not limited to this. Even in the case where the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time reduction game state is executed is executed, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed. may In addition, even when the variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the variable special performance may be executed. In these cases, the special effect at the time of fluctuation to be executed is any one of the SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, change effect, zone effect, effect effect, character effect, sound effect, and button operation effect. may
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state The variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change. Also, regardless of the number of reservations, if the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, in the specific time reduction game state The variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change.

Moreover, in this embodiment, even if a game ball wins the 1st start opening 121 in a specific time saving game state, the fluctuation|variation image 51 and the pending|holding image 52 are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation image 51 and the holding image 52 allows the player to be entertained. Therefore, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the fluctuation image 51 and the holding image 52 can entertain players. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

Moreover, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins the 1st starting hole 121 in a specific time saving game state, while the pending|holding image 52 is not displayed, the pending|holding number display 55 is updated.
When the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, not only the pending image 52 is not displayed, but also the pending number display 55 is not updated, the player, the game ball to the first start port 121 won't be able to recognize whether it won a prize or not. Therefore, in this embodiment, by updating the pending number display 55, the player can not expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit through the pending image 52, but the first start port 121 It is made possible to recognize that the game ball has won a prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the speaker 156 outputs the sound "Please hit right" every time the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Here, for a predetermined period after being controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the game ball wins the first start port 121, the sound "Please hit right" may not be output. As the predetermined period, for example, it may be a period from when it is controlled to the specific time saving game state to when the first variation effect is completed. Further, as the predetermined period, for example, until the fourth right-handed image 525 displayed in the first variation production is hidden after being controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 91 (14)) between There may be. That is, the predetermined period may be any period in the specific time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 108(A) is an explanatory diagram of the execution times of the first to fifth variable effects in the example 1 of variable effects. FIG. 108(B) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variation performances in Example 4 of variation performance. FIG. 108(C) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variation performances in Example 9 of variation performance. FIG. 108(D) is an explanatory diagram of the execution times of the first to fifth variable effects in example 12 of variable effects.

As shown in FIG. 108 (A), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings of the first start port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PR1" (see FIG. 24) and the variation effect pattern "ER1" (see FIG. 59) is selected, and the first variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T1. This time T1 is 8.00 seconds (see FIG. 24), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 65(2) to 65(6).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4", the variation pattern "PR3" and the variation performance pattern "ER3" are selected, and the second variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this second variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T2. This time T2 is 4.60 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 66(7) to 66(9).
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "3", the variation pattern "PR2" and the variation performance pattern "ER2" are selected, and the third variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T3. This time T3 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The third variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 66(10) and 66(11).
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PR2" and the variation performance pattern "ER2" are selected, and the fourth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T4. This time T4 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fourth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, corresponding to FIGS. ing.
Thereafter, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PR6" and the variation performance pattern "ER6" are selected, and the fifth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this fifth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T5. This time T5 is 90.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the fifth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is executed, FIGS. 68(24) and FIG. 69(25).

Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), in the special time-saving gaming state, when the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PH1" (see FIG. 26) and the variation effect pattern "EH1 ” (see FIG. 61) is selected, and the first variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T6. This time T6 is 2.50 seconds (see FIG. 26), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 75(2) to 75(4).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "4", the variation pattern "PH3" and the variation performance pattern "EH3" are selected, and the second variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this second variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T7. This time T7 is 1.50 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 75(5) and 75(6).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PH2" and the variation performance pattern "EH2" are selected, and the third variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T8. This time T8 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The third variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 76(7) and 76(8).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "2", the variation pattern "PH2" and the variation performance pattern "EH2" are selected, and the fourth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T9. This time T9 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the fourth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 76(9) and 76(10).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PH5" and the variation performance pattern "EH5" are selected, and the fifth variation performance is started. Time T10 is the time from the start to the end of the fifth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance. This time T10 is 60.02 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the fifth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is executed, FIG. 76 (11), FIG. 76 (12), FIG. 77(18), FIG. 78(19) and FIG. 78(20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PM1" (see FIG. 28) and the variation effect pattern "EM1 ” (see FIG. 63) is selected, and the first variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T11. This time T11 is 2.01 seconds (see FIG. 28) which is the same as the variation time of the special symbol. The first variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 94(2) to 94(6).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "4", the variation pattern "PM3" and the variation performance pattern "EM3" are selected, and the second variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this second variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T12. This time T12 is 1.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 95(7) and 95(8).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PM2" and the variation performance pattern "EM2" are selected, and the third variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T13. This time T13 is 1.01 seconds, which is the same as the variation time of the special symbol. The third variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 95(9) and 95(10).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "2", the variation pattern "PM2" and the variation performance pattern "EM2" are selected, and the fourth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the fourth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T14. This time T14 is 1.01 seconds, which is the same as the variation time of the special symbol. The fourth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 95(11) and 95(12).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PH5" and the variation performance pattern "EH5" are selected, and the fifth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the fifth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T15. This time T15 is 2.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The fifth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 96(13) to 96(17).

Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PO1" (see FIG. 29) and the variation effect pattern "EO1 ' (see FIG. 64) is selected, and the first variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T16. This time T16 is 14.01 seconds (see FIG. 29) which is the same as the variation time of the special symbol. Also, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, corresponding to FIGS. ing.
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation performance pattern "EO1" are selected, and the second variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this second variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T17. This time T17 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. The second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 104(8) to 104(12).
After that, when the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation performance pattern "EO1" are selected, and the third variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of this third variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T18. This time T18 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Also, the third variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 105(13) to 105(17).
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation performance pattern "EO1" are selected, and the fourth variation performance is started. The time from the start to the end of the fourth variable performance, ie, the execution time of the variable performance, is time T19. This time T19 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fourth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, corresponding to FIGS. ing.
Thereafter, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation performance pattern "EO1" are selected, and the fifth variation performance is started. Time T20 is the time from the start of the fifth variable effect to the end, that is, the execution time of the variable effect. This time T20 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fifth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, as shown in FIGS. (27).

In addition, in the explanation using FIG. 108, it was explained that the execution time of each variation effect is the same as the variation time of the special symbol, but it is not limited to this.
The execution time of the variable performance may be substantially the same as the variable time of the special symbols related to this variable performance, and does not have to be the same.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 108(D), in example 12 of variable effect, time T16 and time T17 have the same length of time. Here, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is selected based on "1". The "variation pattern" (see FIG. 29) to be selected and the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" are variation patterns with the same "time". In other words, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and the reach performance is not executed is performed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" is not longer than the execution time of the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(C), in example 9 of variation production, time T11 is longer than time T12. Here, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is selected based on "1". The "variation pattern" (see FIG. 28) is set to a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "4". A pattern is provided. In other words, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state and the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, the variable performance based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "1" execution time of is longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of pending of the second start port 122 is "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4". The variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being “1” is the first ratio, the second The variable performance based on the second starting port 122 having a pending number of "1" has a longer execution time than the variable performance based on the holding number of the starting port 122 being "4". The rate performed is the second rate. Then, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is less than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Since the execution time of the variable performance tends to become longer depending on the condition, the player can enjoy various performances with a high probability even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed. can. Therefore, in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108(A), in the first variable effect example, the time T1 is longer than the time T2. Here, in the normal game state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1". In the "variation pattern" (see FIG. 24), a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "4" is set. is provided. In other words, in the normal game state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable performance is performed in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the number of suspensions of the first start port 121 is "1". There is a possibility that the execution time will be longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state. The variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being “1” is longer than the variable performance based on the fact that the variable performance is performed. In the game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" is executed more than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4". The rate at which the variable effect with a long time is performed is the second rate. Then, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is that the number of reservations is smaller. As the execution time of the variable performance tends to become longer, the player can be entertained with various performances with a high probability even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ready-to-win performance is not executed. . Therefore, in the variable performance based on the prize winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is lost and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the first start port The execution time of the variable effect based on the number of reservations of 121 being "1" is not longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" (0%). However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the prize winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is lost and the variable performance is performed in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is performed. is "1" may be longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the holding number of the first start port 121 is "4".

Further, when comparing the time T2 in the variable production example 1 shown in FIG. 108(A) and the time T17 in the variable production example 12 shown in FIG. 108(D), the time T17 is longer than the time T2. Here, in the normal game state, based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4", the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed. ' (see FIG. 24), and 'Time' is either '4.60' seconds or '10.00' seconds. On the other hand, in the specific time-saving gaming state, based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4", the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach production is not executed. ' (see FIG. 29) whose 'time' is '14.01' seconds is selected.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is "4". The variable performance based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the second mode is more likely to perform the variable performance with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on. As the first mode, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a specific time reduction game state is mentioned, for example.

In this case, the variable performance in the first mode and the variable performance in the second mode have the same number of pending start ports as compared to the case where the variable performance with a long execution time is executed with the same ease. Even if a variable performance based on the number is performed, the player can be entertained with performances having different properties depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

Also, when time T12 in example 9 of variable production shown in FIG. 108(C) is compared with time T17 in example 12 of variable production shown in FIG. 108(D), time T17 is longer than time T12. Here, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "4" is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed. As the "pattern" (see FIG. 28), the one in which the "time" is "1.00" seconds is selected. On the other hand, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed. ' (see FIG. 29) whose 'time' is '14.01' seconds is selected.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "4". The variable performance based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is more likely to perform the variable performance with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on.

In this case, when the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state has a large number of holdings than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state Since the execution time of the variable performance tends to be shortened, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of speed with a high probability. Therefore, in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the interest in the game can be improved. can. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is "4". It has been explained that the variable performance based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "4" in the second mode is more likely to perform the variable performance with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on. In addition, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is "4". , It has been described that the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4" is more likely to perform the variation performance with a long execution time, but it is not limited to this.
When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, the second mode is performed rather than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the first mode. A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved first start ports 121 in the mode is a specific number may be made easier to perform a variable effect with a longer execution time. Also, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number, A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number may be made easier to perform a variable effect with a longer execution time. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect that the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is based on the specific number. It has been explained that the variable performance with a longer execution time is always performed (100%) than the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the second mode. Also, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number, Although it has been described that the variable effect based on the specific number of pending first start ports 121 always performs the variable effect with a long execution time (100%), the present invention is not limited to this.
Even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a loss and the variable performance is performed in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. Also, in the first mode, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number may be performed in a variable performance with a longer execution time. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the second mode and a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the fluctuation based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number. There may be a case where the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is performed with a longer execution time than the performance.

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "1""PR1" and "PR4" are provided as "variation patterns". Therefore, in the normal game state, when the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" is performed multiple times, there is a possibility that different variation patterns are selected in the multiple times of variable performance. be. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "1". Only "PO1" is provided as a certain "variation pattern". Therefore, when the variable performance based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed multiple times, the same variation pattern is selected in the multiple times of variable performance.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is "1". The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is "1". The ratio of selecting the same variation pattern in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second percentage. Then, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, compared to the case where the first ratio and the second ratio are the same, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reservations of the common starting port being the same number, depending on the mode A player can be entertained with performances having different properties. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is "1". The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is "1". It has been explained that the ratio of the same variation pattern being selected in the third and fourth fluctuation effects is the second ratio, and the second ratio is higher than the first ratio, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, the first variable performance and the second based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the first mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variation performance is the first percentage, and the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is a specific number. , the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected is the second rate, and the second rate may be higher than the first rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Also, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the second percentage is 1 (100%), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the variable performance is performed in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the third variation based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. Different variation patterns may be selected for the effect and the fourth variation effect.

Also, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variation effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the first variation based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number in the second mode The ratio of selecting the same variation pattern in the production and the second variation production is the first ratio, and the third variation production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the second mode is a specific number. In the fourth variation effect, the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected is the second rate, and the second rate may be higher than the first rate.

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "4""PH3" and "PH4" are provided as "fluctuation patterns". Therefore, when the variable performance based on the holding number of the second start port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving gaming state is performed multiple times, there is a possibility that different variation patterns are selected in the multiple times of variable performance. There is On the other hand, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "4". Only "PM3" is provided as a certain "variation pattern". Therefore, when the variable performance based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "4" is performed multiple times in the specific time-saving gaming state, the same variation pattern is selected in the multiple times of variable performance.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "4". The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is "4" The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance based on is the second percentage. Then, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, compared to the case where the first ratio and the second ratio are the same size, even if the variable performance is performed based on the number of reservations of the common start port being the same number, the time saving game To provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of entertaining a player with performances having different properties according to the type of state and executing highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect that the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "4". The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is "1" It was explained that the percentage of the same variation pattern being selected is the second percentage in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance based on, and the second percentage is higher than the first percentage. Not limited.
When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, the first variable performance and the first based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number in the special time-saving game state. The ratio of selecting the same variation pattern in the 2 fluctuation production is the first ratio, and the third fluctuation production and the fourth are based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is the specific number in the specific time reduction game state. The second rate is the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variable effect, and the second rate may be higher than the first rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

Also, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the second percentage is 1 (100%), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the third based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in a specific time-saving game state. Different variation patterns may be selected for the variation effect and the fourth variation effect.

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variation pattern” associated with the number of pending “1” and “lost” Only "PO1", which is the variation pattern with the shortest variation time, is provided among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 28) used based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variation pattern” associated with the number of pending “1” and “missing” "PM1", etc., which is a variation pattern different from the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the time-saving gaming state, is provided.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed based on the holding number of the first start port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state, the specific time-saving gaming state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in is the first percentage. In addition, when the fluctuation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1" in the specific time reduction game state, the second start port in the specific time reduction game state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time out of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning in 122 is the second percentage. Then, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

In this case, when the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is less than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state Even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a failure, the player can be entertained with various performances with a high probability by the extent that the variable performance with a long fluctuation time is easily performed. Therefore, in the variation performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the interest in the game can be improved even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser.

In particular, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the "variation pattern" associated with the number of reservations "1" and "lost", the normal game "PR1", etc., which is a variation pattern different from the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the state, is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the holding number of the first start port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving game state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving game The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the state is the first percentage. In addition, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1" in the normal game state, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port 121 in the normal game state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time out of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning is the second percentage. Then, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.
In this case, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more variable than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state when the number of reservations is small. Even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost, the player can be entertained with various performances with a high probability as long as the variable performance is likely to be performed. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed based on the holding number of the first start port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state, the specific time-saving gaming state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on the winning to the first start port 121 in is the first percentage, and the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction gaming state Based on the fact that the number of reservations is "1", when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, among the selectable variation patterns based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is the second ratio, and the first ratio is higher than the second ratio. In addition, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time out of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the opening 121 is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the first starting opening 121 in the normal game state is "1". ”, when the variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variation time of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the longest. Although it has been explained that the ratio of selecting the short fluctuation pattern is the second ratio, and the first ratio is higher than the second ratio, it is not limited to this.
When the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is a specific number, to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state The ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns selectable based on the winning is the first ratio, and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the specific number. When the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed based on, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The selected percentage is the second percentage, and the first percentage may be greater than the second percentage. Also, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start-up port in the specific time-saving gaming state The ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time out of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to 121 is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a specific number. Based on a certain fact, when the variation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state. The rate at which the pattern is selected is the second rate, and the first rate may be higher than the second rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the holding number of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving gaming state Although it has been described that the variation pattern with the shortest variation time of the selectable variation patterns is always selected (100%) based on the winning to the first start port 121 in , it is not limited to this. Based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first in the specific time-saving gaming state A variation pattern different from the variation pattern with the shortest variation time may be selected based on the winning to the starting port 121 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, and when a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, a variable pattern is selected. Regardless of the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 at the time, the variation performance (special symbol variation) with the same execution time is executed.
In this case, the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is different from the variation performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The performance can be enjoyed by the player. Therefore, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player can be made to recognize that the second starting opening 122 should be won instead of the first starting opening 121 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (fluctuation effect patterns) that can be selected based on the winning of the first start port in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state There are more variation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected based on. In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, the number of variation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected is specified. The number of selectable variation patterns (variation performance patterns) is larger when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the time saving game state is a loss. In particular, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the number of selectable variation patterns (variation production patterns) is one.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a variety of variable productions. can entertain people. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more than the number of variable patterns (fluctuation effect patterns) that can be selected based on the winning to the first starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state. The number of variation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected based on the number is larger. In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the number is usually When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the game state is a loss, the number of selectable variation patterns (variation performance patterns) is larger.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more varied than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. can entertain. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

(Variation production example 13)
FIG. 109 and FIG. 110 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 13) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG. Variation production example 13 is a variation production example of the decorative design 41 based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
109 and 110 is an example of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 when "EN2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. Definitely stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the image 524 of the specific time saving remaining times are displayed. A text of “290” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 . Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Further, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the variation of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 is started. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "290" to "289." Also, at this time, the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "Please hit right". On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not displayed. In addition, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(3), a second win suggestion image 91 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fluctuating state. Also, at this time, the special symbols continue to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the second winning suggestive image 91 is continuously displayed. Also, at this time, "135" as the small symbol 56 is determined and stopped. On the other hand, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is neither temporarily stopped nor fixedly stopped. Also, at this time, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 in such a manner as to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.
When the second winning suggestive image 91 is a moving image, the display content of the second winning suggestive image 91 shown in FIG. 109(4) is updated from the second winning suggestive image 91 shown in FIG. 109(3). may

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(5), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the opening image 74 to indicate the start of the big winning game or the small winning game.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(6), a promotional image 508 is displayed. A specific area image 509 is displayed in the promotion image 508 .

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the promotion image 508 is displayed, the jackpot game is started, and as shown in FIG. be done. In the illustrated example, the round number image 77 displays the text "Round 1".

Next, when the last round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 110(8). In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 510, the cursor is match|combined with the mode of "A".
And if predetermined time passes after the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG.110(9), the special time saving start image 78 will be displayed. Also, at this time, the second shot-to-right image 511 is displayed together with the first shot-to-right image 75 .
Next, in the specific time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 110 (10), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness "135" is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. FIG. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "135" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁It should be noted that the small symbols 56 displayed at this time correspond to the row of numbers finally stop-displayed before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. In addition, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. A text of “30 times” is displayed in the special time saving remaining number image 79 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, and the specific time-saving gaming state An original image that is not displayed in the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in , is displayed. The original image includes, for example, the fourth right-handed image 525, the second hit suggestion image 91, and the like.
In this case, by showing the original image to the player during the variable performance, the player can be made to recognize that this variable performance is a variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. can.

In addition, as shown in variation production example 13, in the variation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops or stops. A jackpot game is started without doing. In other words, in the fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a big win, the decorative symbol 41 does not notify the big win. On the other hand, as shown in variation production example 10, in the variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, the decorative pattern 41 of the second row is used. After reporting the big win (see FIG. 99 (11)), the big win game is started.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the player can be excited. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Further, as shown in variation production example 13, in the variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, small patterns 56 including different numbers is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, as shown in variation production example 10, in the variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, the small pattern 56 with all the numbers is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 99 (11)), the jackpot game is started.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a small pattern with all the numbers, rather than the variation production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can be excited by the display of 56. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Also, as shown in variation production example 13, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, at the start of the next variation of the big hit, A decorative pattern 41 including different patterns is displayed (see FIG. 110 (10)). On the other hand, as shown in variation production example 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a big hit, at the start of the next variation of the big hit variation , a double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see FIG. 100 (17)).
In this case, the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variation production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is next to the variation that is the big hit. At the start of the variation of , the display of double-sided decorative pattern 41 can excite the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the "judgment result" is changed to the "variable effect pattern" that is "jackpot". A special rendition is associated with it. Here, examples of the change-time special effects include pseudo-continuous effects, SP reach effects, change effects, zone effects, effect effects, character effects, sound effects, button operation effects, and the like. In addition, in the variable effect pattern table used when the game ball wins in the first start hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “variable effect pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss” is associated with the special effect at the time of fluctuation. Not done. In other words, the variable performance in which the variable special performance is executed based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect in which the special effect is performed at the time of variation is executed, the first start port in the specific time reduction game state rather than the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state The variation performance based on the winning of 121 is more likely to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state is higher than the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time saving game state. The variation performance based on is more likely to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which a special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed without the SPSP ready-to-win effect being performed, a specific The variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state is more likely to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In addition, when the fluctuation production in which the special production at the time of fluctuation is performed without the SPSP reach production being performed is executed, the fluctuation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state In the specific time reduction game state The variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port 121 is more likely to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable effect in which the special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the first start in the specific time reduction game state is higher than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state The variation performance based on the number of reserved mouths 121 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when the variable production in which the special production is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the first in the specific time-saving gaming state than the fluctuation production based on the fact that the holding number of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state The variation performance based on the number of holdings of the starting port 121 being a specific number may make it easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value of '1', '2', '3' and '4'.
In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without performing the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the normal game state, The variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state may be made easier to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without performing the SPSP reach performance is executed, than the variable performance based on the specific number of the holding number of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state The variable performance based on the fact that the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is the specified number in the specified time-saving game state may be made easier to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In these cases, the specific number may be any value of '1', '2', '3' and '4'.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is executed in which a special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot Although it has been described that it is always executed (100%), it is not limited to this. Even when a variable performance is executed in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed. good too. In addition, even if the variable performance in which the special performance is performed at the time of variation is executed based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. A variation effect may be executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach production is not performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the fluctuation production is performed, the special symbol lottery lottery result is Although it has been explained that the variable effect, which is a jackpot, is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the SPSP ready-to-win performance is not performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state and the variable performance is performed, the special symbol lottery result is lost. Variation production may be performed. In addition, even if the SPSP ready-to-win production is not performed based on the specific number of holdings of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state and the variable performance is performed, the special symbol is executed. A variable effect may be executed in which the lottery result of the lottery is a loss.

It should be noted that, when the variable effect in which the special effect is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific short time gaming state rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the short working time gaming state The variation performance based on the above may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, when the variable performance in which the special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific short time gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the short working time gaming state. The variation performance based on the above may be made easier to execute the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

In addition, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a big win, the special performance at the time of fluctuation may not be executed. That is, when the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is performed, rather than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The variable effect based on the winning of (1) may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed, the first start port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state The variable effect based on winning may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change.

(Modified example of variation effect example 12)
111 to 114 are diagrams showing modifications of example 12 of variation effect.
In the variation production example 12, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction gaming state was described, but the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction gaming state is the above example is not limited to
Below, a modification of the variation effect example 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114 . This modification is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the description of the points that are the same as the above-described variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. Definitely stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the image 524 of the specific time saving remaining times are displayed. A text of “294” is displayed in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 111(2), the variation of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "294" to "293." Also, at this time, a variation image 51 is displayed. On the other hand, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output.
It should be noted that a fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed when the game ball has won the first starting hole 121 . In addition, when the game ball has won the first start hole 121, the speaker 156 may output a voice saying "Please hit to the right".

Next, when four game balls enter the first starting hole 121, four pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 111(3). Also, at this time, "4" is displayed in the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 121. FIG. On the other hand, even when any game ball wins the first starting hole 121, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first starting hole 121 is not output.
In addition, every time a game ball wins the first starting hole 121, the fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed. Moreover, every time a game ball wins the first start hole 121, a sound saying "Please hit right" may be output from the speaker 156. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(4), "412", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111(5), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Moreover, at this time, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "293" to "292." Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(6), "125", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is determined and stopped. At this time, the first chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, a blue chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41 by the first chance effect. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(7), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "292" to "291."
Next, as shown in FIG. 112(8), "853", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. At this time, the second chance performance is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decoration patterns 41.例文帳に追加In the illustrated example, green eye-of-chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 by the second eye-of-chance effect. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(9), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "2" to "1". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "291" to "290."
Next, as shown in FIG. 112(10), "553", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “553” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . In addition, in this variable effect, the third chance effect is not executed. In other words, in this variable effect, the final chance effect of the three times is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "290" to "289." Also, at this time, a zone effect is executed and a zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "Rush into the hot zone!" is displayed to make one expect a big win in the variation of the special symbols being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (12), the character effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover part of the image display section 114 by the accessory effect. Also, at this time, a role object effect image 92 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue role object effect image 92 is displayed around the area overlapping the middle movable role object 115B in the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and the sound "Hot!?" is output from the speaker 156. The sound effect of outputting the sound of "Hot!?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (13), the number "4", which is the left and right decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 ( 14 ), a change effect is executed, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 . In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 by the change effect. In addition, when this change production is being executed, the effect sound of the change production is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (15), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (16), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, the number "4", which is the upper and lower small symbols 56, is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the medium and small pattern 56 maintains high speed fluctuation. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (17), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.
When the player operates the production button 161 while the button operation image 69 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. Stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (19), the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped. Also, the stage image 61 is displayed again.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 114 (20), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 1, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is executed (see FIG. 66(7)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the reservation image 52 is easy to execute.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the holding image 52 has a higher probability. A player can be entertained by the changing presentation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%), but it is not limited to this. . Even when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change effect of the pending image 52 may be executed.

In addition, in the modified example, the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed after the start of the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 113 (14)), while the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect. do not have. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 1, the variation effect of the variation image 51 is executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 67 (16)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the reach production The change effect of the variable image 51 before the start is likely to be executed.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. To entertain a player with a change performance with a high probability even when the performance is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change production of the fluctuation image 51 is not executed (0%) before the start of the ready-to-win production. , but not limited to. Even if it is a variation production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the variation production of the variation image 51 may be executed before the start of the ready-to-win production.

Further, in the modified example, the first chance effect (see FIG. 111 (6)) and the second chance effect (see FIG. 112 (8)) are executed, while the third chance effect is executed. It has not been. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 1, the third chance effect is executed (see (14) in FIG. 67). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a plurality of times It is easy to execute the last chance production.
In this case, the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can be entertained with the final chance performance with probability.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the final chance production of the plurality of times is not executed (0%). It is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the last chance production of the three times may be executed.

In addition, in the modified example, a zone effect is executed to expect a big hit in the variable effect being executed (see FIG. 112 (11)), while a big hit is expected in the variable effect next to the variable effect being executed. The expected zone effect is not executed. In addition, below, the zone production|presentation which makes you expect a big win in the variable production|presentation currently being performed may be called a 1st expectation production|presentation. Also, the zone effect that makes the player expect a big hit in the variable effect following the variable effect being executed may be hereinafter referred to as a second expected effect. On the other hand, in the variable production example 1, the second expected production is executed (see (13) in FIG. 67). That is, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second expectation Performance is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is a big hit than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. A player can be entertained with a zone performance with a high probability even if it is a variable performance before the variable performance expected to be played.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the second expected production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, but it is not limited to this. The second expectation effect may be executed even if it is a variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the modified example, the role effect of operating the middle movable accessory 115B is executed (see FIG. 112 (12)), while the action of operating the left movable accessory 115A is performed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. No staging has been performed. In addition, below, the role product presentation which operates the middle movable accessory 115B may be called the 1st role product presentation. In addition, the role production that causes the left movable accessory 115A to move based on the result of the prior determination may be referred to as a second role production below. On the other hand, in the variable production example 1, the second role product production is executed (see (13) in FIG. 67). That is, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second role Object production is easy to be executed.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is higher than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, with a high probability in the preliminary determination result The player can be entertained with the performance based on the performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the second accessory production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, but it is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable production based on winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the second role product production may be executed.

In addition, in the modified example, the effect rendering of displaying the role object effect image 92 is executed (see FIG. 112 (12)), while the effect rendering of displaying the effect image is executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing. It has not been. Here, the effect rendering for displaying the role object effect image 92 may be hereinafter referred to as a first color rendering. Further, the effect effect of displaying the effect image based on the result of the preliminary determination may hereinafter be referred to as a second color effect. Then, in the variable effect example 1, the second color effect of displaying the zone effect image 66 is executed based on the preliminary determination result (see FIG. 67 (15)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second color Production is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is higher than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, with a high probability in the preliminary determination result The player can be entertained with the effect presentation based on the above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, but it is not limited to this. The second color effect may be executed even if it is a variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the modified example, a sound effect is executed in which a voice "Hot!?" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 112 (12)). This sound effect is not based on the preliminary determination result, but is based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 16). This sound effect is hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first sound effect. On the other hand, in the modified example, the sound effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot based on the result of prior determination is not executed. In addition, below, the sound production which outputs the production sound which suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot based on the result of the prior determination may be referred to as the second sound production. Then, in the variation production example 3, the second sound production is executed (see FIG. 71 (2)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second sound Production is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is higher than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, with a high probability in the preliminary determination result The player can be entertained with the sound effect based on the above.

In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated that the 2nd sound production is not performed (0%) in the variation production based on the prize-winning to the 1st starting mouth 121 in a specific time saving game state, it is not limited to this. The second sound production may be performed even if it is a variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the modified example, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 121, the winning sound is not output (see FIG. 111 (3)), and even if the changing effect is executed, the effect sound of the changing effect is output. not (see FIG. 113 (14)). On the other hand, in the variation production example 1, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 121, the winning sound is output (see FIG. 65 (3)), and when the variation production is executed, the effect sound of the variation production is output. (See FIG. 67 (16)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the winning effect sound is output, and when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state does not output the prize-winning sound. Here, the “winning effect sound” is output when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. different. Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state, it is possible to output the effect sound of the change effect, and when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state Do not output the effect sound of the change effect.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the player is entertained through the effect sound. can let Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing another modification of example 12 of variation effect.
Next, another modified example (modified example 2) of the variation effect example 12 will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is an example of production when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the following description, differences from the above-described variable effect examples and modifications will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described variable effect examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. It has been permanently stopped. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55, the stage image 61, and the first right shot image 75 are displayed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displayed as "0" corresponding to the number of reservations of the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub first suspension display 83 is displaying "0".

Next, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121, as shown in FIG. 115 (2), the cycle variation of the special symbols is started in the first special symbol display device 221, and then the first sub-variation display device. A variable display at 81 is initiated. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. Also, the variation image 51 is not displayed. In addition, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output. Also, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained. That is, in the image display section 114, only the display content of the stage image 61 changes.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. is displayed as "1". On the other hand, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. In addition, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 remains "0". In addition, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the first special symbol display device 221, and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 is continued. Also, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. A moving image is displayed in the stage image 61 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(4), the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and then the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 is stopped. Also, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. A moving image is displayed in the stage image 61 .

Next, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. 115 (5), the cycle variation of the special symbols is started in the first special symbol display device 221, and the first special symbol reservation display is performed. device 218 will display "0". After that, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, and the sub-first holding display 83 becomes "0" display. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. A moving image is displayed in the stage image 61 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(6), the first special symbol display 221 stops displaying the special symbol, and then the first sub-variation display 81 stops the variation display. Also, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. A moving image is displayed in the stage image 61 .

As described above, in Modification 2, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 are not changed.
In this case, the player cannot enjoy the effects of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56. - 特許庁Therefore, the player can recognize that the game ball should not enter the first start port 121 and the game ball should enter the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

Further, in Modification 2, even if the first starting port 121 is held in the specific time-saving gaming state, the holding image 52 is not displayed and the holding number display 55 is not updated. That is, even if the suspension of the first start port 121 occurs in the specific time-saving gaming state, the image display unit 114 does not notify that the suspension of the first start port 121 has occurred.
In this case, the player cannot recognize that the first start port 121 is on hold even if he/she sees the display contents of the image display section 114 . Therefore, the player can recognize that the game ball should not enter the first start port 121 and the game ball should enter the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the modification 2, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost is performed, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the number of reservations While the display content of the display 55 does not change, the display content of the stage image 61 changes.
In this case, the player can recognize that the fact that the display contents of the decorative symbols 41, the small symbols 56, and the reserved number display 55 do not change is not due to the malfunction of the image display section 114. FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second starting port 122 is won in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, the second special symbol pending display 219, and the second sub-holding display 84 provides information about the hold. On the other hand, when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the information about the suspension is notified by the first special symbol suspension display 218 and the sub-first suspension display 83, but the suspension image 52 and No notification of information about the pending by the pending number display 55 is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, there are more types of information to be notified as the information on the hold when the second start port 122 is won than when the first start port 121 is won.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, depending on various information related to holding Players can be entertained. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the interest of the game through the information on the hold can be improved.

Also, in this embodiment, when winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the holding image 52, the holding number display 55, the first special symbol holding display 218 and the sub first holding display 83 Information is reported. That is, in the present embodiment, when winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the type notified as the information on the hold many.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the game is played by a variety of information related to holding. can entertain people. Therefore, to make the player recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and the game ball should be awarded to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. can be done.

In addition, in the modification 2, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are not changed, and the pending number display 55 is not updated. but not limited to this.
For example, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, while the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are not changed, the pending number display 55 may be updated. Also, in this case, the fourth right shot image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed.
Moreover, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, while the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is not performed, the variation of the small symbol 56 may be performed. Also, in this case, the fourth hitting-to-right image 525 may be displayed.
Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are not changed, and the reserved number display 55 is not updated, while the fourth right-handed image 525 may be displayed.

Moreover, although modified example 2 demonstrated the example which the specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 is not displayed, it is not limited to this.
In the modification 2, specific time reduction remaining frequency image 524 may be displayed. And when a game ball wins in the 1st starting mouth 121 in specific time saving game state, display contents of specific time saving remaining number image 524 may be updated (subtraction display).

(Modification 3)
116 and 117 are diagrams showing other modifications of example 12 of variation effect.
Next, another modified example (modified example 3) of the variation effect example 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. This modification is an example of production when the game ball wins the second start port 122 during the variation of the special symbol based on the win of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described production examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-described production examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness. It has been permanently stopped. Moreover, at this time, the number display 55 of the pending|holding, the stage image 61, the 1st hitting-right image 75, and the image 524 of the number of specific time saving remaining times are displayed. A text of “290” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524 . Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displayed as "0" corresponding to the number of reservations of the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 is displaying "0". Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222 . Moreover, at this time, the second special symbol reservation display 219 is displayed as “0” corresponding to the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 . Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped. Also, at this time, the second sub display 84 is displaying "0".

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. 116 (2), the cycle variation of the special symbols is started in the first special symbol display device 221, and then the first sub-variation display device. A variable display at 81 is initiated. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. Also, the variation image 51 is not displayed. Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "290" to "289." In addition, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 121 is not output. A moving image is displayed in the stage image 61 .

Next, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 116 (3), after the special symbol cycle variation is started in the second special symbol display device 222, the second sub-variation display device A variable display at 82 is initiated. Furthermore, after that, the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started. Also, a variable image 51 is displayed. Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "289" to "288." On the other hand, the winning sound for informing that the game ball has won the second starting port 122 is not output. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the first special symbol display device 221, and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 is continued.
In addition, with the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122, a winning sound may be output from the speaker 156 informing of the winning of the second starting port 122.

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. is displayed as "1". Also, a pending image 52 is displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 . On the other hand, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the second starting port 122 is not output. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the first special symbol display device 221, and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 is continued. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the second special symbol display device 222, and the variation display on the sub-second variation display device 82 is continued.
In addition, with the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122, a winning sound may be output from the speaker 156 informing of the winning of the second starting port 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(5), the second starting effect image 93 is displayed. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the first special symbol display device 221, and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 is continued. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the second special symbol display device 222, and the variation display on the second sub-variation display device 82 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(6), the second special symbol display 222 stops displaying the special symbols, and then the second sub variable display 82 stops varying display. In addition, "412", which are the three decorative patterns 41, are displayed together and the game is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “412” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the first special symbol display device 221, and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 is continued.

Next, the number of suspensions of the second starting port 122 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. 117 (7), the cycle variation of the special symbols is started in the second special symbol display device 222, and the second special symbol suspension display is performed. 219 will display "0". After that, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is started, and the sub-second holding display 84 becomes "0" display. After that, the variation of the decorative design 41 and the small design 56 is started. Moreover, specific time saving remaining frequency|count image 524 switches from "288" to "287."
After that, the special symbols are stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 221, and then the variable display on the first sub-variation display device 81 is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. Further, the cycle variation of the special symbols is continued on the second special symbol display device 222, and the variation display on the second sub-variation display device 82 is continued.

In addition, after this, the game ball may enter the first starting port 121 . That is, there is a case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 during the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the second starting port 122 . In this case, the variation of the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting port 121 may not be performed until the variation of the special symbols based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is completed. Then, when the variation of the special symbols based on the winning to the second start port 122 is completed, the variation of the special symbols based on the winning to the first starting port 121 may be started.

As described above, in modification 3, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, to the first start port 121 Variation of special symbols based on winning and variation of special symbols based on winning to second starting port 122 are performed at the same time. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, the pending number display 55, and the variable image 51 are displayed corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 122. FIG. That is, a variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is performed.
In this case, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect in the image display unit 114 can entertain the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game ball should be awarded to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the third modification, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning to the first start port 121 It was explained that the variation of the special symbol based on and the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 122 are performed at the same time, and the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is performed. not.
For example, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 And while the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is performed at the same time, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 corresponding to the winning to the second starting port 122 is not performed, that is, the second The variable performance based on the winning to the starting port 122 may not be performed. Also, for example, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 The special symbol variation based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is not performed until the variation of is completed, and when the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 is completed, the winning to the second starting port 122 The variation of the special symbol based on is started, and the variation effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 may be started.

(Processing example 1)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the effect control unit 300 when the electric wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected while the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on. .
As shown in FIG. 118(1), the effect control unit 300 stop-displays the previous special symbol, and in the image display unit 114, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are confirmed and stopped. It is Further, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 , a stage image 61 , an execution number image 501 , and a remaining reach number image 503 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text "199GAME". In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text "101 left". Also, at this time, the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are connected via wiring (not shown).

When the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected, a radio wave error notification image 530 is displayed as shown in FIG. 118(2). At this time, a warning sound is output from the speaker 156 together with the voice of "Radio wave error". Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, an execution number image 501, and a reach remaining number image 503 are displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are in a state of non-connection, regardless of whether a radio wave error has occurred, the effect control unit 300 notifies the radio wave error. An image 530 is displayed, and a radio wave error warning sound is output from the speaker 156 .

(Processing example 2)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the effect control section 300 when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are disconnected when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on.
When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off, no image is displayed on the image display section 114, as shown in FIG. 119(1). More specifically, image display unit 114 is turned off. Also, at this time, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are in a state of non-connection.

Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, a return-in-progress image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the returning image 531 was displayed, a magnetic error notification image 532 is displayed as shown in FIG. 119(3). At this time, a warning sound is output from the speaker 156 along with the voice of "a magnet has been detected." Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, the number of execution times image 501, and the remaining number of times of reaching image 503 are displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are in a non-connected state, regardless of whether or not a magnetic error has occurred, the effect control unit 300 provides the magnetic error notification. An image 532 is displayed, and a magnetic error warning sound is output from the speaker 156 .

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of an event when the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B are disconnected while the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on.
As shown in FIG. 120(1), the effect control unit 300 stop-displays the previous special symbol, and in the image display unit 114, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are confirmed and stopped. shall be Further, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 , a stage image 61 , an execution number image 501 , and a remaining reach number image 503 . Also, the execution count image 501 shows the text "199GAME". In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text "101 left". Also, at this time, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are connected via the connector 200C (see FIG. 2).

Then, for example, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B may be in a state of non-connection due to a malfunction of the connector 200C or the like. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 120(2), the decoration pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, the execution number image 501, and the remaining number of arrivals image 503 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, no new image is displayed and no warning sound is output when the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are disconnected.

Incidentally, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 may be connected to the game control board 200B via a common connector (not shown). In this case, when a common connector failure occurs, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are both disconnected from the game control board 200B. In this case, both the radio wave error notification image 530 and the magnetic error notification image 532 may be displayed, and both the radio wave error warning sound and the magnetic error warning sound may be output from the speaker 156 . Further, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are both disconnected from the game control board 200B, one of the radio error notification image 530 and the magnetic error notification image 532 is displayed. and the other may not be displayed. In addition, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are both disconnected from the game control board 200B, one of the radio wave error warning sound and the magnetic error warning sound is output, The other may not be output. When describing without distinguishing between the radio error notification image 530 and the magnetic error notification image 532, they may simply be referred to as "error images". Further, when the warning sound for radio wave error and the warning sound for magnetic error are described without particular distinction, they may simply be referred to as "error warning sound". Then, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are both disconnected from the game control board 200B, while the error image is displayed, even if the error warning sound is not output. good. In addition, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are both disconnected from the game control board 200B, the error image is not displayed, even if an error warning sound is output. good. Further, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 may be set such that the error image is not displayed and the error warning sound is not output.

Further, in the processing example 2, it has been described that the error image is displayed and the error warning sound is output after the returning image 531 is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on and the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 is disconnected from the game control board 200B, an error image is displayed while the returning image 531 is being displayed. or an error warning sound may be output. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are not connected, the error image is displayed before the returning image 531 is displayed. A display or an error warning sound may be output. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are connected, the image 531 during recovery is displayed, while the pachinko game When the power of the machine 100 is turned on, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are not connected, the image 531 during recovery is not displayed, and an error image is displayed or an error warning is displayed. A sound output may be performed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are not connected, an error image is displayed and an error warning sound is output. The decorative pattern 41 does not have to be displayed when the player is present.

In addition, when the above-described special image (special image based on the number of executions of variation) such as the execution number image 501, the remaining number image 503 and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is displayed, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and When the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B become disconnected, an error image is displayed, and the special image may become invisible or invisible. Invisibility means that the error image is displayed overlapping the front side of the special image (the error image is displayed overlapping the layer above the layer where the special image is displayed among the plurality of layers in the image display unit 114). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the special image. Also, being invisible means that the special image is not displayed. Therefore, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B become disconnected, even before the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 90 (7)) is displayed, the special image may become invisible or invisible.

Also, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (see FIG. 90 (7)), or when the first fluctuation effect in the specific time saving game state is completed and there is no hold (see FIG. 93 (10)), the magnetic When the detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B become disconnected, an error warning sound may be output from the speaker 156. Therefore, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (see FIG. 90 (7)) and when the first fluctuation effect in the specific time saving game state is completed and there is no hold (see FIG. 93 (10)) Like , When the effect sound is not output, the sound (error warning sound) may be output without performing the variable effect.

Moreover, this embodiment demonstrated that the 4th hitting-right image 525 was displayed when the game ball won the 1st starting hole 121 in the specific time saving game state. Here, when the fourth right shot image 525 is displayed, the speaker 156 may output a voice saying “Please hit right”. Further, instead of displaying the fourth right-handed shot image 525, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed" may be output. The sound output instead of displaying the fourth right-handed image 525 may be a warning sound for winning the game ball in the first start hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In other words, the sound output when the game ball wins in the first start port in the specific time-saving game state is different from the sound output when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state. Sound is fine.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first start hole in the specific time-saving game state, the fourth right-handed image 525 is not displayed, and the sound prompting the game ball to be shot to the right side in the game area 111 is not output. may

Further, when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped, the stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 may be output from the speaker 156 . In other words, a sound effect accompanying the display of the decorative pattern 41 may be output from the speaker 156 . Here, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, and in the specific time reduction game state to the second start port 122 In any case where the game ball wins, a sound effect accompanying the display of the decorative pattern 41 may be output.

In addition, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state and when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. A sound effect associated with may be output. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the display of the decorative pattern 41 may not be output.

In addition, in the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the effect sound of the special production at the time of fluctuation may be output from the speaker 156 when the special production at the time of fluctuation is executed. Here, as the special production at the time of fluctuation, for example, pseudo-continuous production, reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, change production, zone production, reach fanning production, effect production, role production, sound production, button operation production etc. In addition, the special effect at the time of change may include a pre-determination effect. That is, the change-time special effect may include a change effect based on the result of prior determination, a chance effect, a zone effect, an effect effect, a sound effect, a character effect, a winning light effect, and the like. Then, even in the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the special performance may be output from the speaker 156 when the special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed. On the other hand, in the fluctuation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the special production at the time of fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156 .

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the pending number display 55 of the second start port 122 are displayed on the image display unit 114, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the image display unit 114 may display only one pending number display 55 . In this case, in the normal game state, the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 121 is displayed in the number of reservations display 55 . Further, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations corresponding to the second start port 122 is displayed in the number of reservations display 55 . That is, even if the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending number display 55 is not updated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, it is possible to execute a variation performance in which no special performance is executed at the time of variation. be. As the special production at the time of fluctuation, for example, each of the above-mentioned advance judgment production, pseudo-continuous production, reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, change production, zone production, reach fanning production, effect production, role production, sound production , and button operation effects. In addition, below, the fluctuation production|presentation which does not perform any special production|production at the time of a fluctuation|variation may be called specific fluctuation production|presentation. Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a loss, the specific variation performance can be executed. Then, when the specific variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state and the first start port 121 in the normal game state The execution time of the variable performance is different from the specific variable performance based on the winning of . More specifically, when the specific variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, than the specific variation effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, in the specific time saving game state The specific variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 is more likely to execute the variable performance having a longer execution time. Here, "when the specific variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the first The specific variation performance based on the winning to the starting port 121 is more likely to execute the variable performance with a long execution time. The specific variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is always executed with a longer execution time than the specific variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the gaming state. (100%) is also included.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is lost, the ratio of performing the specific variation production is the first ratio, and the specific time reduction When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the game state is a loss, the ratio of performing the specific variation effect is the second ratio. And the first percentage is different from the second percentage. More specifically, the second percentage is greater than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).
Furthermore, when a specific variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the specific variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being “1”, and the first The execution time of the variable effect is the same as the specific variable effect based on the number of reservations of the starting port 121 being "4".

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a first effect and a second effect as the pre-judgment effect based on winning. Here, the first effect is a pre-determined effect performed during execution of the variable effect based on winning. Also, the second effect is a pre-determination effect whose execution timing is different from that of the first effect. The second effect is, for example, a pre-judgment effect that is performed before the start of a variable effect based on winning, such as an effect issued at the time of winning. Also, the first effect and the second effect respectively have a first mode and a second mode. Here, in the first aspect, for example, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. mentioned. In addition, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are turned off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. And, in this embodiment, the ratio of performing the first effect of the first mode based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the first ratio, the first start port in the specific time-saving game state The rate at which the first effect of the first mode is performed based on the winning in 121 is the second rate. Then, the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the third ratio, and the first start port in the specific time saving game state The rate at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning in 121 is the fourth rate. And the 4th rate is larger than the 3rd rate. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Also, "the fourth rate is greater than the third rate" includes that the third rate is 0 (0%) and that the fourth rate is 1 (100%) .
In addition, the ratio of performing the second effect of the first mode based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is the fifth ratio, and the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state The ratio at which the second effect of the first mode is performed based on this is the sixth ratio. And the 6th rate is smaller than the 5th rate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio of performing the second effect of the second mode based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the seventh ratio, and the first start port in the specific time saving game state The rate at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning in 121 is the eighth rate. And the 8th ratio is larger than the 7th ratio. Note that "the sixth rate is smaller than the fifth rate" includes that the fifth rate is 1 (100%) and that the sixth rate is 0 (0%). . Also, "the eighth rate is greater than the seventh rate" includes that the seventh rate is 0 (0%) and that the eighth rate is 1 (100%) .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is lost, it is possible to execute the specific variation effect. Then, when the specific variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state and the first start port 121 in the normal game state The specific variable effect based on the winning of 2 is the same execution time of the variable effect from the first variation number of times (for example, 2nd time) to the second variation number of times (for example, 99th time).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is lost, the ratio of performing the specific variation production is the first ratio, and the specific When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the time saving game state is a loss, the ratio of performing the specific variation performance is the second ratio. And the first percentage and the second percentage are the same

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a first effect and a second effect as the pre-determined effect based on winning. Here, the first effect is a pre-determined effect performed during execution of the variable effect based on winning. Also, the second effect is a pre-determined effect whose execution timing is different from that of the first effect. The second effect is, for example, a pre-judgment effect that is performed before the start of a variable effect based on winning, such as an effect issued at the time of winning. Also, the first effect and the second effect respectively have a first mode and a second mode. Here, in the first aspect, for example, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. mentioned. In addition, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are turned off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. And, in this embodiment, the ratio of performing the first effect of the first mode based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is the first ratio, the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the first mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the second rate. The first ratio and the second ratio are the same. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. And the 3rd rate and the 4th rate are the same. Note that "the first rate and the second rate are the same" includes that the first rate and the second rate are 0 (0%). In addition, "the third rate and the fourth rate are the same" includes that the third rate and the fourth rate are 1 (100%).
In addition, the ratio of performing the second effect of the first mode based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time saving game state is the fifth rate, and the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the sixth ratio. And the 5th rate and the 6th rate are the same. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is the seventh ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. And the 7th rate and the 8th rate are the same. Note that "the fifth rate is the same as the sixth rate" includes that the fifth rate and the sixth rate are 0 (0%). Further, "the seventh rate and the eighth rate are the same" includes that the seventh rate and the eighth rate are 1 (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the specific variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the special time saving game state The execution time of the variable effect is different from the specific variable effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in . More specifically, when the specific variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state is the specific time saving game state. The specific variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in , is more likely to execute the variable effect with a longer execution time. Here, "when the specific variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state is the second in the specific time reduction game state. The specific variable performance based on the winning to the 1 start port 121 is more likely to execute the variable performance with a long execution time. The specific variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is longer than the specific variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It also includes the fact that it is always executed (100%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is lost, the ratio of performing the specific variation effect is the first ratio, and the specific When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the time saving game state is a loss, the ratio of performing the specific variation performance is the second ratio. And the first ratio and the second ratio are different. More specifically, the second percentage is greater than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a first effect and a second effect as the pre-judgment effect based on winning. Here, the first effect is a pre-determined effect performed during execution of the variable effect based on winning. Also, the second effect is a pre-determined effect whose execution timing is different from that of the first effect. The second effect is, for example, a pre-judgment effect that is performed before the start of a variable effect based on winning, such as an effect issued at the time of winning. Also, the first effect and the second effect respectively have a first mode and a second mode. Here, in the first aspect, for example, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. mentioned. In addition, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are turned off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. And, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the first effect of the first mode is performed based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the first rate, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the first mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the second rate. Then, the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. And the 4th rate is larger than the 3rd rate. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Also, "the fourth rate is greater than the third rate" includes that the third rate is 0 (0%) and that the fourth rate is 1 (100%) .
In addition, the ratio of performing the second effect of the first mode based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the fifth rate, and the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the sixth ratio. The sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the seventh ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. And the 8th ratio is larger than the 7th ratio. Note that "the sixth rate is smaller than the fifth rate" includes that the fifth rate is 1 (100%) and that the sixth rate is 0 (0%). . Also, "the eighth rate is greater than the seventh rate" includes that the seventh rate is 0 (0%) and that the eighth rate is 1 (100%) .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the specific variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the specific time saving game state The execution time of the variable effect is different from the specific variable effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in . More specifically, when the specific variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state is in the specific time reduction game state. The specific variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in , is more likely to execute the variable effect with a longer execution time. Here, "When the specific variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state is the second in the specific time reduction game state. The specific variable performance based on the winning to the 1 start port 121 is more likely to execute the variable performance with a long execution time. The specific variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state has a longer execution time than the specific variation performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It also includes the fact that it is always executed (100%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is lost, the ratio of performing the specific variation production is the first ratio, and the specific When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the time saving game state is a loss, the ratio of performing the specific variation performance is the second ratio. And the first ratio and the second ratio are different. More specifically, the second percentage is greater than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a first effect and a second effect as the pre-determined effect based on winning. Here, the first effect is a pre-determined effect performed during execution of the variable effect based on winning. Also, the second effect is a pre-determined effect whose execution timing is different from that of the first effect. The second effect is, for example, a pre-determined effect performed before the start of a variable effect based on winning, such as an effect issued at the time of winning. Also, the first effect and the second effect respectively have a first mode and a second mode. Here, in the first aspect, for example, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. mentioned. In addition, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are turned off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. And, in the present embodiment, the ratio of performing the first effect of the first mode based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the first ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the first mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the second rate. Then, the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the first effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. And the 4th rate is larger than the 3rd rate. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Also, "the fourth rate is greater than the third rate" includes that the third rate is 0 (0%) and that the fourth rate is 1 (100%) .
In addition, the ratio of performing the second effect of the first mode based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the fifth rate, and the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the sixth ratio. The sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the seventh ratio, and the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state The rate at which the second effect of the second mode is performed based on the winning to the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. And the 8th ratio is larger than the 7th ratio. Note that "the sixth rate is smaller than the fifth rate" includes that the fifth rate is 1 (100%) and that the sixth rate is 0 (0%). . Also, "the eighth rate is greater than the seventh rate" includes that the seventh rate is 0 (0%) and that the eighth rate is 1 (100%) .

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the special pre-determination effect is easier to execute. You may do so. Examples of the special pre-judgment effects include pre-determination effects such as a change effect, a chance effect, a zone effect, an effect effect, a sound effect, a character effect, and a winning light emission effect.
In addition, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the special pre-determination effect is executed. You can make it easier.
In addition, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the special pre-determination effect is executed. You can make it easier.
In addition, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, the special pre-determination effect is executed. You can make it easier.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a plurality of times Although it has been described that the last chance effect is likely to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is the first of the multiple times, rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform chance eye production|presentation. That is, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times What is necessary is just to make it easy to perform chance eye production|presentation. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , the second chance presentation may be easily executed. Also, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the chance effect is executed as the synchronization effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, as the tuning effect, instead of the above-described chance eye effect, a size change effect of changing the display size of the decorative pattern 41 based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process may be performed multiple times. Then, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The size change effect may be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the normal game state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The size change effect may be easily executed.
Further, for example, as the tuning effect, instead of the above-described chance eye effect, a position change effect in which the display position of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114 changes based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process is performed multiple times. may be performed over Then, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. A position change effect may be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. position change effect may be easily executed.

Moreover, the production performed in the variable production is not limited to the above example.
For example, it is possible to carry out an expectation performance that suggests the expectation by the luminescent colors of the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157. When blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the luminescent colors, the expectations may be set higher in the later order. Also, the variable effect in which the luminescent color is rainbow may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. That is, the degree of expectation may be 100% for the variable effect in which the emission color is rainbow. Also, the expectation effect may be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the expectation effect includes a lighting effect at the time of prize winning.
Then, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more expected than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. can be easily executed. In addition, the fluctuation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the expectation before the start of the reach production than the fluctuation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more expected after the start of the reach production than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. In addition, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the emission color used in the expectation production rather than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. There may be many types of In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to be the movable accessory in the expectation production than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 may be used in a large number of light emitting means. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is expected to have a rainbow color than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform a degree production.
In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more likely to execute the expectation performance than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may do so. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more expected before the start of the reach production than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform a degree production. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more expected after the start of the reach production than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform a degree production. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many kinds of colors. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, in the expectation production, the movable role The number of light emitting means among the objects 115, the board lamps 116 and the frame lamps 157 may be large. In addition, the emission color of the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is rainbow color rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform an expectation performance.

In addition, "variable production based on winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to execute the expectation performance than the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state. '', ``The variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state before the start of the reach production Expectation degree production is easy to execute”, “Varying production based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is better than the variable production based on winning the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state , It is easy to execute the expectation degree effect after the start of the reach effect”, and “Rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state, the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state There are more types of luminous colors used in the expectation level production in the variable production based on “The first The number of light-emitting means used among the starter lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 is greater in the variable production based on the winning to the starter 121 in the expectation production. "Expectation that the emission color is rainbow color in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state The fact that the production is easy to execute includes that the expectation production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy", "Variation production based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state than the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is the start of reach production The expectation degree performance before is easy to execute”, “Varying performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state rather than the variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state It is easier to execute the expectation degree effect after the start of the reach effect”, and “the second start port in the special time saving game state than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state There are more types of luminescent colors used in the expectation performance in the variable performance based on winning 122,” and “the variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a special time-saving. The variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the game state is the number of light emitting means used among the starting port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 in the expectation level effect. There are many ", "The variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fact that the rainbow-colored expectation effect is likely to be executed is that the expectation effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. included.
In addition, the relationship between the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state with respect to the expectation performance , the relationship regarding the expectation performance based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, each relationship described above about the expectation performance may be a relationship regarding an expectation effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
Further, the expectation degree effect may be a effect performed by at least one of the starting lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157, or may be performed by all of them.

Also, the display means for displaying the effect image is not limited to the image display section 114 .
For example, display means smaller than the image display section 114 may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display section 114 to display the effect image. Further, a light guide plate, which is display means for displaying an effect image, may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display section 114 . Further, 3D image display means for displaying a 3D image may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display section 114 . The display means, the light guide plate, and the 3D image display means smaller than the image display section 114 are hereinafter referred to as sub-display means. In this case, a sub effect may be executed to display an expectation degree image suggesting the degree of expectation on the sub display means.
Then, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is sub-production than the variation production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is sub- You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more sub- You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. Also, as the sub effects, there may be a plurality of types of sub effects with different types of expectation level images. Then, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the type of sub-performance to be executed rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. may be many.
In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is easier to execute than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. may In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is sub-production before the start of the ready-to-win production rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. can be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is sub-production after the start of the ready-to-win production rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. can be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the type of sub-production to be executed May be many.

In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is easier to execute than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. '', ``The variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, before the start of the reach production The sub performance in is easy to be executed”, “Rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state However, the sub-effect after the start of the reach effect is likely to be executed.” There are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the variable performance based on winning. (0%) is also included.
In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is easier to execute the sub production than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state” That, "The variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more sub- The production is easy to execute, and the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more reach than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is easy to execute the sub-effect after the start of the effect”, and “the variation based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. There are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the production," because in any variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the sub-production is not executed (0%) is also included.
In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, each relationship described above for the sub-production , a sub effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. Also, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, The relation may be a sub-effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

Also, the effects that are performed multiple times are not limited to the above examples.
For example, the effect rendering may be performed multiple times. The color of the image in the effect image may be different in each of the multiple effect renderings. Also, the zone effects of different types may be performed a plurality of times. Also, the change effect of the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 may be performed multiple times. Also, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed a plurality of times. Also, the expectation level performance may be performed over a plurality of times. Also, the sub-effect may be performed multiple times. Also, the role object presentation may be performed multiple times. In each of the multiple performances of the role product, the target of the three movable role products 115 to be moved may be different. The above effect that is performed multiple times is referred to as multiple times effect. A plurality of performances may be performed in one variable performance, or may be performed over a plurality of variable performances.
Then, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Of these, predetermined times of effects may be easily executed. Also, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.
In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to execute the production multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. can be In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, among the multiple times in the multiple times production , may be made to be easily executed for a predetermined number of times. Also, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.

In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is performed multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "It is easy", "The variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The effect is likely to be executed a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times. In any case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is not executed multiple times (0%). is also included.
In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to be executed multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. ``The variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Of these, the “predetermined number of productions are likely to be executed” includes that the production is not executed multiple times (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. be
In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state were described above. Each relationship may be a relationship regarding the execution ratio of the multiple-time production based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, the execution ratio of the multiple times production may be a relationship regarding the execution ratio of the multiple-time production based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is used as an effect image in the effect production rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of colors available. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is used as an effect image in the effect production rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. There may be many kinds of colors.
In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, as an effect image in the effect production. "There are many types of colors used", "The variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. , There are many types of colors used as effect images in the effect production”, which includes that the effect production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, it has been described that the winning sound for notifying the winning is output, but it is not limited to this. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball has won the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, it has been described that the winning sound for notifying the winning is output, but it is not limited to this. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning sound may not be output.

Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated that the sound accompanying winning was not output even if the game ball won the 1st starting hole 121 in the specific time saving game state, it is not limited to this.
When the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound associated with the winning may be output. Then, the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state may be easier to output than the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, ``the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to output the sound accompanying the winning than the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state'' Even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the game state, it also includes not outputting the sound associated with the winning.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state does not output the sound effects of the various productions described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the effect sound of the various productions described above may be output. Then, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 is easier to output the effect sound of various performances than the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. can be In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the effect sound of various production is output. You can make it easier.
In addition, "in the specific time-saving game state, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more likely to output the effect sound of various productions than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121. '', ``The variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more effective than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. "Easy to output" also includes that the effect sound of various effects is not output (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "in the specific time-saving game state, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more likely to output the effect sound of various productions than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121. '', ``The variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more effective than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. The fact that it is easy to output is that in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, various productions are not performed (0%), so the sound effects of various productions are not output. It also includes

In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when winning the second starting port 122 than when winning the first starting port 121, the reserved image 52 of more color types is displayed. may In addition, when the first start port 121 is won in the normal game state than when the first start port 121 is won in the specific time-saving game state, more types of pending images 52 are displayed. You may do so. In addition, when winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, more color types of pending images 52 are displayed. You may do so.
In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, when winning the second start opening 122 than when winning the first start opening 121, the reserved image 52 of more color types is displayed." That, "When winning the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, more color types of pending images 52 are displayed. Both include that the pending image 52 is not displayed when the first start port 121 is won in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "when the second start port 122 is won in the special time-saving game state, more color types of pending images 52 are displayed than when the second start port 122 is won in the specific time-saving game state. It is also included that the pending image 52 is not displayed when the second start port 122 is won in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when winning the second starting port 122 than when winning the first starting port 121, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed. may In addition, when winning the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed. You may do so. In addition, when winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed. You may do so.
In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the second starting port 122 wins than when the first starting port 121 wins, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed." That, "When winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when winning the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed. Both include that the variable image 51 is not displayed when the first start port 121 is won in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "when the second start opening 122 is won in the special time saving game state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed than when the second start opening 122 is won in the specific time saving game state. It is also included that the variable image 51 is not displayed when the second start port 122 is won in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the specific time-saving game state, when winning the second starting port 122 than when winning the first starting port 121, multiple role productions in which different movable accessories 115 operate are executed. You may make it easy to do so. In addition, when winning the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, multiple role productions in which different movable accessories 115 operate can be easily executed. When winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, a plurality of role productions in which different movable accessories 115 operate You may make it easy to perform.

Also, in the performance of the role product, a plurality of motion patterns of the movable accessory 115 may be provided. Then, in the specific time-saving game state, there may be more movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory presentation when winning the second starting port 122 than when winning the first starting port 121. . In addition, when winning the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, there are more movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory production. good too. In addition, when winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state than when winning the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, there are more movement patterns of the movable role 115 in the role production. may

Also, in the variable effect, a special symbol may be displayed. The special symbols include, for example, the pseudo-continuous image 70 and SP symbols. The SP pattern is a pattern that suggests that the SP ready-to-win effect will be performed by being displayed. Then, in the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 is executed in which the special pattern is displayed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. You may make it easy to do so. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, there are more types of special symbols displayed in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. good too. In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a variable performance in which special symbols are displayed, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. can be easily executed. In addition, even if there are more types of special symbols to be displayed when winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on winning the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state good. In addition, the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the variation in which the special pattern is displayed, rather than the variation performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to perform production|presentation. In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the type of special symbol to be displayed. may be many.
Also, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more variable than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. The variable performance in which special symbols are displayed is "Easy to execute", "In the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, The special symbol displayed "There are many types of", "The variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more special than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. is displayed is easy to execute”, “Rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state There are more types of special symbols to be displayed." It also includes not (0%). In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state displays a special symbol. Fluctuation production is easy to execute”, “Variation production based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state is better than the fluctuation production based on winning the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state , There are many types of special symbols to be displayed.” In any of them, in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the variable performance in which the special symbols are displayed is not executed (0 %) is also included.

In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the reserved image 52 may be performed more easily when winning the second starting port 122 than when winning the first starting port 121. . The effect of moving the reserved image 52 is, for example, the effect of moving the second reserved image 52 to the display position of the first reserved image 52 . Further, the effect of moving the pending image 52 is, for example, the effect of moving the first pending image 52 to the display position of the variable image 51 . In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is the production in which the pending image 52 moves. You may make it easy to perform. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the production in which the pending image 52 moves, rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can be easily performed.
In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, when winning the second starting hole 122 than when winning the first starting hole 121, it is easier to perform the effect that the pending image 52 moves", " The variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the production that the pending image 52 moves. "Easy" also includes that if the first start opening 121 is won in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed. In addition, when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the performance of moving the pending image 52 is not performed, and when winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state , and the fact that the reserved image 52 is not displayed and therefore the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is not performed. In addition, "the holding image 52 moves in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fact that the production is easy to perform includes that the production of moving the pending image 52 is not performed when the second start port 122 is won in the specific time saving game state. In addition, when winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed, and when winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state , and the fact that the reserved image 52 is not displayed and therefore the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is not performed.

Further, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 65(1)) is displayed, an action effect may be performed in which the decorative pattern 41 moves. The effect in which the decorative pattern 41 moves is an effect in which the display area of the decorative pattern 41 changes, such as the character in the decorative pattern 41 moving. Further, the action effect may be performed before the variable effect is started and the high-speed variable display by the decorative pattern 41 is started. An action effect may be performed immediately before the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. In other words, an action effect may be performed when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. Further, the action presentation may include a plurality of types of action presentations each having different actions.
And, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variation performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. You may make it easy to perform a change production|presentation. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121, even if there are more types of operation production. good.
In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more variable production in which the operation production is performed than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. It may be made easy to execute. In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state has more types of operation production than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. may
In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can be easily executed. In addition, the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the type of operation production performed. May be many.

In addition, "In the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. The type of operation effect that is performed. "There are many", "Variation production based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on winning the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the action production is performed. ``Variable production based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to be executed than the variable production based on the winning in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. , There are many types of action effects to be performed”, including that no action effect is performed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The production is easy to execute, and the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fact that there are many types of action effects that are performed includes that no action effect is performed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Further, when the variable performance is started, a variable performance may be performed in which the three decorative symbols 41 are started at the same timing at which the high-speed variable display of the three decorative symbols 41 is started. In other words, a fluctuating effect may be performed in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily recognizable state to an invisible or difficult to recognizable state are aligned.
Then, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number. The variation production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number is the variation production in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easy-to-recognize state to the invisible or difficult-to-recognize state is aligned. You may make it easy to break. In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time reduction game state is performed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number, and the second start port 122 With the variable effect based on the number of reservations being a specific number, even if the execution ratio of the variable effect with the same display timing that the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state is the same good. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3" and "4".
In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is the specific number. The variable production based on the fact that the holding number of one starting port 121 is a specific number is performed in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be recognized state are aligned. You can make it easier. In addition, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the specific time reduction game state, and the first in the normal game state In the variable performance based on the number of pending starting ports 121 being a specific number, the execution ratio of the variable performance in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be recognized state is aligned is the same. may be In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3" and "4".
In addition, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time saving game state In the specific time saving game state The variation production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number is the variation production in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easy-to-recognize state to the invisible or difficult-to-recognize state is aligned. You may make it easy to break. In addition, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time saving game state and the second in the specific time saving game state In the variable effect based on the number of pending start ports 122 being a specific number, the execution ratio of the variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state is aligned may be the same. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3" and "4".

In addition, "If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the second start port rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number The variable performance based on the number of 122 reserved being a specific number is more likely to perform the variable performance in which the display timings of changing the three decorative patterns 41 from the easy-to-visible state to the invisible or difficult-to-visible state are aligned.” , "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number, and the second start port 122 In the variable performance based on the number of reservations being a specific number, the execution ratio of the variable performance in which the display timing of changing the three decorative patterns 41 from the easy-to-visible state to the invisible or difficult-to-visible state is aligned is the same.” , "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations in the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is the specific number, rather than the variable effect in the normal game state. In the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of one starting port 121 is a specific number, the variable production is performed in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be seen state are aligned. ``When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state, and the normal game state In the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number, the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state is aligned. Execution of the variable effect The fact that the ratio is the same means that if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is 3. It also includes the fact that the variable effect is not executed (0%) in which the display timings of one decorative pattern 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to be recognized state are aligned.
In addition, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time saving game state is more than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time saving game state In the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number, the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state is aligned. ``When the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state, and the specified In the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number in the time-saving game state, the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easy-to-recognize state to an invisible or difficult-to-view state. In the fact that the performance execution ratio is the same, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state. Then, it is also included that the variable effect is always executed (100%) in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be recognized state are aligned.

In addition, when the variable performance is started, the variable performance may be performed with the three decorative patterns 41 having different display timings when the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to visually recognize state. .
Then, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the first start port 121 rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number. The variable performance based on the holding number of is a specific number is made easier to perform the variable performance with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be visually recognized state. good too. In addition, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state In the specific time reduction game state The variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is different in the display timing from the state where the three decorative patterns 41 are easily visible to the invisible or difficult to be seen. You may make it easy to break. In addition, when the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the special time-saving gaming state is performed rather than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number, the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be visible state. You may make it easy to perform. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3" and "4".

In addition, "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number, the first start port A variable performance based on the number of 121 reserved being a specific number is more likely to perform a variable performance with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easy-to-visible state to an invisible or difficult-to-visible state.” , "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, in the specific time-saving game state, rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state The variation production based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is different in the display timing from the state where the three decorative patterns 41 are easily visible to the invisible or difficult to be seen. In any case, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 has three decorations. It is also included that a variable effect with different display timings in which the pattern 41 changes from an easily recognizable state to an unrecognizable or difficult to recognize state is always performed (100%).
In addition, "When the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the special time-saving game is performed rather than the variable production based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable performance based on the fact that the holding number of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the state is different in the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to be visually recognized state. is easy to perform", when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the special time-saving game state is performed, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 has three decorative symbols. It is also included that a variable effect is always performed (100%) with different display timings when 41 changes from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult state.

Also, a vibration effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates may be performed. The vibration effect may be performed when the effect button 161 is operated, or may be performed when the effect button 161 is not operated. Further, the vibration effect may include a plurality of types of vibration effects, each of which has a different mode of vibration.
Then, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the vibration production is performed in the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 rather than the fluctuation production based on the winning to the first starting port 121. You can make it easier. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if there are more types of vibration effects to be performed in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 good.
In addition, the vibration performance is made easier to perform in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state than in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. may In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state has more types of vibration production than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. may
In addition, the fluctuation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state is easier to perform the vibration production than the fluctuation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. can be In addition, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variation production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. May be many.

In addition, "in the specific time-saving game state, the fluctuation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more likely to perform the vibration production than the fluctuation production based on the winning of the first start port 121", ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, there are more types of vibration performances that are performed in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121'', ``Vibration performance is more likely to be performed in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state than in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. "There are more types of vibration productions to be performed in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state than in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.” In particular, in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the vibration production is not performed (0%).
In addition, "vibration production is more likely to be performed in the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the fluctuation production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ”, “The variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variation production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "There are many types" includes that no vibration effect is performed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, a big win suggestion effect may be performed to suggest that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. As the jackpot suggestion effect, for example, after the start of the ready-to-win effect, when the character object effect is being performed by operating the effect button 161 (see FIG. 72 (11)), the vibration effect is performed, and the board lamp 116 and the frame are displayed. A first effect in which the lamp 157 emits rainbow-colored light and a rainbow-colored image is displayed on the image display unit 114 is exemplified. In addition, as the jackpot suggestion effect, for example, a second effect performed at a timing different from the first effect can be mentioned. As the second effect, for example, a sound effect (see FIG. 71 (2)) in which a voice saying "Big win!" An effect suggesting that the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 shifts to a special time-saving game state is exemplified.

Then, in the present embodiment, the first production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. Different percentages. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, both the first production and the second production can be executed, while the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state In the variable performance based on , the execution of at least one of the first performance and the second performance may be restricted. The restricted effect may be the first effect, the second effect, or both.
In addition, the execution ratio of the first effect is smaller in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. may Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state has a smaller execution ratio of the second performance than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. may

Further, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the first effect may be different between the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122. - 特許庁Further, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the second effect may be different between the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122. - 特許庁
In addition, in the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, both the first performance and the second performance can be executed, while the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variable effect based on winning, execution of at least one of the first effect and the second effect may be restricted. The restricted effect may be the first effect, the second effect, or both.
In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the execution ratio of the first performance is smaller than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122, the variable performance based on the winning of the first starting port 121 good. Furthermore, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 is more than the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122, even if the execution ratio of the second performance is small. good.

In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state have different execution ratios of the first production. good too. In addition, the execution ratio of the second production is different between the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state and the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state. good too.
In addition, in the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, while both the first performance and the second performance can be executed, the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variable effect based on winning, execution of at least one of the first effect and the second effect may be restricted. The restricted effect may be the first effect, the second effect, or both.
In addition, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the execution ratio of the first production. It can be small. Furthermore, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the execution ratio of the second production. It can be small.

Also, "the execution ratio of the first effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state.” That, "The variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state. Small", "In the specific time saving game state, the execution ratio of the first effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122" That, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 has a smaller execution ratio of the first performance than the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122.” This includes that the first effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
Also, "the execution ratio of the second effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state.” That is, "the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the execution ratio of the second production is Small", "In the specific time saving game state, the execution ratio of the second effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122" That, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the second effect is smaller in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122.” This includes that the second effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, the execution ratio of the first production is different between the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state and the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state. ”, “The variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution of the first production The fact that the ratio is small also includes that the first effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, the execution ratio of the second effect is different between the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state. ``, ``The variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution of the second production The fact that the ratio is small also includes that the second effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number. It has been explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the specific number of the second starting port 122 being held. Here, "If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the second start Variable performance based on the fact that the number of reserved mouths 122 is a specific number makes it easier to execute a ready-to-win performance. In this case, it is also included that the ready-to-win effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, to the second start port 122 It has been explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning. Here, ``If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121. The fact that the variable performance based on the variable performance is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance is that the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss. (0%) is also included.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. It has been explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the specific number of the first starting ports 121 being held in the 1 mode. Here, "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, in the first mode, rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode The change effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number makes it easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. It also includes that the ready-to-win performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol based on the fact is a loss.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start in the first mode is performed rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning to the mouth 121.例文帳に追加Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is performed, the first start port 121 in the first mode is selected rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the second mode. The variation performance based on the winning is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance. When the variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the winning to the first start port 121 in the second mode is performed. In the variable production based on, the reach production is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number than the variable effect based on It has been explained that the ready-to-win performance is more likely to be executed in the variable performance based on the specific number of the second starting ports 122 being held in the special time-saving gaming state. Here, "when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the special time-saving game is performed rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the specific number of the second start port 122 in the state is more likely to execute the reach effect. It also includes that the ready-to-win effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol based on the number is lost.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variation effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state is the second in the special time reduction game state. It has been explained that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning to the 2 start port 122.例文帳に追加Here, "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second start port in the special time reduction game state is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state. The variable production based on winning a prize to 122 is easier to execute the ready-to-win production. In the variable production based on winning a prize, the ready-to-win production is not executed (0%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, the second start port 122 It was explained that the variable production based on winning a prize is more likely to execute the reach fanning production. Here, "When a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. The fact that the variable performance based on the variable performance is easier to execute the reach-inflaming performance is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is wrong. It also includes the fact that the production is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state is executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number than the variable effect based on , it has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is more likely to execute the reach fanning performance. Here, "when a variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second The variable performance based on the specific number of the start port 122 holding is easier to execute the reach-flavoring performance. When it is executed, it is also included that the reach fanning production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode, It has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more likely to execute the reach fanning performance. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the first mode rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the second mode In the second mode, the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number is more likely to execute the reach-flavor effect. It also includes that the ready-to-win fanning effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact is a loss.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first mode in the first mode is executed rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the winning to the starting port 121 is more likely to execute the ready-to-win performance. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is executed, the first starting port 121 The variable performance based on winning a prize is easier to execute the reach-flavoring performance. In the variable production based on winning a prize, the ready-to-win production is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number than the variable effect based on It has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more likely to execute the ready-to-win performance. Here, "when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the special time-saving game is performed rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the state is easier to execute the reach-flavor production. In the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol based on the specific number is a loss, the ready-to-win performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, rather than the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, the second in the special time reduction game state It has been explained that the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is more likely to execute the ready-to-win fanning performance. Here, "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second start port in the special time reduction game state rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The variable production based on winning a prize in 122 is easier to execute the reach-inflicting production. In the variable production based on the winning to 122, the ready-to-win production is not executed (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reserved second start ports 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. Here, "If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the second start The variable performance based on the number of pending mouths 122 being a specific number is more likely to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. In the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the number of pending is a specific number, the variation performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state facilitates the execution of the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the normal game state rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time reduction game state In the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number, the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned is more likely to be executed. In the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the reserved number of the 1 start port 121 is a specific number is lost, the variable performance that the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 is aligned is not executed (0%). be
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a specific number. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving game rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the state is easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. In the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the reserved number of the second starting port 122 is a specific number is a loss, the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned is always executed (100%). is also included.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number. In the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number, the variable performance with different display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from invisible or difficult to visible to easily visible is executed. explained that it is easy to Here, "If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the first start rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number A variable effect based on the number of reserved mouths 121 being a specific number is more likely to execute a variable effect with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from a state in which they are invisible or difficult to see to a state in which they are easily visible." In particular, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number is lost. It also includes the fact that a variable effect with different display timing from the state to the easily recognizable state is always executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number is the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 become invisible or difficult to see. It has been explained that different variable performances are likely to be executed. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific time reduction game is performed rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state The variable performance based on the fact that the holding number of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the state is different in the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visually-visible state to an easily-visible state. is easy to execute", three decorative patterns 41 are visible in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the specific number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is lost. It also includes the fact that a variable effect with different display timings from the impossibility or difficult-to-visualize state to the easy-to-visualize state is always executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state is a specific number than the variable production based on , In the specific time-saving game state, the variation production based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number is the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 become visible from an invisible or difficult to see state. has explained that different variation performances are likely to be executed. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the specific time reduction is performed rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time saving game state. The variation performance based on the specific number of the second starting ports 122 being held in the game state has a different display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-visible state to an easily-visible state. The reason why the production is easy to execute is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving game state is lost. It also includes not executing (0%) a variable effect with a different display timing from an invisible or difficult-to-visible state to an easily-visible state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, the second start port 122 It has been explained that the variable effect based on winning a prize is more likely to execute the special effect at the time of change. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time saving game state is executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number than the variable effect based on , it has been explained that the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the special performance at the time of fluctuation. Here, "When a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. The fluctuation production based on is easier to execute the special production at the time of fluctuation”, and “When the fluctuation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time reduction game state is executed, the first start port 121 is reserved. The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the second start port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the special effect at the time of change than the variable effect based on the number being a specific number. Also, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the variable special performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second in the normal game state. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the prize winning to the 1 start port 121 is more likely to execute the special effect at the time of change. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a specific number than the variable production based on It has been explained that the variable effect based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is more likely to execute the special effect at the time of change. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the first start port in the normal game state rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state Fluctuation production based on winning a prize to 121 is easier to execute special production at fluctuation”, “When the fluctuation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the first start in the specific time reduction game state A special effect at the time of fluctuation is executed in the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 in the normal game state, rather than the variable performance based on the specific number of the reserved number of the mouth 121. In any case, the special symbol lottery lottery result based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is a loss, and the variable special effect is not executed (0%). is also included.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, than the variation effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state, in the special time reduction game state It has been explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more likely to execute the special effect at the time of change. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number than the variable effect based on , It has been explained that the fluctuation performance is more likely to be executed in the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. Here, "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed, the second start in the special time-saving game state is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. The variable production based on the winning to the mouth 122 is easier to execute the special production at the time of fluctuation.” The variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number in the special time-saving game state is a special performance at the time of fluctuation rather than the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the starting port 122 being a specific number. is easy to be executed”, in any case, the special symbol lottery lottery result based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is lost. ) is also included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, the second start port 122 It has been explained that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on winning a prize. In addition, when the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, the second start port rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number It has been explained that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the specific number of 122 pending. Here, "When a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121. The variation effect based on is easier to execute the size change effect”, and “When the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state is executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 Size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the second start port 122 being a specific number than in the variable effect based on the specific number. In the fluctuation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state is lost, the size change performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start in the first mode is performed rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the winning to the mouth 121.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. It has been explained that the size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the specific number of holdings of the first start opening 121 in the 1 mode. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser is executed, the first starting port 121 The variation performance based on winning a prize is easier to execute the size change performance”, “When the variation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port 121 is reserved in the second mode. The size change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being the specific number in the first mode than the variable effect based on the number being the specific number. Both include that the size change effect is not executed (0%) in the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the second mode is a loss.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121, to the second start port 122 It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning. Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is a specific number. It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the specific number of the second start openings 122 being held. Here, ``If a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the winning to the second start port 122 is performed rather than the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121. The position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on "When the variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is specified. The position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the specific number of the holding number of the second start port 122 than the variable effect based on the number. In the variation performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the game state is a loss, the position change performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize winning to the starting port 121.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number. It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the specific number of the first starting ports 121 being held in the normal game state. Here, "when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port 121 The position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning prize, ``If the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. Position change performance is more likely to be executed in the variable performance based on the holding number of the first start port 121 being the specific number in the normal game state than in the variable performance based on the holding number being the specific number. Both include that the position change performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the prize winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is lost.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the variation effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state is the second in the special time reduction game state. It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is a specific number than the variable effect based on It has been explained that the position change performance is more likely to be executed in the variation performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. Here, "When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second start port in the special time reduction game state rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The position change effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the prize to 122, ``When the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state. Position change performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being the specific number in the special time-saving game state than the variation performance based on the number of reservations being the specific number. In both cases, the position change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is lost. .

Also, the position change effect is not limited to the example described above.
For example, the display position of the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness may change from the position shown in FIG. 68(20) to a different display position. In this case, the display position shown in FIG. 68(20) is called the first position. A display position further changed from the first position is referred to as a second position. The second position is, for example, one side of the image display section 114 and is a region different from the upper side. However, the second position may be any position as long as it is different from the first position. Then, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the first start port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state The variable performance based on winning may be made easier to execute the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. In addition, when the variation production that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state is the specific number. Even if the variation performance based on the number of reservations of one start port 121 being a specific number makes it easier to execute the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. good.
In addition, when the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, to the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state rather than the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time reduction game state The variable performance based on the winning of (1) may facilitate the execution of the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. In addition, when the variable effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, in the special time-saving game state, rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state The variation performance based on the number of reserved second start ports 122 being a specific number is made easier to execute the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. good too.
Here, "when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the first start port 121 The variable performance based on winning a prize is easier to execute the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. When the variable performance is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is the specific number in the normal game state rather than the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being the specific number in the specific time reduction game state. The variation effect based on this is easier to execute the position change effect that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. In the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning to the mouth 121 is a loss, the position change performance for changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is not executed (0%). is also included. In addition, "when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the second start port 122 The variable performance based on winning a prize is easier to execute the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position. When the variable effect is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time reduction game state is a specific number than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being a specific number in the specific time reduction game state. The position change effect that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on a certain thing. In the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning to the starting port 122 is a loss, the position change performance of changing the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is not executed (0%). is also included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is the first specific number. The variable performance based on the second specific number, which is smaller than the first specific number, has a longer execution time than the variable performance based on the fact that the variable performance is performed. , is the first ratio, and the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding number is the second specific number rather than the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding number being the first specific number It has been explained that the rate at which the variable effect with the longer execution time is performed is the second rate. And, in this case, it has been explained that the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the first rate is 0 (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed, in the specific time-saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is the first specific number. The variable performance based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being the second specific number than the variable performance based on something, the variable performance with a longer execution time is performed at the first rate. , In the normal game state, the variable performance based on the second specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121 is more than the variable performance based on the first specific number of the reserved number of the first start port 121. It has been explained that the rate at which the variable effect with the longer execution time is performed is the second rate. And, in this case, it has been explained that the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the first rate is 0 (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is the first specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable performance based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being the second specific number than the variable performance based on something, the variable performance with a longer execution time is performed at the first rate. , In the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding number is the second specific number rather than the variable performance based on the second start port 122 holding number being the first specific number It has been explained that the rate at which the variable effect with the longer execution time is performed is the second rate. And, in this case, it has been explained that the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the first rate is 0 (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number is more likely to perform the variable performance with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on. Here, "When the variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number. Rather, the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first start port 121 is more likely to perform a variable performance with a long execution time. When the result is a loss and the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, the number of suspensions of the first start port 121 is longer than the execution time of the variation performance based on the number of suspensions of the second start port 122 being a specific number. It also includes that the execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that is a specific number is always longer (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the variable effect that the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is based on the specific number. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the first starting port 121 in the second mode is easier to perform than the variable performance with a long execution time. Here, "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is a specific number than the variable effect based on Also, in the second mode, the variable performance based on the specific number of the first start ports 121 being held is more likely to perform the variable performance with a long execution time. When a variable performance is performed in which the hit is lost and the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the first start port 121 is performed in the second mode rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the first mode. The variable effect based on the number of pending is a specific number, the variable effect with a long execution time is always performed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a specific number. It was explained that the variable performance based on the specific number of holdings of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is more likely to perform the variable performance with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on. Here, "when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a specific number. The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state is more likely to perform the variable performance with a long execution time than the special symbol lottery. If the result is a loss and the variable effect that the reach effect is not executed is performed, the second in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable effect based on the specific number of the holding number of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state The variable performance based on the number of reservations of the 2 start ports 122 being a specific number also includes that the variable performance with a long execution time is always performed (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the specific time-saving game state and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is the first specific number. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variable effect based on the fact and the variable effect based on the second specific number smaller than the first specific number of the holding number of the first start port 121 is the first rate , the same variation in the variable effect based on the second starting port 122 holding number being the first specific number and the variable effect based on the second starting port 122 holding number being the second specific number It has been explained that the rate at which the pattern is selected is the second rate. And, in this case, it has been explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" also includes that the second rate is 0 (0%) and the first rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed, in the specific time-saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is the first specific number. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variable performance based on a certain thing and the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being the second specific number is the first percentage, and the normal game state , the same variation pattern in the variable effect based on the number of reservations at the first start port 121 being the first specific number and the variable effect based on the number of reservations at the first start port 121 being the second specific number. is selected is the second percentage. And, in this case, it has been explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" also includes that the second rate is 0 (0%) and the first rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 is the first specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variable performance based on a certain thing and the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being the second specific number is the first percentage, and the special time-saving game In the state, the same fluctuation in the variable performance based on the second starting port 122 holding number being the first specific number and the variable performance based on the second starting port 122 holding number being the second specific number It has been explained that the rate at which the pattern is selected is the second rate. And, in this case, it has been explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" also includes that the second rate is 0 (0%) and the first rate is 1 (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the holding number of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in is the first ratio. Also, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time out of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to 122 is the second ratio. Then, it was explained that the first percentage is larger than the second percentage. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" includes that the first rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the holding number of the first start port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the first start port 121 in is the first ratio. In addition, based on the fact that the reserved number of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the shortest variation time out of the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning is the second percentage. Then, it was explained that the first percentage is larger than the second percentage. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" includes that the first rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the holding number of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the specific time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in is the first ratio. In addition, based on the fact that the holding number of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, when the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is performed, the second starting port in the special time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time out of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning to 122 is the second ratio. Then, it was explained that the first percentage is larger than the second percentage. Here, "the first rate is greater than the second rate" includes that the first rate is 1 (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state is a specific number. The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a specific number. It has been explained that the percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second percentage, and the second percentage is higher than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect that the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 in the first mode is based on the specific number. The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance is the first percentage, and the third based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being a specific number in the second mode. It has been explained that the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second percentage, and the second percentage is higher than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a specific number. The percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on is the first percentage, and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a specific number. It has been explained that the percentage of the same variation pattern being selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second percentage, and the second percentage is higher than the first percentage. Here, "the second rate is greater than the first rate" includes that the second rate is 1 (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 is executed rather than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121. explained that it is easy. Here, "in the specific time-saving game state, the variation performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 is easier to execute than the variation performance based on the winning to the first start port 121". Also includes that the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%) when the game ball wins in the first start hole 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is easier to execute than the variation performance based on the winning of the first start port 121.” Also includes that the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%) because the pending image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the reservation image 52 It has been explained that the change production of is likely to be executed. Here, "When the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the change effect of the pending image 52 "is likely to be executed" includes that the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%) when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "When the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the normal game state, the change effect of the pending image 52 is better than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. "Easily executed" includes that even if the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed (0%) because the reserved image 52 is not displayed. be
Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the holding image It has been explained that the 52 change effects are likely to be executed. Here, "When the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the change in the pending image 52 is higher than when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. The fact that the effect is likely to be executed also includes that the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%) when the game ball wins the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. Also, "When the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state, the change effect of the pending image 52 is higher than when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. is likely to be executed", even if the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed (0%) because the reserved image 52 is not displayed. included.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 rather than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 is before the start of the ready-to-win production. It has been explained that the change production in is likely to be executed. Here, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is more than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121. The change production before the start of the ready-to-win production "is likely to be executed" includes that the change production of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) before the start of the ready-to-win production in the fluctuation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. . In addition, "In the specific time-saving game state, the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more variable than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121. The change production before the start of the reach production is "Easily executed" includes that the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) in the change effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Furthermore, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more variable than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. The change performance before the start of the reach performance is The fact that it is easy to execute is that the variable image 51 is not displayed in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, so the variable image 51 is not executed (0%). is also included.
In addition, in this embodiment, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state It has been explained that the change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed. Here, "The variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. The change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect is easily executed. In the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect. (0%) is also included. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more reach The change effect before the start of the effect is likely to be executed” includes that the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. be Furthermore, "The variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more reach Since the variable image 51 is not displayed in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the variable image 51 is changed. It also includes the fact that the production is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the case of . Here, "The variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , It is easy to execute the change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect. It also includes not (0%). In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is easy to execute the change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect, and the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) in the change effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. included. Furthermore, "The variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is easy to execute the change effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect. It also includes that the change effect is not executed (0%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 is more than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121. It has been explained that the final chance performance is likely to be executed. Here, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more likely to be the final one of the multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The fact that the chance performance is easy to execute means that the final chance performance of multiple times is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. included. Also, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more likely to be the final chance of the multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Possible to execute the eye effect" includes that no chance eye effect is executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a plurality of times I explained that it is easy to execute the chance eye production in the final round. Here, "the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is the final of the multiple times than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state The second chance effect is easy to execute. In the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the final chance effect is not executed out of multiple times (0%). is also included. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is the final round of the multiple The chance performance is likely to be executed” includes that no chance performance is executed (0%) in the variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the last chance effect is likely to be executed. Here, the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The final chance effect is easy to execute”, in the variable effect based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the final chance effect is not executed (0% ) is also included. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the final of the multiple times, rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fact that the first chance performance is likely to be executed also includes that no chance performance is executed (0%) in the variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second expected performance is more variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121. I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, "the second expected effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 121". In the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the gaming state, the second expected production is not executed (0%). In addition, ``the second expected effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121''. In the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the state, none of the zone production is executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the second expectation than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. I explained that the production is easy to execute. Here, the second expected performance is executed in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. It is also included that the second expected effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, the second expected performance is executed in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. "Easy" also includes that no zone production is executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second It has been explained that the expected performance is likely to be executed. Here, the second expected performance is more variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easily executed" includes that the second expected production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second expected performance is executed in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state rather than the variable performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is also included that any zone production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is the second role production rather than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121 explained that it is easy to implement Here, "In the specific time-saving game state, the second role production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy" includes that the second accessory production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "in the specific time-saving game state, the second role production is more likely to be executed in the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121. ” includes not executing any accessory production (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state is the second role than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state It was explained that the object production is easy to execute. Here, "the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. "Easily executed" includes that the second accessory production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the normal game state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time reduction game state. It is also included that no role product production is executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second It has been explained that the character production is easy to execute. Here, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the second role production than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. is likely to be executed" includes that the second accessory production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easily executed" includes that (0%) no role production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second color production is more variable production based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the fluctuation production based on the winning of the first start port 121. I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, "in the specific time-saving game state, the second color effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121. ” includes that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Also, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." In particular, it is also included that any effect production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second color I explained that the production is easy to execute. Here, "the second color production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. It is also included that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second color production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. "Easy" also includes that no effect production is executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second It has been explained that color rendition is easy to implement. Here, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easily executed" includes that the second color production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second color production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is also included that any effect production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 is more than the variation production based on the winning of the first start port 121. The second sound production is I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, "in the specific time-saving game state, the second sound production is more likely to be executed in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121. ” includes that the second sound production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Also, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second sound effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." In particular, in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, none of the sound production based on the preliminary determination result is executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state than the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state is the second sound I explained that the production is easy to execute. Here, the second sound production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. It is also included that the second sound production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, the second sound production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal game state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. "Easy" includes that (0%) none of the sound effects based on the preliminary determination result are executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variation production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second It has been explained that the sound production is easy to execute. Here, "the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the second sound production. It is also included that the second sound production is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second sound production is executed in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is also included that any sound production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (0%) in the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state.

Moreover, in this embodiment, when the game ball has won the first start hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, it has been explained that the effect sound of the change effect is not output. Here, "do not output the effect sound of the change effect when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state" means that the game ball is in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect because the change effect is not performed when winning a prize. In addition, ``do not output the effect sound of the change effect when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state'' means that the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, since the change image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed, the change effect is not performed, and accordingly, the effect sound of the change effect is not output.
Moreover, in this embodiment, when the game ball has won the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, it has been explained that the effect sound of the change effect is not output. Here, "Do not output the effect sound of the change effect when the game ball wins in the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state" means that the game ball enters the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. It also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect because the change effect is not performed when winning a prize. In addition, ``if a game ball wins in the second start port 122 in a specific time-saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output'' is that a game ball wins in the second start port 122 in a specific time-saving game state. In this case, since the change image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed, the change effect is not performed, and accordingly, the effect sound of the change effect is not output.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect of the chance production may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Here, "in the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the chance eye production is not output from the speaker 156" means that the first starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variable performance based on the winning in 121, it is included that the sound effect of the chance game performance is not output because the chance game performance is not executed.
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect of the chance eye production may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. Here, ``in the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the chance eye production is not output from the speaker 156'' means that the second starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variable performance based on the winning in 122, it is also included that the sound effects of the chance game performance are not output because the chance game performance is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 is more than the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122. explained that the execution rate is low. As each production, for example, SP reach production, SP SP reach production, pseudo-continuous production, change production, chance eye production, zone production, role production, effect production, sound production, lighting production at the time of winning, button operation production, expectation level Effect, sub-effect, multiple-time effect, effect of displaying a special pattern, effect of moving the reserved image 52, action effect, vibration effect, and the like can be mentioned. Here, even if it is a variable production based on winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, each production described above may be executed, but when the fourth right hitting image 525 is displayed or , and when the voice "Please hit right" is output, each of the above effects may not be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable production is performed based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the variation performance based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. The execution ratio of a specific production has been explained with respect to the case. In addition, when the variation production is performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and when the variation production is performed based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state, specific I explained the execution ratio of the production. In addition, the case where the variable production is performed based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state and the case where the variation production based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state is specified I explained the execution ratio of the production of. Specific production includes, for example, change production, chance eye production, zone production, character production, effect production, sound production, winning lighting production, button operation production, expectation level production, sub production, multiple times production, special pattern , an effect that the pending image 52 moves, an action effect, a vibration effect, and the like. Here, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution ratio of the specific effect before the start of the ready-to-win effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution ratio of the specific effect after the start of the ready-to-win effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution ratio of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution ratio of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Moreover, the execution ratio of the specific production|presentation mentioned above may be the execution ratio of the specific production|presentation when the variable production|presentation based on the number of reservations being a specific number is performed.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 is one specific production rather than the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 explained that the execution ratio of Here, in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable production based on the winning of the second starting port 122, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is the type of one specific production that is performed. You can make it less.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is one specific rather than the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. explained that the execution ratio of the production of Here, rather than the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal game state, the variable production based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state is one specific production to be performed The number of types may be reduced.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state is more than the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the special time saving game state. I explained that the execution ratio of a specific production is small. Here, the variable production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is one specific production to be performed rather than the variable production based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. may be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the effect sound of the special production at the time of fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156 in the fluctuation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Here, "in the variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not output from the speaker 156", the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variation performance based on the winning to the mouth 121, the effect sound of the special performance at the time of variation is not output because the special performance at the time of variation is not executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the effect sound of the special production at fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156 in the fluctuation production based on the winning to the second start port 122 in the specific time saving game state. Here, "in the variable performance based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not output from the speaker 156", the second start in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variation performance based on the winning to the mouth 122, it is also included that the effect sound of the special performance at the time of variation is not output because the special performance at the time of variation is not executed.

Further, the operating means used in this embodiment is not limited to the effect button 161, the effect key 162, and the like.
For example, a production lever may be used as the operation means. The performance lever is an operating means that can be pulled forward by the player. This effect lever may be provided integrally with the effect button 161, for example. For example, the production button 161 may protrude upward so that the projecting portion becomes a production lever, which can be operated by the player. Then, instead of displaying the button operation image 69 described above, a lever operation image prompting the operation of the effect lever may be displayed as the lever operation effect. Moreover, when the lever operation image is displayed, the production lever may be operated by extending the production button 161 upward. Then, when the production lever is operated while the lever operation image is displayed, the production performed by operating the production button 161 during the button operation production is executed as the lever operation production. good too. In other words, in the lever operation effect, the effective period of the operation of the effect lever is determined as the display period of the lever operation image. Hereinafter, the button operation effect and the lever operation effect may be referred to as operation means operation effect.

Also, the effect performed when the operation means is operated during the operation means operation effect is not limited to the above example. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (11), FIG. 83 (16), etc., when the operation means is operated during the operation means operation effect and the character effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 performs the effect A vibration presentation may be executed to vibrate the button 161 . The vibration effect executed in accordance with the operation of the operating means may be hereinafter referred to as an operation vibration effect.

Also, the vibration effect is not limited to the effect performed when the operating means is operated.
For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (13), FIG. 76 (11), etc., even if the vibration effect is executed while the role object effect is being executed as the preliminary determination effect without the operating means being operated. good. Vibration effects that are executed without operating means operation effects are hereinafter sometimes referred to as non-operation vibration effects.

Then, in the present embodiment, the variation performance in which the non-operation vibration performance is performed is performed rather than the variation performance in which the suggestion performance is performed, which is the performance in which the vibration performance is not performed and which suggests that the jackpot game may be executed. , the jackpot game may be executed more easily. The suggestive effect includes, for example, an effect effect, a sound effect, etc. as a preliminary determination effect as shown in FIG. 67 (15). In addition, the variation performance in which the non-operating vibration performance is performed in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance is more likely to execute the jackpot game than the variation performance in which the suggestive performance is performed in the predetermined period after the start of the variation performance. You can make it easier. The predetermined period after the start of the variable performance is, for example, the period from the start of the variable performance to the start of the ready-to-win performance, or the first decorative pattern 41 (the left decorative pattern 41) after the start of the variable performance. and the period until the temporary suspension.
That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute the suggestive effect and the vibration effect during execution of the variable effect, and the vibration effect includes the operation vibration effect and the non-operation vibration effect, and the variable effect is started. In the later predetermined period, the expectation that the big winning game will be executed is higher when the non-operation vibration effect is executed than when the suggestive effect is executed.
In addition, the first mode such as the normal game state is made easier to execute the non-operation vibration performance in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance than the second mode such as the special time-saving game state and the specific time-saving game state. may In this case, even in the first mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the non-operation vibration effect with a high degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game will be executed.
Further, the second mode may have a higher degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed when the non-operation vibration effect is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect than in the first mode.
Further, in a predetermined period after the start of the variable production, the expectation of the execution of the big winning game may be higher when the non-operation vibration production is executed than when the operation vibration production is executed. Further, in a predetermined period after the start of the variable production, the expectation of the execution of the big winning game may be higher when the operation vibration effect is executed than when the non-operation vibration effect is executed.

Further, when the vibration effect is executed while operating the effect lever, the vibration of the effect button 161 generated in the vibration effect may be transmitted to the player via the effect lever. On the other hand, even if the vibration effect is executed while operating the effect key 162, the vibration of the effect button 161 generated in the vibration effect may not be transmitted to the player via the effect key 162. . In addition, the production button 161 generated in the vibration production is more likely to be generated when the production lever is operated than when the production key 162 is operated. may be strongly transmitted to the player through the operation target.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effective period of operation of the effect button 161 includes the first effective period and the second effective period. The first valid period is a period during which specific images such as the menu display image 504 and the customer waiting image 505 are displayed. Also, the second effective period is a period during which the operation means operation image is displayed. The operation means operation image includes, for example, a button operation image 69, a lever operation image, and the like. Then, the vibration performance may be executed more easily when the operating means is operated during the second valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first valid period. Furthermore, the maximum period of the first valid period may be longer than the maximum period of the second valid period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the third effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that it may be the same as the execution ratio of the third effect in the variable effect based on. Here, "the execution ratio of the third effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the variation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The same as the execution ratio of the third effect in the effect” means that the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode, and the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode In the variable production based on winning, it is also included that the third production is not executed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the first effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that it may be the same as the execution ratio of the first effect in the variable effect based on. Here, "the execution ratio of the first effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the variation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The same as the execution ratio of the first effect in the effect” means the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode, and the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode The variable production based on winning also includes the fact that the first production is not executed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the second effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that it may be the same as the execution ratio of the second effect in the variable effect based on. Here, "the execution ratio of the second effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the variation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode The same as the execution ratio of the second effect in the effect” means the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122 in the second mode, and the game ball to the first start port 121 in the second mode In the variable production based on winning, it is also included that the second production is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect image is displayed in the effect presentation. Here, the effect image includes the change image 62, the chance image 63, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the above effects performed when the number of reservations of the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is "1" The effect may be performed when the number of reservations is "2", "3", or "4". In addition, each of the above effects performed when the number of reservations for the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is "4" is the same as when the number of reservations for the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is "1 , '2', or '3'. That is, it is sufficient if the effect is performed when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In this case, the specified number may be any pending number.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the non-operation vibration effect is more likely to be executed in the predetermined period after the start of the variation effect in the first mode than in the second mode. Here, "in the first mode, the non-operation vibration effect is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect than in the second mode." It also includes that the non-operation vibration effect is not executed (0%) for a predetermined period of time.
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period. . Here, ``vibration effects are more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first valid period.'' It also includes the fact that the vibration effect is not executed (0%) when the operation means is operated during the valid period.

Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the phenomenon in the case of performing the fluctuation|variation production|presentation based on the prize-winning to the 1st starting hole 121 in specific time-saving gaming state, it is not limited to this. Each event described above in the case where the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state It may be an event. That is, for the event when the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is performed, the "specific time-saving gaming state" may be replaced with the "special time-saving gaming state". Moreover, you may read "special time-saving gaming state" as "special time-saving gaming state" about the event in case the fluctuation|variation production|presentation based on the prize-winning to the 2nd start mouth 122 in special time-saving gaming state is performed. Moreover, in these cases, you may read "specific time saving remaining frequency image 524" as "special time saving remaining frequency image 79." To give an example, the effect control unit 300 does not display the information display when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, even if the display mode of the special time-saving remaining number image 79 is updated. good. Therefore, the "second mode" described above in the present embodiment includes not only the specific time-saving game state but also the special time-saving game state. Moreover, the special image 79 of the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours is also contained in the special image based on the frequency|count of execution of a variation|variation.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a low-probability state with a low winning probability and a high-probability state with a higher winning probability than the low-probability state as the game state based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery, a specific time-saving gaming state The events described above for may be taken as events for high-probability states. Moreover, you may regard the event mentioned above about a special time saving gaming state as an event about a high probability state. Then, the events described above for the normal game state may be regarded as events for the low-probability state. In this case, the low probability state is taken as the first mode. Also, the high-probability state can be regarded as a second mode that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode. Also, the high probability state can be regarded as a special mode controlled via a jackpot game.
In addition, the events described above for the special time-saving gaming state and the events described above for the specific time-saving gaming state are the high-probability state and time-saving state, and the high-probability state and no time-saving state. It may be regarded as a low probability time saving non-gaming state and a low probability time saving game state which is a low probability state and a time saving state. Then, the event described above for the normal gaming state may be regarded as an event for the low probability time-saving no-game state, which is a low-probability state and no time-saving state. In this case, the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state is regarded as the first mode. In addition, the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving no-game state, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state are regarded as a second mode more advantageous to the player than the first mode. In addition, the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving no-game state, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state can also be regarded as a special mode controlled via a jackpot game.
Also, the event described above for the special time-saving gaming state, the event described above for the specific time-saving gaming state may be regarded as a high probability time-saving gaming state and a high probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the phenomenon described above for the normal gaming state may be regarded as an event for the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In this case, the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state are regarded as the first mode. In addition, the high probability time-saving gaming state and the high probability time-saving non-gaming state are regarded as a second mode more advantageous to the player than the first mode.
Moreover, each production|presentation demonstrated in specific time-saving gaming state and special time-saving gaming state is also caught as an production|presentation when the 1st right hitting image 75 is displayed. Moreover, each production|presentation demonstrated in specific time-saving game state and special time-saving game state can also be regarded as production|presentation when the decorative design 41 with low decorativeness is displayed at the time of a fluctuation start.

Also, even if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss (that is, even if the random value for the special symbol lottery obtained when winning the starting port is a value indicating a loss), the special symbol acquired at the time of winning When the random number for the lottery (random number for the jackpot pattern) is a predetermined value, it may be shifted to a time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. This time-saving gaming state is hereinafter sometimes referred to as a special time-saving gaming state. In this case, after displaying three predetermined decorative symbols 41, the game may be shifted to a special time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times. The predetermined three decorative patterns 41 may be decorative patterns 41 which are not displayed when a big hit is determined or when the big win is not determined and the normal game state is not shifted to the time-saving game state. In other words, the three predetermined decorative patterns 41 may be decorative patterns 41 that are displayed only when the normal game state is shifted to the time-saving game state when it is not determined as a big hit.
And, each event described in the specific time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state may be regarded as each event in the case of the special time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the case of shifting to the specific time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, the number of fluctuations required to be controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state may be variable or fixed. . For example, when the required number of fluctuations is variable, when the specific time-saving gaming state is given when the number of fluctuations in the special design becomes the first number, and the number of fluctuations in the special design becomes the second number There may be a time when a specific time-saving gaming state is given. In this case, the number of times of time saving given may be varied according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the number of times of time saving may be set larger as the number of times of variation increases. In addition, in the case of shifting to a special time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot design random number value, the number of times of time saving provided by the acquired jackpot design random number value may differ. For example, when the acquired jackpot pattern random number value is the first value, the first number of time reductions is given, and when the acquired jackpot pattern random number value is the second value, the second time reduction number is given. may be In addition, the number of times of reduced working hours to be provided may be different between the case of shifting to the specific reduced working hours game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols and the case of shifting to the special reduced working hours gaming state based on the random number of jackpot symbols. For example, when shifting to a specific time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols, it is shifted to a time-saving gaming state of 50 times, and when making a transition to a special time-saving gaming state based on a jackpot symbol random number, it You may be made to shift to the time-saving game state of 30 times less than. Conversely, the number of times of shortening time may be increased in the case of shifting to the special time-saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random number value than in the case of shifting to the specific time-saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the big hit in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is given without going through the big hit during the time-saving gaming state that has been transferred, a new The time saving game state may continue for the number of time saving times given to. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, You may be made to shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of working hours may be added. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, 50 times newly given are added to the remaining 20 times, and the time saving game state of 70 times may be given. Also, during the time-saving game state that does not go through such a big win, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big win may not be given. In addition, in the constitution of shifting to the time-saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the big-hit pattern random number without going through the big win, the time-saving suggesting performance suggesting the shift to the time-saving game state may be performed. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, it may be configured that the time-saving suggesting effect is easily executed. Conversely, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, the time-saving suggesting effect may be configured to be difficult. Further, the time saving game state to be shifted from the normal game state when it is not determined to be a big hit may be a low probability time saving game state.

Various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, but it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various variable production examples and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such variable production examples and modifications to other productions, etc. even if there is no mention in this document. is. In addition, it is possible to combine various variation production examples and modifications, to replace some of them, and to combine the configurations of the above-described embodiment and each embodiment described later, even if there is no mention in this document. is.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, each constituent member will be given a new reference numeral. That is, in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment described later, the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction. , and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls paid out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later, and a game ball shooting operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the firing operation.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 121) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 122) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a production button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 122) is provided for driving 17, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The effect button 17 emits effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow colors). It is possible. In addition, by the driving force of the button driving motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, it is possible to move vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned below and the production position positioned above. A button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode, thereby making it possible to perform an effect operation. A button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 122) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 122) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 122), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 122) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of light emitting devices for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame illumination device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 122) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the inside of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. When the winning (entering) game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 122), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. Dispensed onto a plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 122), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 122), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) in which winning (entering a ball) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 122), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second start port 47 between the closed state and the open state, and a second start port open/close solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 122) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot determination) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 122), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between the closed state and the open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary pattern holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 122) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 122) prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 122).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The first special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random number (first special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random value (second special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big hit determination.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), run the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot judgment (first special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot determination (second special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. It should be noted that the maximum number of normal-pattern reservation memories is stored up to four, but it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when winning the jackpot judgment of the special symbol, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying the beating display, and the LED lights up during the big winning state (special game state) and the time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

The installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You can For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, a big win. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, lights out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). , each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning and light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are, for example, constituted by patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization with) the variable display of the symbols. That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a ready-to-win production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

Also, in the present embodiment, there are six types of ready-to-reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", "SPSP "7" reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect". be.

"Normal ready-to-win production" is a ready-to-reach state in which two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions while the background image before ready-to-reach is displayed, and the remaining one production pattern 70a changes in the central region. It is a reach effect that is performed with the

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) is a ready-to-win production in which the production is performed.

The "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect in which the effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that changes at a low speed in a state where all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (big win confirmed).

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first A first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying reserved icons, and a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special figure reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state, are displayed. A second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of first special figure reservations (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two Second, the second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a third display portion 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TI disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and the "subject icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first reserved number indicating the number of the current first special figure reserved number (U1) is displayed in the normal game state and the specific game state. For displaying the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation for displaying the second reservation number indicating the number of the current second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 122), the vertical movement is made between the standby position (origin position) positioned above and the production position positioned below. It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 122), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the production position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A performance control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 122) for outputting a game signal) is provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 122) is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays each having a decimal point DP arranged side by side. there is An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. FIG. 122 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing. It has an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games, thereby controlling controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls, and operates the payout device 100. Control, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. A payout motor 100 b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121 .

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of putting out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, button driving device 17b, board driving device 75, board lighting It has a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b in response to an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are Output).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Also, it controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141, Drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 are displayed. Various images are displayed by outputting to the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to an effect instruction command, etc., it performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined effect.

The frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub-CPU 130a). Based on various production data (including commands) that have been generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and the It also controls the driving of the driving source such as the motor and the solenoid of the board driving device 75 .

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from power supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and controls the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control). substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and "high probability state" as the state related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and "non-time-saving state" and " It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “non-time-saving state”
(2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “time-saving state”
(3) High-probability time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state) that is “high-probability state” and “time-saving state”

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state". In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45 or the second It refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the big win is set as low as about 1/300 in the judgment of the big win of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the 2 start hole 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state. It says the game state.

Specifically, there are 4 types of set values from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability state is about If the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is " 4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability state". Also, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "variable probability jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state which is set longer than the "time-saving state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 47 short when winning is won. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is " The game state is set shorter than the "non-time-saving state" and set longer than the "non-time-saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set to 127/128, for example. and is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 than in the "non-time saving state", the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode. As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are advantageous compared to the "non-time saving state" It is However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of occurrence is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is designed not to win a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win in the judgment of the big win. good too. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the low probability state and / or high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big win in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. FIG.

(jackpot judgment table)
Figure 123 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 123(b) is a big hit determination table for the second special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second start port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 123(a) or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 123(a), when the set value is "1" and in the normal game state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged as a big win is judged as "losing".

In addition, the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 The special figure determination information obtained based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reservation storage area or the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , Jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit Icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. The second special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit They are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 124(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 124(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 124(b), the special symbol determination table includes types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, random numbers for special symbol determination, determination results of the special symbols, and corresponding determination results. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot patterns for executing the first jackpot game, and the special patterns "02" and "05" are jackpot patterns for executing the second jackpot game. , the special symbol “03” is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the second jackpot game is finished, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 124(a) to 124(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that the types of the big hit special symbols and the types of the losing special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
Figure 125 (a) is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the non-time saving state, Figure 125 (b) is a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving state It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 125, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variation display, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination Random number, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure variation pattern determination, special figure variation pattern as determination result, and special symbol variation time And, the special figure variation pattern specification command indicating the special figure variation pattern is associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Based on the number of special figure reservations (U2) and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern is determined, and a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 130. It's like

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

"Normal variation", "shortened variation", "super shortened variation", and "long variation" are shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach production.

"SP ready-to-win" and "special SP ready-to-win" are super ready-to-win effects with a higher expectation for a big hit than normal ready-to-win, and the development effects are executed from the normal ready-to-win effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special ready-to-win production is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. . In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with a higher expectation of a big win than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used. It is designed to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

Also, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that determines a big hit, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

As the third feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While it becomes easier, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, the point is that the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting the left side rather than when hitting the right side in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the variation is not determined, when the second special symbol pending number increases to 1 to 3 in the time saving state, (long) shortening variation is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol in the case of hitting to the right than in the case of hitting to the left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

(Advance judgment table)
Figure 126 (a) is a pre-determination table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state , FIG. 126(b) is a pre-determination table for the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 126, and based on the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for determination of the special figure variation pattern, the special figure scheduled variation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (first special figure reservation number (U1) and special figure reservation number designation command indicating the second special figure reservation number (U2), general figure reservation number (G) Ordinary figure holding number designation command etc. shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time) and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value updating process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines the number of reserved special symbols (judgment of a big hit, etc.), controls the display of special symbols, controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controls the game state, and so on. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern normal electric control processing for performing normal pattern storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), normal pattern display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed. .

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (5 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls is updated by adding data indicating 5 winning balls. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input process, substantially the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input process shown in FIG. 130, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
130, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 45a has been input (a game ball has won the first start hole 45). When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot judgment, random number for special pattern judgment, random number for reach judgment, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure pending number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special figure Set the first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the 1st special figure reservation number specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the 1st special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure fluctuation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, this first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the first look-ahead specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 executes 1 or before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead specified command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first starting opening 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation storage, the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), 1st special symbol reservation number designation command, 1st pre-determination process, 1st prefetch designation command, respectively, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2nd start opening 47, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage, The second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second pre-determination process, the second look-ahead designation command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation storage (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the command at the start (special Design storage designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130 processing and processing to change the special figure special electric processing data to "1" etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special figure is stopped by the lapse of the variation time, the stop time (for example 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special figure stop command) is produced. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process for transmitting to the substrate 130, a process for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", or the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit based on the end of the final round game A jackpot game process (step S340) for performing a process for setting the game ending time and transmitting an ending designation command to the effect control board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. is executed. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350).

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Perform the shift processing of the data stored in the first storage unit ~ the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction A pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in the main RAM 110c is set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

Also, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the number of second special figure reservations is shifted to the second 1 special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted), but the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area in the order in which the game ball entered the start hole You may shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in order of winning), or give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (The first special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sends a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is in a waiting state to the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Main processing of production control section)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
Timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to display a voice For example, the output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number designation command or the general figure reservation number designation command is received, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c (grasp ) Perform processing to update the number of the first special figure reservation, the number of the second special figure reservation, the number of general figure reservations, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if it is received, the icon change as a prefetch system effect Processing related to production, continuous advance notice production, and lamp change production is performed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special figure special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command etc. is received, and if received, processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, the normal design designation command, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, the normal pattern stop designation command, the opening designation command for winning, and the ending designation command for winning, etc. are received. It determines whether or not the command is present, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when the command is received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is production mode A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), production mode D to E set in the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state), and time saving There is provided an effect mode F that is set in the game state (low-probability short-time game state). It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state at the time of ON is always the performance mode D, and the performance mode that is first set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of power ON. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in the production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + pattern effect images (decoration part) that decorate the background of the numbers and characters, Designs of numbers and characters are different between production modes. In the production modes D to G, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the production modes. Also, in the production modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each production mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 is performed.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 136) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the demo waiting time to be selected are associated with the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The fifth feature of the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the demonstration waiting time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As the sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 137, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). Execute processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. The details of the ramp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)

8 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Also, if the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the game state is normal, and the received prefetching designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47. In the case, it may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , to select the final icon display mode determination table (see FIG. 139) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 137) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 137, a plurality of Determine one change scenario from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed). It is

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generated notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generated notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, , the third generated notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generated notification sound is output.

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 139, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It seems to be

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 139, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the event of a big win, but it may be selected. .

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). There may be two types of change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or when the white icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in one of the modes. may Also, for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to provide three types.

(Change scenario decision table)
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance fluctuation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (it may be a ready-to-reach effect other than the normal reach effect) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the special figure variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 142) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determine one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the on-hold icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. When the time command (special figure pending number designation command, prefetch designation command) cannot be received normally, the scenario is not stored in the prefetch information storage area It is assumed that a command abnormality has occurred, and the process is moved to step E520-11.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 143) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, a plurality of the icons One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to power restoration or command abnormality. Select the corresponding icon change pattern determination table (Fig. 144) for The details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, referring to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormality, based on the variation pattern indicated by this special figure variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final display mode of the icon is also determined.

Sub CPU 130a determines in step E520-13 whether or not the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step E520-14, and if it is not a changing pattern (it is a non-changing pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the icon that is displayed changes, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In this way, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 141, when the power supply is restored or a command error (prefetching designation command is not received, etc.) occurs, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the icon change effect not being executed due to the restoration of the power source or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the icon change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 141, the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuation effect newly started after the power is restored (the special icon was changed to the special icon by the suspended icon change effect, but the normal icon is displayed by the power recovery). Even if the icon change effect is executed for the icon that has returned to the icon), the change scenario before the power restoration ( It is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the suspended memory (special figure The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory (special figure determination information) before the judgment information), and the icon change effect is performed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be executable.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the stage of change of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be possible to provide a period during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. FIG. 143(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display mode one step higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, and a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting the variation again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or more times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be possible to provide a period during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for use at abnormal times)
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for use in an abnormal state, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times, the change pattern indicated by the special figure change pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected , and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

Note that the icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed. Since it is the same as that explained in the change pattern determination table for icon, the explanation here is omitted.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the period during which continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is the period during which the continuous notice effect (prefetching action effect, the prefetch effect effect, the prefetch vibration effect, the prefetch zone effect) can be executed, the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if the continuous notice effect is not executable, , the process proceeds to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "predictive action effect", a special game is executed by executing an actuation effect (announcement effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be.

"Look-ahead effect production" is a special game by executing an effect production (advance production) for displaying an effect image of a predetermined color around the production pattern 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation production in one or more fluctuation productions. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that will be executed.

"Forecast vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (announcement effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

“Foreseeing zone effect” means continuously suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production to do.

The ``executable period of the continuous notice effect'' means that there is no precedent reservation in which the continuous notice effect is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

The sub CPU 130a selects the continuous announcement type determination table (see FIGS. 146 and 147) corresponding to the current effect mode in step E530-4, and refers to the continuous announcement type determination table in step E530-5. A notice type (whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect, the type of the continuous notice effect to be executed) is determined. Details of the continuous announcement type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the continuous announcement type for executing the continuous announcement effect. If the continuous announcement effect is not executed, step E53
When the processing is shifted to 0-16 and continuous announcement effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous announcement scenario determination table (see FIGS. 148 and 149) corresponding to the current effect mode is selected. Details of the continuous announcement scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead action rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead action effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10, and if the look-ahead action effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-9, and the prediction scenario of the look-ahead action effect is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead effect rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead effect rendering is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect rendering is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario for the look-ahead effect rendering is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the anticipatory vibration effect has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-reading vibration effect notice scenario is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-14 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead zone effect has been determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination processing is terminated. If the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-15 to determine the look-ahead zone effect. The announcement scenario is determined and set in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the current continuous announcement effect. End decision processing.

The advance notice scenario or non-advanced scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous notice effect execution processing of step E540 described above, and the processing for executing the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is executed. A process will be performed to prevent this.

Thus, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 operates (operates) more when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation performance) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 is easier to operate (operate) when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed than when the special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the continuous announcement type determination table is associated with the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous announcement type, and the selected continuous announcement type. , The continuous notice type includes "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous notice effect, "prefetching action effect", "prefetching effect effect", and "prefetching vibration effect" that executes one of a plurality of types of continuous notice effects. , ``read-ahead zone presentation'', and ``read-ahead effect presentation & look-ahead vibration presentation'' and ``read-ahead motion presentation & look-ahead zone presentation'' in which two kinds of a plurality of kinds of continuous announcement performances are executed are provided.

For example, if the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, 85% determines "non-execution", 5% determines "look-ahead effect effect", 4% decides "look-ahead action effect", 3% decides "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% decides "look-ahead zone effect", 1% decides "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect" be done.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 148 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 149 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram.

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. The prior fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice production in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The “weak notice” has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action by emitting light in blue, and a weak action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the blue effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the production button 17 blinks in white, and in the case of the look-ahead zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output. It is to be done.

The "strong notice" has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting red light, and a strong action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the red effect sound is output.In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the 17 strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), and a scenario during the change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, there is a point that the expectation of the jackpot will be high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. The point is that the continuous advance notice effects are likely to be executed (the execution ratio is high), that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is low when the continuous advance notice effects are executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect between the production modes A to C and the production modes D to G, for example, the continuous announcement production is executed more in the production mode B than in the production mode A. For example, the performance mode E may make it easier to execute the continuous announcement performance than the performance mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the effect modes D to G. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), the continuous notice production (here, the prefetch effect production, the prefetch operation production) is more likely to be executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As the fourth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Than, in the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As the fifth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Than, in the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SPSP reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetching result), continuous notice production (here, prefetching effect production, prefetching operation production, prefetching zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 146 to 149, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the full rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state) than the case, continuous notice production (here, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) in the case where all rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 146 to 149, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more Prefetching vibration production (vibration production not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 or the display of the operation promotion image) is likely to be executed (high execution ratio = different degree of expectation for big win). Therefore, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which the stay period is likely to be longer than in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), the player can easily experience the anticipatory vibration performance, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved. In addition, in production modes D to G (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to add rarity to the anticipatory vibration effects, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Note that the performance modes D to G may be easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance (execution rate may be higher) than the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the performance mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous performance than the performance mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance is increased between the performance modes A to C. It may be different, and if it is a specific game state, it is easier to execute the anticipation vibration effect in the effect mode D than in the effect mode E to G, so that the anticipation vibration is performed between the effect modes D to G. You may vary the execution ratio of production|presentation. By doing so, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the anticipatory vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 146 to 149, specific reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), in production modes D to G (specific game state), a specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed ( A look-ahead result) is more difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (execution rate is low). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As the ninth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. One of the points is that the look-ahead action effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As a tenth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect in the effect mode D to G (specific game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach effect, SP SP reach effect) is difficult to execute (performed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in production modes A to C (normal game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In production modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is performed than when the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in modes A to C (normal game state). When it is executed, the ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is less likely to be executed in the variable effect that is the target of the announcement of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. , In production modes A to C (normal game state), when the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) , SPSP ready-to-win effects) are likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. , In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), when the continuous notice effect over three times of the fluctuation effect is executed, the reach effect with high expectations for the big hit in the fluctuation effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. (Second movable member 74) can be used to execute the look-ahead action effect, but the look-ahead action effect can be performed in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). There is a difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot when executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74, which is not used in the final effect, is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73, which is used in the final effect, which will be described later. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a big win has occurred just because the look-ahead action effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74 in the strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 , the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 should be higher.

As the 17th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 projecting (projecting only in a decided effect, which will be described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the projecting state , the ratio of the normal state should be higher.

As the eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead action production (weak action of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) executed without displaying the operation promotion image is executed than when the operation prompting image is displayed. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), strong notice of the look-ahead action production (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and strong notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. When the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 150, the continuous announcement effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenarios of the continuous announcement effects (read-ahead motion effects, look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead vibration effects, look-ahead zone effects) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. At E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. FIG. hold number designation command, prefetch designation command) cannot be received normally, so that the scenario is not stored in the prefetch information storage area.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice pattern (type of continuous notice effect, weak notice, strong notice) to be executed in the current variable effect according to the notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect execution process ends.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the alternative notice effect as compensation for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the power restoration or the occurrence of the command abnormality. A determination table (see FIG. 151) is selected to determine an advance notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one alternative notice pattern is selected from among multiple alternative notice patterns based on the selection rate (%) of this variable effect pattern and each alternative notice pattern. decide. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative notice effect" is a effect to compensate for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the power supply restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and the image display device shows which of the multiple mini characters with different expectations for big wins. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by displaying .

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E540-8, and if the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative notice effect command corresponding to the alternative notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed.

According to the continuous notice effect execution processing shown in FIG. 150, when the effect scenario of the continuous notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power supply restoration or the occurrence of a command error (such as failure to fetch the look-ahead designation command), the process starts from now. It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without executing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with not executing the continuous announcement performance due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 150, when power recovery (power failure) occurs during execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is not restarted in the fluctuation effect started after the power recovery. In addition, it is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern. The effect mode in the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative notice patterns include a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice effect is executed, a pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, a pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and a mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set in which a mini-character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151 is that an alternative notice effect is executed in a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot rather than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One reason is that the pattern is easily determined. Therefore, the more likely the continuous announcement effect was executed before the power supply was restored or the command abnormality occurred, the more likely the alternative announcement effect was executed, thereby reducing the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect. The alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension is executed. Therefore, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable effect that is executed after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the big hit notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), which will be described later. Alternatively, the alternative notice performance may not be executed by increasing the execution probability of the big hit notice performance more than usual.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable to make it easier to execute the big hit announcement performance than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that is not set is executed. In this way, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Ramp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 152, the lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power recovery or the command at the time of winning that will be cleared (special figure hold number specification command, look-ahead specification command) cannot be received normally. transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. It is designed to perform the performance. Therefore, the synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the effect of the effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 152, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. or not to execute the alternative notice effect. Therefore, the rarity of the lamp change effect can be secured while the control burden is reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step E610-1, and selects the variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 154 and 155) corresponding to the current presentation mode in step E610-2. . The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
Figure 154 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C referred to for determining the variable effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and Fig. 155 shows the effect mode It is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes D~G (specific game state) referred to in order to determine the variable effect pattern in D~G.

As shown in Figures 154 and 155, the variable effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. , the effect configuration in each variable effect pattern is described.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
“Shortened variation” indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that the long fluctuation display is executed in which the reach state is not formed longer than the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a during the variable display of one special symbol and then changing again, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed after performing an effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. It shows that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed as a result of not being performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that after the effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being executed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 2” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is one set, and two sets of the effect are performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 3” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is set as one set, and three sets of the effect are performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
“N “7” ready-to-win” indicates that the above-described normal ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of “7”.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full-rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full-rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect is to be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Loss" means to temporarily stop by forming a losing roll (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial roll to be described later) by means of the effect pattern 70a which is composed of only numbers and does not include characters. is shown.
"c symbol loss" means that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a false display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern matching" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which does not include characters but only numbers.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (big win display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance (jackpot display mode) becomes a jackpot appearance that is advantageous to the player (from the even-numbered production pattern that usually becomes a jackpot to a definite variable jackpot). (whether or not it becomes an odd-numbered performance symbol, or whether or not it becomes a “7” performance symbol for executing the most advantageous jackpot game), then promotion success performance is performed as an advantageous jackpot outcome. , indicates that a re-lottery effect is executed such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
“Strong vibration for 1 second” indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (losing) and variable production patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach production or SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" 30% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", and 5% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 01 (normal jackpot) and the variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even number production pattern 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP ready-to-win production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even-numbered production pattern 70a is 6%, and odd-numbered production patterns other than "7". 4% of the ready-to-win production is performed in 70a, and 90% of the ready-to-win production is performed in the effect pattern 70a of "7".
In the case of a special pattern 03 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even production patterns 70a is 60%, "7 , the rate of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (losing) and variable effect patterns 26-27 (special SP ready-to-win effect), the ratio of the ready-to-win effect to the even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state) shown in FIG. The rate at which the reach effect is performed is 100%.
In the case of special patterns 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probability variation jackpot), 03 (probability variation jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), ratio of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 100%. It has become.

In the case of the special pattern 10 (losing) and the variable production pattern 36 (normal reach production), 38 to 42 (SP reach production, SP SP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even production pattern 70a is 60%. The proportion of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and variable production patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 70a is 100%. .

In the case of a special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach production), the ratio of reaching production with even production patterns 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of the special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 70a is 3%, and the odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of a special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation ready-to-win production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with an even-numbered production pattern 70a is 20%, and an odd-numbered production other than "7". The proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the pattern 70a is 30%, and the proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that when the SP ready-to-win production or SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, there is an eye-catching production suggesting that the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. The point is that it is executed and the display pattern 70a including the character is restored. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the production pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that, in the case of a big hit, there is a variable performance pattern in which a successful performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a successful determination after the symbols are aligned. The point is that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

154 and 155, the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that strongly vibrates is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

154 and 155, the fourth feature of the variable production pattern determination table is that when the production pattern 70a including the character is pattern-matched (c pattern-matched), the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. Production (jackpot confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, a reach production (normal reach The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 70a (the production pattern that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the production, SP ready-to-win production, and SPSP ready-to-win production. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7" results in a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is lower in the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that becomes the most advantageous probability variation jackpot by becoming a jackpot). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, a reach production (normal reach Reach production (normal reach production, SP One of the points is that the rate at which reach effects and SPSP reach effects are performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which kind of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, production modes D to G (specific game state) are most advantageous than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a variable probability big win, the ready-to-win performance (SPSP ready-to-win performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the most advantageous performance symbol to become the most advantageous variable probability big hit by becoming a big win). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. However, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the ready-to-win production is executed with the production pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

Also, if you temporarily stop with a losing result after a cut-in production or a decision failure production, it will be confirmed that you will lose, but after the cut-in production or decision failure production, it will be a big hit. may be executed.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 156, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game is executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A pre-reach notice determination table (FIG. 157) for determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect expected by the player is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue advance notice effect" is to generate an effective period during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit on the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time. It is a kind of big hit announcement production in which a speech image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the speech image is output from the audio output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialogue notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 158) for determining the dialogue notice pattern of the dialogue notice effect, and determines the dialogue notice pattern. Set a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of the steps (steps) is reached.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 159) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern. At 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 160) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect to determine the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and step E650-11. , a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 161) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, determines the development effect pattern. A development effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is shifted to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 162) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and step E650-18. , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-22.

The sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 163) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect in step E650-20 to determine the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-21, determines the determined effect pattern. A decision effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is shifted to step E650-23, and if it is not the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is shifted to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 164) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-24. , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect (a big hit). If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 165) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect to determine the confirmed effect pattern, and in step E650-27, determines the confirmed effect pattern. A fixed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer, and the current big hit notice performance determination processing is terminated. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a pre-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pre-reach announcement determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variation effect pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each announcement pattern, and a selected announcement pattern.

There are 3 types of advance notice patterns: "no notice" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, "serif notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game (percentage of execution of the vibration effect associated with the matching of the symbols described above) is no notice<serif notice effect<step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 157 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is low. When a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined, the before-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed than when the variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIG. Pre-announcement effects (both dialogue announcement effects capable of executing vibration effects with the effective period of the effect button 17 and step-up advance notice effects capable of executing vibration effects without the effective period of the effect button 17) are executed. It is difficult (execution rate is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the third feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIG. However, when the variable production pattern is the pattern for executing the normal ready-to-win production and the pattern for executing the SP ready-to-win production, the pre-ready-to-win announcement production is difficult to execute (the execution ratio is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of executing the vibration production accompanying the pattern matching described above, the ratio of executing the vibration production in the decided production described later, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, than when the step-up notice effect is executed, when the serif notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the vibration effect accompanying the matching of the above-mentioned patterns is executed, the success effect which will be described later) The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 158, the speech announcement pattern determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variation effect pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each speech announcement pattern, and a speech announcement pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each line notice pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is a production that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "Normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the field of dialogue production mode means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice. showing.
“Chance dialogue (black)” means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters, and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
"Reach dialogue (black)" indicates that the reach dialogue for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in black characters, and that the reach dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach dialogue (red)” indicates that the reach dialogue for which execution of the ready-to-win effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters and that the reach dialogue is output by voice.

“Heat speech (red)” indicates that a heat speech that has a high possibility of executing a big win game is displayed in red characters, and that heat speech is output by voice.
“Extremely hot speech (gold)” indicates that an intensely hot speech that has a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in gold characters, and that intensely hot speech is output by voice.
“Confirmed line (rainbow)” indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 will vibrate 1 from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the display of the dialogue (=when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). This indicates that the strong vibration effect of vibrating is executed.

The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue” < “chance dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “heat Dialogue (gold)” < “Confirmed dialogue (rainbow)”. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

As a first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158, when a speech with a high expectation of a big hit (heat speech or higher) is displayed, a vibration presentation of vibrating the presentation button 17 can be executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialogue forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158, the dialogue foretelling effect of intensely hot dialogue with a higher expectation for a big win than the heat dialogue is executed than when the dialogue foretelling effect of the heat dialogue is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect of the hot dialogue is executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a speech with a high expectation of a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is for a relatively short time. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several points. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech announcement effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, or the vibration time of the weak vibration effect may be longer than the strong vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the speech announcement performance is the same between the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to G (specific game state). However, the production modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher expectation for a big hit, and the production modes D to G (specific game state) may have a higher expectation for a big hit. good too. In this way, it is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to easily increase the player's expectation in the production modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Also, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, and the dialogue forewarning effect is executed. You can choose not to run it.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the dialogue forewarning effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue forewarning effect without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 159, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot in each step-up effect mode is “1→2”<“1→2→3”<“1→2→3→4”<“1→2→3→4→5”<“1→ 2→3→5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 can be vibrated to vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is displayed is relatively short. There is a point. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159, the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration There is only one type of preset time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As the fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the step-up notice effect with low expectations is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , weak vibration effects are easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that there is a high degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without an effective period (display of an operation promoting image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A to C (normal game state) are more effective than production modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect button 17 without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the vibration presentation is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 160, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestive effect, valid period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggesting effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is a production that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-continuous effect mode means that the central effect symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous, is not temporarily stopped, and the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the failure sound effect is produced. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive failure effect to be output is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central effect symbol 70a, which is a pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of a pseudo-continuation, is temporarily stopped, a success effect sound is output, the second movable member 74 is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo consecutive success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo symbol (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It indicates that a weak vibration presentation is executed for one second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the production button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that a vibration effect for vibrating the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is that the variation effect pattern has a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed has a relatively short time. The point is that Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on . Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160, the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (pseudo continuous success effect), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more likely than production modes A to C (normal game state). ) has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates the . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but it may not be in a protruding state.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect without generating the effective period. Often, the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous success effect may be only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or only 1 second of strong vibration effect. can be

In addition, the production modes A to C (normal game state) are simulated using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than production modes D to G (specific game state). The degree of expectation for a big hit when a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C is more likely than the effect mode A with the same effect device (effect button vibration Motor, second movable member 74, etc.) may be set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed is high, or the effect mode D ~ is higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), an action effect using the second movable member 74 is executed, but an action effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution ratio of the motion representation using the second movable member 74 higher than that of the motion representation using the first movable member 73 .

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 161, the development performance pattern determination table includes performance modes, jackpot determination results, variable performance pattern types, development performance types to be determined for development performance patterns, selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, Developed production patterns to be selected are associated with each other, and the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each developed production pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggesting effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestion production column indicates that the effective suggestion production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestion production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and then the valid period occurs.

"Valid period (long press 4 seconds)" indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode means that as a result of the development mode, an SP development pattern indicating development to the SP ready-to-win mode is derived and displayed, and at the same time, the SP development mode that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development production, an SPSP development pattern indicating development to the SPSP ready-to-win production is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development production that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full spin notification" means that as a result of the development production, a full spin development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest development to a full spin reach production, and a full spin development production that outputs a third development effect sound is executed. is shown.

The "weak action" in the column of the character action is a weak action production in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak action with a small movement width when various patterns are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period). is executed.
"Strong action" means that the second movable member 74 emits light in red when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the valid period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed. is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development patterns (= the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various symbols (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each action production is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration”<“strong vibration”.

As a first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect may be executed in which the effective period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is that the full rotation development effect with a higher expectation for big win than the SPSP development effect is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easily executed (execution rate is high), and the performance button 17 is more likely to be activated than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development performance is executed. When the vibration presentation is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. One of the points is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit and the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161, the same production device (production button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (SPSP development effect, etc.), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than production modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific game state) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) The degree of expectation for a big hit when a production (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be set to be higher, and production mode B or C may be higher than production mode A using the same production device (production button vibration motor , the second movable member 74, etc.) may be set to increase the expectation of the jackpot when the development performance using the second movable member 74 is executed, and the performance modes D to F are the same performance as the performance mode G. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased when a development effect using a device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 162, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern. As a reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each cut-in production pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column indicates that a cut-in image in a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a first cut-in effect sound is output. It indicates that
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 lasts for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image starts to be displayed (=when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect is executed in which strong vibration is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 162 is that when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated. The point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 162 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. There are some points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, although the effective period is generated and the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effects for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effects for 3 seconds may be used, or only weak vibration effects for 1 second or only strong vibration effects for 1 second may be used.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 163, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that when the fixed success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the decision effect (decision success effect), the action effect using the first movable member 73 is executed, but the action effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the action effect using the first movable member 73 higher than the action effect using the second movable member 74 .

(Re-lottery production pattern decision table)
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 164, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether it is scheduled to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect pattern to be selected. They are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggesting effect. Along with this, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. showing.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become an advantageous effect pattern for the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → Odd symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporary stop), and non-promoting sound effects are output.
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop), and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration production to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (when the effect button 17 It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than strong oscillation.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the pattern has been promoted to an advantageous performance pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 165, the final effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each final effect pattern, and the final effect pattern to be selected. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Determined sound" in the voice column indicates that a determined sound indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is output.
The "handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 15 emits light in rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). indicates that

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time when the confirmation sound is output. is shown.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 165 is that, when the fixed effect is executed, the vibrating effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is executed without generating the effective period. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 165 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165)
Here, as a first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialog announcement effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Compared to the case where the effect button 17 is not accompanied by the effective period of the step-up notice effect (1 second weak vibration), the expectation of the big hit (vibration effect accompanying the pattern matching (strong vibration 4 second) is executed, and the ratio of vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the decided production, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the dialogue notice effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 rather than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the step-up notice effect without the effective period of the effect button 17. second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of execution of the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, the vibration effect executed as the jackpot announcement effect has a relatively short first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue announcement effect, step-up effect) Vibration performance (1 second) during notice performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decision success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during a fixed effect, and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) and a variable effect with a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. points. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is performed after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. high percentage). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. In the variable production with production), the first vibration production (at the time of dialogue announcement production, at the time of step-up announcement production, at the time of simulated continuous production, at the time of development production, etc.) Effect (1 second)) is easy to execute (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. , Vibration effect (1 second) during simulated continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period ( SP/SPSP ready-to-reach production), the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) in the second production period than in the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. production), the third production period is longer than the first production period, the second vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of successful success production, at the time of fixed production, etc. Vibration production longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds→5 seconds)) is easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the effect button 17 is set to the normal state and the first vibration effect (1 second) is executed. is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the projecting state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is performed. The ratio of execution is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration production with the production button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, the vibration effect executed as the jackpot preview effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect). , Vibration effect (1 second) during pseudo continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, confirmed There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) longer than 1 second during performance, etc., and continuous performance (pseudo-continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the second vibration effect is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) points. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, the vibration performance executed as the jackpot announcement performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) longer than the first vibration performance (performance period). There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during cut-in effects, determined success effects, and confirmed effects, etc., during production modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach effect by the first type effect pattern (odd number pattern other than “7”) (The execution rate is high. ), it is difficult to execute the ready-to-win effect by the third type of effect pattern (the effect pattern of “7”) than the ready-to-win effect by the second type of effect pattern (the ratio of execution is low), and the second type of effect pattern The point is that the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) when the ready-to-win performance by the performance pattern of the third type is executed than when the ready-to-win performance by is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, in the jackpot fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the effective period (display of the operation promoting image) during the ready-to-win effect ( Vibration production without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during production after reach (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation production) than the number of times of execution ) is likely to be executed more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

As the eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect , SPSP ready-to-win production) is executed, the number of vibration productions (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed production) that does not accompany the effective period during the production after reach tends to increase. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. The number of executions of vibration effects (forecast vibration effects, step-up notice effects, fixed effects) that do not have an effective period during the pre-reach effect is likely to be greater than the number of times the pattern is aligned, final effect) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by means of a vibration effect that does not accompany an effective period, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution ratio is high) in the case where the post-ready notice performance (cut-in performance) with high expectation of big hit is executed (execution ratio is high), and the pre-ready notice performance. When is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 14th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, production modes D to G (specific game state) are better than production modes A to C (normal game state), notice production after reach , the expectation for the big hit increases when the vibration effect is executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A ~ C (normal game state) than the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), vibrating with the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) in the notice production after reach The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the performance is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

As a fifteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect, the vibration of the effect button 17 is greater than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. When the production is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher, and in the big hit variation production, regardless of whether or not the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production, the production after the reach (determined success production) Later period), the vibration production of the production button 17 (vibration production at the time of pattern matching and C pattern matching) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the game will be a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As a sixteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins. Vibration performance (one of vibration performance such as step-up notice performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) without effective period of performance button 17 (display of operation promotion image) executed during variable performance. is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the effective period, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, in the pre-reach production period in the jackpot variation production, the effect period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) accompanied by a vibration production (diaphragm announcement production) When the vibration effect at the time) is executed, and when the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) is executed (vibration effect at the time of the step-up notice effect), then ( The rate of execution of vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as successful performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) is executed during the performance period after reach) is different, and vibration performance without the effective period of the performance button 17 (Vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during the normal game state (production modes A to C) than during the specific game state (production modes D to G). is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance that does not accompany the effective period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that when the jackpot variation effect is executed, the type of jackpot effect pattern (even number pattern, "7" It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or not, execution timing, etc.) in the big hit notice effect depending on the odd number pattern other than the “7” pattern), but with the execution of the determined success effect and the confirmed effect When the vibration performance is executed by , the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern to be aligned (including C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a nineteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, after executing a vibration effect (decision success effect, etc.) with an effective period (display of an operation promoting image) in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effective period ( It is possible to execute vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by the display of the operation prompting image), and the vibration effects (decision effect, etc.) that accompany the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. While the timing to start vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by an effective period (display of operation prompting image). be done. Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, the same movable member (second It is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), but the specific effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the jackpot expectations are different when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 21st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a step effect that progresses to any of the stages (step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.), but in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state) If the step effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is the same stage (if it is a step-up notice effect, it is either the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, or the 5th step effect, if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times), the big hit expectation is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165, there are multiple Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and an operation effect (any of the development effect, the cut-in effect, and the fixed effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state), the degree of expectation for a big hit when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different, and production modes A to C (normal game state) ) and production modes D to G (specific game state), when the operation production is executed, the effective suggestion production is executed and the operation is promoted rather than the case where the operation promotion production is executed without the effective suggestion production being executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. There are cases where it is executed with an effective period and cases where it is executed without an effective period, but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (first image display device 70, second Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and an adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5 ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) process.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The overall CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). . Also, during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.) (until the timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode for suppressing power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70 and second image display device 71).

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a sets in the supervising RAM 141c a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). determine whether or not If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

In addition, effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspension display by the sub first suspension display 83 and the second sub suspension display 84, effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operation) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this processing ends, the processing moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial process number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 167, the origin return processing for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 167, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
Referring to FIG. 168, the origin return processing of lamp controller 150 will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control section 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the button driving motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 17 is pressed within a predetermined time. +1 update the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 168, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 168, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 168, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 168, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 170) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command at power ON and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information. do.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 171) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial action of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 169, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 169, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement and return to the origin. During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality. 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished, It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 170 is that the board accessories (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission modes of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is extinguished during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17, the vibration time of the vibration production executed during the fluctuation production Vibration effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during simulated continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Vibration effect during re-lottery effect, It is a different time from the vibration production at the time of confirmation production).

As a first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171, the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of turning on the power does not have the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As the fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171, the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

As the eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 175, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A still screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. The state is maintained, but the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 184 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 185 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 186 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process is completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, Sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a big hit effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 187 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed shot image MU is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (statically displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, Sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the during-return screen that is the same as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 186 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 184 to 187, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial action of various roles may be performed without performing the return action.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the power supply that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) displays the returning screen on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, the abnormality is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c and initialization of the main RAM 110c are performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holdings, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the board role can be performed after the player grasps the number of pending games (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial actions of various roles, and to reduce the processing load applied to the initial actions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, when a special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110, a winning sound is generated. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by a return motion or an initial motion during execution of a variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 has already returned to the various roles, and the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 has already returned to the various roles, and the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 188 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a and a second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 185 to 187 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 189 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 185 to 187 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

In FIGS. 188 and 189, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial action of various roles may be performed without performing the return action.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the production pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED , and the production button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various accessories from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various accessories start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing between the switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. The initial actions of various roles may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial actions of various roles may be started at the timing of switching to .

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 returns abnormally after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first pending icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first pending indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blinks in red to notify recovery failure. Therefore, compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable member has an abnormality.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17, which has no risk of colliding with the member 74, performs an initial action. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 returns. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Modified example of accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 191 . FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the role product initial process shown in FIG. 47, and the description thereof will be omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. can be reduced.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery) When a designated command) is received, the return action of various characters and the initial action are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the power-on command was transmitted later than usual (abnormality occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110). can be grasped.

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 192 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has passed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery error in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 195, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. When the power is turned on, after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is effected. When the substrate 130 receives the signal, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 196 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the performance button 17 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
In FIG. 200, on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static display state is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 201, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 201 and 202, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial action of various roles may be performed without performing the return action.

(Concrete example when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 203 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. FIG. 10 shows.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 201, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 204 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 205 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen of status is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial action process is started, and the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 206 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 191, and the variation effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial action process are completed (main control board 110 and effect control 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, Sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 is displayed. output a stop sound. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a jackpot effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, a big win display mode is displayed to indicate that a big win has been made, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red blinking) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 207 shows that, on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 191, the origin return process and the jackpot effect are being executed after the initial operation process is completed (main control board 110 and effect control 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while power is being supplied to the board 130. FIG.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the big win effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special pattern TZ ("777") is displayed. is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, Sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 206 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red blinking) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 204 to 207, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial action of various roles may be performed without performing the return action.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the power supply that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) displays the returning screen on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, the abnormality is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial actions of various roles, and to reduce the processing load applied to the initial actions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, for board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c and initialization of main RAM 110c are performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device ), the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even when the stop screen is displayed after the screen during recovery is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When the special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110 when the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance according to the command, winning It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the production control board 130 has already returned to the various roles, and the production control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the variable production after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return action of various roles and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the effect control board 130, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. becomes possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the production control board 130 has already returned to the various roles, and the production control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the variable production after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 208(a) will be described.
FIG. 208(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 208(b) will be described.
FIG. 208(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 208, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-insertion, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Moreover, according to the specific example shown in FIG. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 208, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

In addition, when the first starting opening detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, the special figure determination information is acquired as the start winning prize is generated and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is increased, thereby special symbols (variation display of production design 70a, variation display of special design) may be executed.

(Concrete example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 209, a specific example of operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), when shifting to the customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effective suggesting effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur is not executed. Effective period during customer waiting during which operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (Because the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable production is started, it is can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, in the lower right portion of the first image display device 70, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. FIG. Specifically, the first image (image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 17, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. and a third image suggesting that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (the left and right buttons are A light-colored image simulating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 209(b), the menu image MG is displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a without vibrating the effect button 17, and the menu image MG is displayed. is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, a "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.), A "pachi log" item is set to manage the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.), and while the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, the currently unselected item is displayed in a dark color. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without vibrating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG. 209(c). Also, the sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18, as shown in FIG. 209(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18.例文帳に追加Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guidance image AG is displayed again as shown in FIG. .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, the effect buttons 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, fixed effect, etc.) occurring during the variable effect Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect is provided to vibrate the effect button 17 (by vibrating the effect button 17). (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 that is transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the performance button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot game), various advance notice effects (lines) that occur during the variable effect It can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, , Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the big winning performance, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, regarding the valid period while waiting for a customer, an effective suggesting effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. It's like Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable production (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), the effective suggestive production (introduction production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, during the effective period of customer waiting that can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 (display period of the operation prompting image) that occurs during the variable effect The effective period of the production button 17 (operation When the effect button 17 is operated during the promotion image display), the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialog advance notice effects, etc.). There is a valid period accompanied by the display of an image) and a relatively long second valid period (valid period accompanied by the display of an operation promotion image related to a determined effect, etc.), but the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect When the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the effect button 17 is more likely to be operated than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period during customer waiting, which can occur over a longer period. It is easy to execute the vibration presentation to vibrate. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
210 to 212, a specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 211(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number and the non-animated increase display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special symbol reservation number, and the change display (decrease display) by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon concerned be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "0 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first suspended icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display (preparation operation) of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with the icon TI, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being shaken) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is one is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the incremented display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation is the shortest 1 frame Since it ends in a period of minutes (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decrease display of the pending number and change display of the pending icon) so as not to delay, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update) timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the decrease display of the reserved number by non-animation, and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the decrease display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), special figure pending While directing that the number changes, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has been reduced by the reserved number, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of pending special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the pending icon with non-animation, rather than the increasing display of the pending number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described using FIGS. 213 and 214. FIG. FIG. 213 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 214(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the increase display by non-animation of the first special reservation number and the increase display by animation of the first reservation icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 to start enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures is increased, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can see that the number of reserved special figures has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of pending special figures will change. While directing that, the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increased display of the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increased display of the pending icon (frame update), so special figure pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special figure pending has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special figure pending number has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. FIG. FIG. 215 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special pattern reservation number, the change display by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon, and the first reservation icon Decrease display by animation starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "2" to "1 ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number is started, but since the change display of the first reservation icon and the decrease display are being executed, the increase display of the first reservation icon and the icon The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when generated, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are finished. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TI, the first pending icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display portion 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special figures pending increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon and the decrease display of the pending icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, in order to start increasing the display of the pending number, the change display of the pending icon and the increase in the number of pending special figures even during the execution of the decreasing display can be made to recognize, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if the number of special pending icons increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon, and the decreasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increased display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound ( limit), and at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started. can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

In addition, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start increasing the display of the pending icon and outputting the generated notification sound at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the special figure pending number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of special pending items increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, just like during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 217 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 218(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Movement to the upper left and reduced display are started, and the effect design 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "75" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation presentation is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display and icon generation of the first pending icon at this timing The generated notification sound, which is the time notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not a jackpot is achieved) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. is temporarily stopped at a combination ("555") indicating a big hit (becomes in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, right variable display area returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of this specific effect ending (frame update), the number of pending numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (it was displayed in a reduced size At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special pending number, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special pending numbers increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure hold number increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending numbers increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), while executing the increasing display of the pending number, the execution of the increasing display of the pending icon is on standby (restricted) It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the pending number. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 219 to 221, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. Figure 219 is a timing chart showing that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, Figures 220 (a) ~ (f), and Figures 221 (g) ~ (i), Figure 219 (a) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increased display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs The generated notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the effect pattern 70a continues to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the effect symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG darkens, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the change display by the animation of the second reservation icon to the icon, the decrease by the animation of the second reservation icon The display, the non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon are initiated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display portion 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the second pending icon are ended.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display portion 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with becoming the icon TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display portion, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is performed. Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the central variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first special figure pending number is displayed. Since it starts, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of the first special figure pending (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first pending icon at the timing when the specific game state (last variable effect in) ends (frame update). , even if you miss the increase display of the first special figure pending number executed before that, you can recognize that the number of the first special figure pending number has increased, and enjoy the game. can be improved.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, while executing the increase display of the reservation number, the execution of the increase display of the reservation icon is waited (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 , or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special figures pending according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when look-ahead motion effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
222 and 223, an example of an effect when the look-ahead motion effect and the step-up notice effect are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the first image display device 70 is in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead action effect over three times of variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the figure) to be the announcement target of the look-ahead operation effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. After the (preparation operation) is completed, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first rendering of the look-ahead operation rendering is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 222(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second rendering of the look-ahead motion rendering is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. After that, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second rendering of the look-ahead motion rendering ends. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 223(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped-displayed with a losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead operation production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion effect sound. be done.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 223(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed, and the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Then, the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 223(j), the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 223(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is displayed. is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output when the game board decoration LED is played, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 223(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds later, the fifth step effect ends. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, after the number of reservations displayed in the special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation ) and before starting the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead operation production (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest degree of expectation. is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the fifth step production (1 seconds) are shorter. Therefore, the appearance of the fifth step presentation is not overwhelmed by the vibration presentation, and the presentation effect of the step-up notice presentation can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image ( The effect sound when displaying the opaque effect button image, the gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

222 and 223, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp changing effect are continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined manner (for confirming the big hit) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminescence color, and in a luminescence mode different from the luminescence mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform the effect light emission.

(Production example when anticipation vibration production and dialog announcement production are executed)
224 and 225, a description will be given of an effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 224(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance over the three fluctuation performances is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the drawing) to be notified of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. (Preparation operation) is completed and scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, then the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 224(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for advance notice of the anticipatory vibration effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Upon completion, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 225(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third production of the look-ahead vibration production is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for three seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. The strong notice of will continue. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW. A display sound effect is output and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period elapses, as shown in FIG. , a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. The lamp change production continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 225(l), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. After that, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed, an SP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed, and an SPSP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed. It will be executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, after the number of reservations displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a is the preparation operation is started) and before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation), the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the anticipatory vibration effect (Vibration of production button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

224 and 225, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is flashed white although the effective period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the look-ahead vibration production is the forewarning effect accompanied by the occurrence of the valid period It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, final effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the pre-reach forewarning effects (words forewarning effect, step-up forewarning effect) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the read-ahead vibration performance, which is difficult to judge visually, is being executed due to the pre-reach announcement performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the pseudo-continuous production is not executed until the look-ahead vibration production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect which is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the dialogue advance notice production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the dialog preview presentation without vibrating the appearance of the dialog preview presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, since the vibration production executed during the look-ahead vibration production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound when the production button image, gauge image) is displayed and the production sound (operation effect sound, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, since the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production) button images, gauge images), and effect sounds (operation effect sounds, dialogue voices, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

224 and 225, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the speech announcement effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, even during the vibration production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. there is Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform the effect light emission.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed before reach production)
With reference to FIG. 226, a description will be given of an effect example when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the ready-to-win effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 226(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle region, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur and the pseudo continuous success effect is started. More specifically, an inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the fanning production ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region, and a success effect sound is output, as shown in FIG. 226(b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light, and performs a weak action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production design 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period has passed, as shown in FIG. 226(d), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continued in the middle area, and a pseudo-flashing effect is executed to agitate whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. A display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. . In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 226(f), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong action time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the simulated continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and the normal ready-to-win performance is executed, after that, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is executed. It will be.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
With reference to FIG. 227, a description will be given of an effect example when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect. Note that FIGS. 227(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 226(a) to (c), so descriptions thereof are omitted here.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 227(c), as shown in FIG. 227(d), the effect symbols 70a of "5" are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 227(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to prompt whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle region. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed and effected. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 227(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

When one second has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 227(g), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 227(h), the production pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win production is executed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

226 and 227, it is possible to execute the vibration effect when executing the pseudo continuous effect accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

226 and 227, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive success effect is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success effect. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo consecutive success presentation without the vibrating presentation being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, since the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

226 and 227, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

226 and 227, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect, the type of effect symbol forming the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgrading from the type of production pattern that formed the reach state before execution (downgrading from reach with odd-numbered patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns, reach with "7" patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns or odd-numbered patterns other than "7" downgrade). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

226 and 227, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win), throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the production button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous production, and the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed. The vibration performance may be executed, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 228, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 228(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 228(b), when the SP development effect is started, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win effect, SP development pattern suggesting development to SP ready-to-win effect, pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of and a scrap symbol suggesting that the performance does not develop (is lost), are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 228(c), an effect is performed in which the SPSP developed symbols, SP developed symbols, pseudo symbols, and scrap symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 228(d), it is notified that the SP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. In addition, in the roulette effect, the type of special effect symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the variability pattern, so the special effect symbols that are variably displayed (final special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped and special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (expectation for a jackpot).

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The display is reduced in the corner and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Note that the icon is hidden with the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP ready-to-win production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 229, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 229(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 228(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, SP development pattern suggesting development to SP reach effect, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach. A roulette effect is performed in which a plurality of special effect patterns such as full-rotation patterns suggesting development to the effect are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 229(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development pattern, the SPSP development pattern, and the all-rotation pattern are variably displayed at high speed, and there is a possibility that the operation of the production button 17 will be effective. An effective suggestion production is started to suggest that. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at the specific position at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. It should be noted that the characters "long press" are displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is long pressed, the speed of the variable display of various developing patterns is slowed down step by step, and the time of the long push reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(e), the SPSP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. be done. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

228 and 229, depending on the type of the special effect symbols (the special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped at the end, the special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are variably displayed in the roulette effect , suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (degree of expectation for a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations for the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, there are cases where the effective suggestive production is executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with a high degree of expectation for a big win is heightened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without vibrating presentation superior to the appearance of the development presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

228 and 229, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image). image, gauge image, etc.) and a production sound (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

228 and 229, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production executed during the development production, but the production button 17 is kept in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color that is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration production. , but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, for example, white flashing, yellow flashing, etc.).

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated during the development performance and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but the vibration performance is not generated during the development performance. may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and a big hit is achieved)
230 and 231, a description will be given of an effect example in which the cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 13 and a big win is achieved.

First, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the effect pattern 70a of the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 230(d). Specifically, a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. An effect is performed as to whether the design 70a is stopped or the effect design 70a of "6" is stopped.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 230(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state in which three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed for four seconds. Along with the start of a strong vibration performance (big hit determination vibration performance) to vibrate, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since then, as shown in FIG. 231(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 231(h), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 231(i), promotion failure effect is started. Specifically, three of the "5" production patterns 70a that have been displayed in reduced size are aligned (symbols are aligned), and are moved to the front side of the screen to be enlarged and displayed, and a non-promoted sound effect is output. The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(j), the performance symbol 70a is in the normal size and temporarily stopped, and the promotion failure performance ends. After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 231(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is finished, as shown in FIG. If there are pending numbers, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 231(k) after FIG. 231(g) and the eye-catching effect is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the cut-in production, and in addition to the occurrence of the effective period, the expectation of the big win is high. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, since the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are temporarily stopped (symbol alignment), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big win confirmation vibration performance) is executed over a period longer than the performance, the player can be effectively notified of the big win, and the amusement of the game is improved. It is possible to

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped (C pattern alignment), strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation) vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so the display effect sound and the effective period when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) During operation of the production button 17, the production sound (operation effect sound, other effect sound, etc.) is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

230 and 231, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when the big win is achieved as a result of the execution of the SP ready-to-win production, the vibration production is executed during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a which becomes the big hit, Vibration presentation is not executed during this stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

230 and 231, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the emission color for confirming the big win), over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, while the effective period relating to the cut-in effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit effect light. Until elapses, part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be extinguished, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is actually stopped after the eye-catching production and the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character are executed. When the result of the ready-to-win performance results in a loss, an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the characters is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and in the case of a big win. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance during the cut-in performance and not to execute the vibration performance during the promotion success performance, Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big hit is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a with only numbers or when the big win is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a including characters, but the production pattern 70a with only numbers is executed. While the vibration performance is executed when the big win is temporarily stopped, the vibration performance may not be executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the numbers. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a and at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a including the character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the cut-in effect, the winning entrance lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon). It is designed to emit light in different colors), but it may be designed to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 232 and 233, an effect example 1 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 20 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 232(a), three production patterns 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left part of the screen, and the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 232(d), the determined success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a successful sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restart the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 232(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state where three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbol alignment), and a strong vibration production ( When the big hit confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After 4 seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 233(g), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 233(h), promotion success effect is started. Specifically, the three "7" production patterns 70a switched from the "5" production pattern 70a that was displayed in reduced size are moved to the front side of the screen and enlarged and displayed in a state in which three are aligned (symbols are aligned). , the promotion sound effect is output. In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds.

Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the strong vibration effect is completed after the effect pattern 70a is in a normal size and temporarily stopped, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit effect light (other than rainbow light emission). light emission mode) is resumed, and the production button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 233(j), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When one second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
234 and 235, an effect example 2 in the case where a big hit is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 16 will be described. Note that FIGS. 234(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 232(a) to (c), so descriptions thereof are omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 234(c) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. A temporary stop effect is performed at , and a big hit is notified by the effect pattern 70a, but the strong vibration effect is not performed at this point. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a successful sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restart the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 235(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 235(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of the determined effect, or when the effective period passes and the determined failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the second movable member 73 is turned off. A failure effect image is displayed on the one-image display device 70, and a failure effect sound is output. Furthermore, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and after that, the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach-losing result (for example, "565"). When a predetermined period elapses thereafter, an eye-catching performance suggesting stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and when the eye-catching performance ends, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure reservation number, the reservation icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is officially stopped with a reach-losing result, and the special symbol TZ is also fully-stopped with a reach-losing result.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the final production, and in addition to the occurrence of the effective period, the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

232 to 235, there is a decided success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching, and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. Since there is a determined success performance, the performance effect of the determined performance can be effectively improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

232 to 235, there is a decided success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching, and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. In the decided success effect, the period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) during the valid period is different. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration from the beginning, or to give the player an exhilaration after stirring up the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the amusement of the game by the contrast effect. .

232 to 235, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the decided success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed in the determined success effect. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effect when displaying the promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and effect sound when operating the effect button 17 during the valid period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, movable member operating sound effect, etc.) ) is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are aligned (symbol alignment) and the temporary stop is performed, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration) is performed. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment), strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration) is temporarily stopped. production) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the vibration production (opening vibration production) executed at the time of the temporary stop or the opening of the jackpot game with three production patterns 70a aligned is the production button 17 effective period (display of the operation prompting image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the decision success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the effective period related to the determined effect, but the effective period is determined by operating the effect button 17 immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the passage of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and in the case of executing a successful performance determined by the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned into a rainbow. It may be made to emit light. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the decided success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, after the end of the blessing effect, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow light emission may be performed until the actual stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is actually stopped after the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed. When the result of the ready-to-win performance results in a loss, an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the characters is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and in the case of a big win. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the decision success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the decision success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the decision success performance, and the vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the promotion success performance, Conversely, the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed at the time of a temporary stop of a big win due to the effect pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing effect or a temporary stop of the big win due to the effect pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance, and the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. It may be set so that it may not be performed, or vice versa, and at the time of temporary stop of the big hit by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance and the big win by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. Vibration performance may not be executed during the temporary stop of .

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the final effect, the icon before the winning entrance lamp NR is hidden is displayed. The light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode), but it may be made to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example when the variable mission production is executed during the jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 236, an example of an effect when the probability variable mission effect of whether or not the probability variable game state is entered during the jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 236(a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17 (opening vibration effect). ) is started, the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. is started, and the characters "It's a certainty to defeat the enemy" are displayed until the second round game is completed.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game is started, as shown in FIG. The variable mission production will start. Specifically, the text "destroy" is displayed, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 236(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a successful sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 236(e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission is successful are displayed, and the effect button 17 finishes emitting rainbow light, and a plurality of game boards are displayed. The effect light emission of the decoration LED is restarted, and when the third round game is completed, the characters of "defeat" are erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. At least 11 seconds from the start until 5 seconds have passed) occurs, and the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image of the production mode D and the option image of the production mode E are displayed, and as the operation prompting image, "Please select the mode in which the probability is changing with the cross key and press the button!" An opaque effect button image imitating the luminous effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 236(g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in a dark color). , the option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in a dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. It is informed that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect is completed. After that, when the 10th round game ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the variable probability game state is started.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure effect sound is output. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed, and the ending effect is entered.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the mission success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is advantageous to the player, that is, that a variable probability state will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, so the operation promoting image (opaque production button image, gauge image ) is output, and a presentation sound (success sound effect) is output when the presentation button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 236, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection effect, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the selected production mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the non-selected production mode, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, while the valid period related to the probability variable mission effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission. Until elapses, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and when executing the mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. Rainbow light may be emitted. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light during the mission success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

Moreover, although the vibration presentation is executed at the time of the mission success presentation, the vibration presentation may not be performed at the time of the mission success presentation.

(Example of effect when power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
237 and 238, a description will be given of an effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon to start the icon change effect, and along with this, the winning hole lamp NR flashes red from the state of being extinguished. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237(c), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, and the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 237(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 237(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 237(f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 238(g), the initial screen including the characters "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning entrance lamp NR is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed during the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (including the execution period of the re-lottery performance to determine whether the temporarily stopped jackpot performance symbols are promoted to the jackpot performance symbols of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a loss ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , the variable performance ends without restarting the ramp change performance.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the square icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 238(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) that has been displayed is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. ``777'' jackpot effect pattern 70a that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing swing fluctuation/swing display) (formed the reach state before power off) A combination of production patterns different from the reach combination by the production patterns of 3 ↓ 3”), and a stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and a lamp change effect is displayed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 238(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation) is restarted. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol stop designation command (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting state designation command) is received, the production design 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation/swing display) of the production design 70a. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (static display) effect pattern by lottery. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, after the control state of the game is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variation production that was executed when the power supply was stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect pattern is stopped (stationary display), the player is immediately notified that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable effect. It is possible to grasp the

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and when the jackpot fluctuation production is executed, it is stopped. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is being displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

237 and 238, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (extinguishing or white lighting) is set so as not to suggest the degree of winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 239 and FIG. 240 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 239(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable production that is the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (= red icon) is changed to a blue icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from an off state to a blue flashing state. A change production is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 239(d), after the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss production pattern 70a of "259" and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that becomes the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 239(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 239(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. Without performing, the stop screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the lamp change production is restarted without restarting. Fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon that is not the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) for the icon is secured in such a manner that the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 240(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first 1 pending icon (white icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon change is displayed. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

In addition, when a lottery relating to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini-character MCB moves out of the frame to substitute. A preview effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 240(l), the dialogue uttered by ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the dialogue from the audio output device 9, "Your chance has arrived!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 240(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 240 (n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 240(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. A jackpot performance pattern 70a of ``333'' suggesting the type of one jackpot game) and a special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance ends.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a is not displayed. , the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, when the power supply stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous advance notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, the special icon is displayed (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, when the power supply stopped during execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variation effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, the variation production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 and 242. FIG. FIG. 241 is a timing chart 1 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 242(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the changing BGM is being output is "2" in the non-animation for one frame. , the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. displayed as Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

The variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is represented by a double circle. It shall be. Also, the LED of the first sub-hold display 83 is represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of ten frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 242(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Also, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 242(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 242(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 242(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 242(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 242(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM is maintained during fluctuation (see FIG. 242(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 242(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 242 ( g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 242(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TI continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 242(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 242(i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the customer waiting state (game waiting state) transition to When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (final stop), and the special symbols are displayed. TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 242(j)).

At the timing of T7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the same as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive will be processed.

Here, although the specific example 1 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basically The flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the substrate 110 and the performance control substrate 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 and 244. FIG. FIG. 243 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 244(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 244(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 244(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 244(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 244(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 244(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 244(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 244(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 244(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 244(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icon HI displayed third in the reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past fluctuation The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 244(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 244(h)).

When the redundant reserved icons are erased and the required reserved icons are shifted and displayed, the redundant reserved icons may be left as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 244(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special design in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" In (Target of expectation level suggestion by prefetch zone production), normal zone production (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed along with the notice scenario, and the production pattern 70a is the real one. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the point of stop.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it is not possible to receive the

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 2 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 and 245. FIG. FIG. 243 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 245(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 244 and FIG. 245 are different in that the look-ahead effect rendering is executed instead of the look-ahead zone rendering and the icon change rendering is executed as the continuous notice rendering, so the explanation of the common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 245 ( d) see).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 245(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 245(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 245(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 245(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 245(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 245(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus pending icon HI displayed second in the pending icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 245(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 245(h)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. to scroll. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 245(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of first special symbol reservations becomes "0" A look-ahead effect presentation (display of an effect image EF, output of an effect sound) and an icon change presentation (the icon change presentation) are also executed in the presentation (target of expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead preview presentation). Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it is not possible to receive the

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number, the surplus pending icon (for example, the third A necessary number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are shift-displayed without shift-displaying the pending icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of the pending icon (first pending information) that is two more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number of pending icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) two more than the predetermined number ( For example, while displaying the number of reservations of 3), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without doing anything. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247. FIG. FIG. 246 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 247(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of ten frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 247(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 247(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 247(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 247(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 247(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 247(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 247(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed at the second and third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 247(h)).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 247(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 247(i)).

After that, when the production control section 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control section 110m, the look-ahead zone production ends when the production pattern 70a actually stops.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it is not possible to receive the

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 4 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 and 248. FIG. FIG. 246 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 248(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 are different in that the look-ahead effect rendering is executed instead of the look-ahead zone rendering as the continuous notice rendering and the icon change rendering is executed, so the description of the common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 128(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 248(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 248(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 248(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 248(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 248(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 248(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended (see FIG. 248(g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The first and second surplus pending icon HIs displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is deleted for one frame. Appears first in non-animation. Further, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed behind and below the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 248(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the icon shift display is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is finished, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 248(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it is not possible to receive the

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 5 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reservation number is a predetermined number, the predetermined number without displaying the reservation icon of the number one less than the specific number is now displayed with a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of the pending icon (first pending information) three more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specified number is displayed without displaying the specified number. A number of pending icons less by two is displayed, followed by a predetermined number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) three more than the predetermined number ( For example, 4) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations less than the specific number by 1 and 2 A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. FIG. 249 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 250(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 250(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 250(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 250(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 250(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 250(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 250(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 250 ( g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0 , and a process of setting a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed in the first to third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by one frame of non-animation, and icon change effects and The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). , The special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 250(h)).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as when it cannot be received at the

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m explained the case where the customer waiting state designation command was received in the state of "3", but the first special Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the figure pending number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 6 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 249 to 250, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the production patterns 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the production patterns 70a shifted from the stopped position are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. FIG. 251 is a timing chart 5 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 252(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

249 and 251 differ only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is the customer waiting designation command or the opening designation command. Only part will be explained.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot A process for starting the opening effect of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. In addition, the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (turning off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 252 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is finished (time saving game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in non-animation for one frame.

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as when it cannot be received at the

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number that the effect control unit 130m memorizes (knows) explained the case where the opening designation command is received in a state of "3", but the first special figure pending Even when the opening specifying command is received with the number being "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 7 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 251 to 252, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) including the performance symbols 70a deviated from the existing stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is performed. An opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 and 254. FIG. FIG. 253 is a timing chart 6 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 254(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 254(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending is not performed and remains "1" (see FIG. 254 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 254(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the look-ahead zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 254 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second pending icon HI (white icon) in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 254(e)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 254 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are rotating (effecting motion) (Fig. 254 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (SP ready-to-win production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in the ready-to-win losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 254(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 254(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 254(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, A changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 254 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at winning, command at stop) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the command (a winning command, a stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it cannot be received at the

Here, at the timing of T5, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 0" to "0", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "3" to "3", that is, the main control If the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 8 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 to 254, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), the pending icons are shift-displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 to 254, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a predetermined number, the holding number of the predetermined number is not displayed. It is designed to display numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 to 254, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but during the display of the icon, the special figure pending number is "0" When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of The pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 to 254, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display to be "0", the number of reservations of "0" is displayed without displaying the number of reservations one more than "0" (for example, one) is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. FIG. 255 is a timing chart 7 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 256(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 256(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 256 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 256 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 256 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 256(c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained to continue the lookahead zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 256 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the number of 1st special figure reservation changes from "1" to "3", and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed for one frame in non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 256(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 256 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 256 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop, command at the time of start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the command (the winning command, the stop command, the start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m ) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of T7, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "3" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 1" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "1", that is, the main control If the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is greater than the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above. .

Also, here, although the specific example 9 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 255 to 256, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the number, after displaying the pending icon that is one larger than the specific number (for example, three) , a specific number of pending icons are displayed by shift-displaying those pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 255 to 256, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a specific number (for example, 2) that is larger than the predetermined number, the holding number that is 1 more than the specific number (for example, 3) It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 255 to 256, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but during the display of the icon, the special figure pending number is a predetermined number ( For example, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is 1), after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), those pending icons are shifted By displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 255 to 256, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of holds that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) It is designed to display the number of pending. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 256)
As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). It's like Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Even if there is, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined stop After all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the variable display is started. It is designed to Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the lamp design LZ is designed to continue variable display without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (immediately derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ can inform the player that the variable production is being performed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the icon is displayed at the normal time. It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the start time command, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 256, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the command at the time of start, in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect of contents according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Specific example 10 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. FIG. FIG. 257 is a timing chart 8 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 258(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending.

At this time, since the command at the time of winning that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special that is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The figure pending number remains "1", and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (Fig. 258 (a) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the second of the reserved icon display areas 70B corresponding to the first special figure reserved number "2" which could not receive the command at the time of winning, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the first special figure reserved number "3" ” is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 258(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 258(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 258(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "2" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" that could not receive the command at the time of winning in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (normal size from the beginning ), and the three displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 258(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 258(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 258(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). (See FIG. 258(h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 258(i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, A changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of rotating (effecting) (Fig. 258 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2, the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. is not normally received by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the same processing as in the case where the effect control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. will be taken.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "3" When the winning command is received Although the case was explained, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m was "1", the first special figure reservation number was "4" When the winning command was received In the case, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number is "2", "3", or "4" Winning Even when the hour command is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 10 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 and 258, the holding icon (first holding information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the holding icon display areas. is not displayed, the number of special figures pending is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number. Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number (eg, second), the pending icon is displayed in an area (eg, third) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 to 258, a number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number. It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying them. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 and 258, the holding icon (first holding information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the holding icon display areas. is not displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that has a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number of special figure reservations, a predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas The area corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display areas (e.g., the second) without displaying the reserved icon in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to one less than the specific number (e.g., the second) For example, the 4th) is designed to display a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 to 258, a number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number to the specific number It is designed to display a specific number of holds without displaying one less number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 and 258, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas, and the reserved icon is displayed more than the predetermined number. While displaying the reserved icon in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) by one more, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, A specific number of reserved icons are additionally displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of reserved icon display areas, and then a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed by shifting the reserved icons. It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 257 and 258, an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas (for example, the second) and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) without displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number of special figures pending while displaying the pending icon in the area (e.g. 4th) corresponding to a specific number (e.g. 4) more than the predetermined number When the effect control unit 130m receives a start time command that is one less than the specific number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number After displaying a specific number of reserved icons by additionally displaying a reserved icon in the area corresponding to (for example, 3), the reserved icons are shifted to display a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. It is designed to display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 257 to 258, the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
243 and 259, a modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 243 and 244 (modification 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 259(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 244 and FIG. 259 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, so the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone effect ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 259(h)).

In addition, the surplus reserved icon HI displayed second in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the third reserved icon HI is displayed for one frame. is displayed second in the non-animation of All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 259). (h)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 259(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 259(i)).

(Modification 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
243 and 260, a modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 243 and 245 (modification 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 260(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

245 and 260 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, the description of the common parts is omitted here, and only the different parts are explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect end.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 260(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 260(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 260(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed for the variable display of the special symbols in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), the pre-reading effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 259 to 260, the first special figure pending number and the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m was notified from the main control unit 110m If there is an inconsistency due to command abnormality (original deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect , icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) are terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
253 and 261, a modified example (modified example 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the specific example 8 described in FIGS. 253 and 254 will be described. 261(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

Since FIG. 254 and FIG. 261 are the same up to timings T0 to T4, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the production control unit 130m (original 1 in the decreasing direction) The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are ended because there is a discrepancy (abnormality of the same number).

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first suspended icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second suspended icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation ( displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 261(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 261 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 261 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 261(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 261(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 261(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 261 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 261, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m command If an inconsistency caused by an abnormality occurs (abnormality where the deviation is 1 but the number is the same), the pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect, pre-reading effect effect) is terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modification 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
255 and 262, a modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 255 and 256 (modification 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 262(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

Since FIG. 256 and FIG. 262 are the same up to timings T0 to T6, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the number of 1st special figure reservation changes from "1" to "3", and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original in the decreasing direction The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated because there is a deviation of 1 from the value and an abnormality of 1 or more in the increasing direction.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (white icons) are one frame of non-animation. Additional display (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 262(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 262 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 262 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 262, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that are notified from the main control unit 110m command In the event of an inconsistency caused by an abnormality (normally, a deviation of 1 in the direction of decrease, but a deviation of 1 or more in the direction of increase), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change production, look-ahead effect production) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
257 and 263, a modification of the concrete example 10 described in FIGS. 257 and 258 (modification 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 263(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG.

258 and 263 have the same timing from T6 to T11, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 263 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first A second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a non-animation of 1 frame, and a third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (gradually larger from a very small size). is displayed) (see FIG. 263(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 263(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 263(d)).

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 263, the pending icon (first pending information) is displayed in an area (eg, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, two) of the pending icon display areas. When not, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the number of reserved icons corresponds to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas. A pending icon is additionally displayed in a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the second) and a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 263, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When the production control unit 130m receives a prize winning command in which the number of reserved special figures is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number while the number of reservations is being displayed, the number of reservations of the predetermined number is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts instead of Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 263, the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas. When, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning, which is a specific number (for example, four) of which the special figure pending number is more than a predetermined number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number of the pending icon display areas ( For example, the pending icon is additionally displayed in areas corresponding to a specific number (for example, the 4th) from the 2nd). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 263, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E While the number of reservations is displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 4) more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number is less than the specific number by one. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without displaying the number of pending counts. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 263, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, the icon change effect is displayed during display as the pending icon. is not executed, but an icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that an effect lever device 23 is provided in addition to the effect button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the second embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 264, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side portion of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16 .
The performance lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the performance button device 16, and the performance lever 24 that the player can pull toward the front side and the performance lever 24. and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations move the upper plate 11 to serve as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor for vibrating the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11.例文帳に追加In other words, when the player is operating one of the operation parts by hand, the other operation part is vibrated (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut When the vibration effect with/without the effective period of the operation unit related to the in effect, the final effect, the re-lottery effect, the final effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is designed to be

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the function. Furthermore, when a lever vibration motor for vibrating the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4. - 特許庁

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 265 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 265, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestion effect" is an introduction effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. This is an effect in which the transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the effective period column indicates the type of operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes effective.
The "promoting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (the effect button 17, the effect lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, the effective suggesting effect is not executed or the effective suggesting effect is executed. As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image, and the effect button is displayed. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that an effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

"Operation unit state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the effective period. If there is, it is a normal state that does not protrude, and "protrusion" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17, and when the successful effect starts (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates). Even if the operation target is the production lever 24, the production button 17 emits rainbow light.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "normal lever" < "protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each operation unit state is "normal" < "protruding".

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 265 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 265 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates over the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 265 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is finished, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 266 is a diagram showing a frame role-play initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-play (effect button 17, effect lever 24) in the third embodiment.

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 is greatly raised, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are continuously vibrated for 2.5 seconds, After that, the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and then the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 intermittently vibrate for 2.5 seconds (vibration of 1.25 seconds → interval of 1 second → vibration of 1.25 seconds). During this period, the production button 17 lights up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is in the waiting state is received, and the effect button 17 rises greatly, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 After vibrating continuously for 2 seconds, the production button 17 returns to the origin, and the production button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2 seconds, the performance button 17 returns to the origin after that, and the performance button 17 goes out during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24, the vibration time (line Vibration effect during notice effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Re-lottery effect Vibration production, vibration production at the time of confirmation production) It is a different time.

As the first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17, production lever 24) differ in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As the second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 266, the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of turning on the power does not have the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As the fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As the fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 266, the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As the seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration effect during dialogue announcement, vibration effect during step-up announcement effect, vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, vibration effect during development effect, vibration effect during cut-in effect, vibration effect during final effect) , Vibration effect at the time of re-lottery effect, Vibration effect at the time of fixed effect). Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that it is the vibration in the initial operation of the production button 17 and the production lever 24 .

As the eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 in which the presence or absence of detection is performed. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor, thereby shortening the time required for operation confirmation.

The effect lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the effect position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the effect button 17 during the initial operation. → It may be operated (moved, vibrated) by the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the effect lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the "normal lever" is used in the determined effect, and the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position when the "large lever" is used.

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the decided production, the production lever 24 is operated a plurality of times, for example, 5 seconds for consecutive pulls, etc., and each operation of the production lever 24 is performed. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) while the production progresses (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), a success production or a determined failure production may be executed. The production lever 24 is continuously operated during the operation of the production lever 24, and the production is progressed (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.) while the operation of the production lever 24 is continued, and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success effect or a determined failure effect may be executed.

In addition, during the effective period related to the development performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once or the performance lever 24 may be continuously pulled when the performance with high expectation for the big win is executed. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be extended (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive draws, the effect is advanced for each operation of the effect lever 24 (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), and when the number of times of operation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the SPSP development effect and the pseudo consecutive success effect are executed. It is better to make sure that In addition, in the case of a long draw, while the operation of the production lever 24 continues, the production is progressed (for example, the level gauge is raised), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development production is performed. It is preferable to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect.

Further, when the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be weakly vibrated every time the effect progresses (the level gauge rises to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the effect button 17 includes weak vibration and strong vibration, and the vibration intensity of the effect lever 24 includes strong vibration. The strong vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the strong vibration of the production button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than the production lever 24.例文帳に追加

Also, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied according to the type of effective period (operation prompting image: single-press, long-press, repeated-press, long-pull, consecutive-pull). For example, a single press of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds during a serif announcement effect or a pseudo-continuous effect will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and a long press of the effect button 17 for 4 seconds during a development effect will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and cut. If the single hit of the production button 17 is 4 seconds during the in-stage production, the weak vibration is 3 seconds, and if the single push of the production button 17 is 5 seconds during the fixed production, the strong vibration is 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and the production during the development production is performed. If the long press of the lever 24 is 4 seconds, the strong vibration is 1 second,

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to a display mode (for example, red or rainbow) with high expectation of a big win, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, all the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shake motion), but the left and right production patterns 70a are stopped and the central production Only the pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three production patterns 70a may perform a fluctuation action (production action), or the left and right production patterns 70a do not fluctuate (production action), and only the central production pattern 70a fluctuates (production action). ).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate during the temporary stop of the performance design 70a. Only one of the above may perform a fluctuation motion (effect motion).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (production operation) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation action (drawing action), or a fluctuation action (drawing action) may be performed by adding a light emission effect to the identification section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a of the losing mode is finally stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the same number as the production pattern 70a The final stop may be made in such a failure mode. In addition, when the production pattern 70a of the jackpot mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"). You may make it stop.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (special figure pending number specification command, special design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) production control unit When 130m receives, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is continued, but it is also possible to start the variable display after instantaneously deriving display in the same way as the effect symbol 70a. good. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the command at the start is received during the display of the number of pending icons larger than the number of special figure pending, the surplus pending icon HI is erased by one frame worth of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon based on the reception of the stop command. It may be erased by animation for 5 frames.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), one more than the predetermined number After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. can be

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is a mismatch (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), reception of this command at the start However, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of production mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of the effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure reservation number designation command is received If you do not receive the prefetch designation command normally, you will display a pending icon, while if you do not receive the special figure hold number designation command normally and you will receive the prefetch designation command normally, display the pending icon You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestive effect is semi-transparent, but the effect button image may be an outline-only effect button image instead of a translucent effect, or may be a silhouette-only effect button image. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) when the advance notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect) and the development effect are executed. However, the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach announcement effect or the development effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of execution of the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, final effect) or when the symbols are aligned. Alternatively, a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance may be executed by operating the frame movable member when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the patterns are aligned, or instead of the vibration performance. An action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the title display indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not performed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. The title may be displayed using either red characters that have a higher expectation of winning than white characters, rainbow characters that confirm the big hit, etc.), and after the title display is displayed in white characters, it changes to red characters or rainbow characters. You can let it run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production, but it is performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach production, and the SP reach production is performed. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (proportion of protruding state is higher) in the case of performing the cut-in performance at the end of the SP reach performance than in the case of performing the cut-in performance in the middle stage. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the production button 17 is generated in the development performance, but an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 is generated as a jackpot announcement performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long-pressing period during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings in the effective period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be developed based on the determination results.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reservations when the number of reservations changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. The decrease display of the first hold information (1 is subtracted) is earlier than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update to the pending digits) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. It is possible to perform a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (moving from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the frame is updated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. when the number of the reserved memories increases, it is possible to display an increase of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information, and during the display of the decreased second reserved information, When the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending Incremental display of information (update to pending digits incremented by one) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays the reduced first reserved information and the second reserved information whose variable display is started. A change display that changes to the execution information (the icon) can be executed, and when the number of the pending memories increases, an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed. Yes, and when the number of pending memories increases during change display of the second pending information, the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing of , the increase display of the first reservation information (update to the reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can increase the display of the first pending information and increase the display of the second pending information. Yes, when the number of the pending memories increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increased display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which . By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means to control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the variable effect execution means is capable of displaying during execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the information display means displays the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. and an increased display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (1 is added update to the reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed). It is designed not to be By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means controls the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub-control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Variable effect execution means executable by display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of the reservation memories, and second reservation information indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories ( and an information display means capable of displaying a pending icon), wherein, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means increases display of the first pending information and increases display of the second pending information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reservation storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition When the determination information based on (entrance of the game ball to the second starting port) is stored as a second reservation memory, and the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the first reservation information Increased display (updated to the reserved number with 1 added) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information satisfies a predetermined condition (finishing the final variation effect in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It will not run until By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means changes the operation mode of the initial operation (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) are made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and a power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the operation means after the start of power supply Effect control means (effect control board 130) that performs initial light emission and is capable of performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different between when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. a presentation control means (a presentation control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation and initial light emission of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply, and performing the presentation operation and the presentation light emission of the movable presentation means during execution of a game; ), wherein the effect control means determines the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps and the Although the operation mode of the operation of each step, etc.) is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game; The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means controls when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means is the same. are designed to be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by the production, wherein the plurality of production patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the production When the game control state is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and sets the game control state. is restored, the second combination (for example, "753") is used as the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

<Content 3 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial action is performed after the return action of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the return operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial motion is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial motion is performed. The initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is Instead, the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. is not used. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when power supply is started (power is turned on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. If it is at the position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is performed. , the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. A control means (rendering control board 130) is provided, and the movable rendering means includes a first movable rendering means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable rendering means, and a second position of itself. Including a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) that overlaps with the above-mentioned effect control means, the control state of the game is initialized When the power supply is started (power-on), the When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved to the first position. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial movement of the second movable effect means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

<Content 4 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility to

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variation accompanied by variation display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing production is provided, and in the variable production, the production pattern that is being variably displayed is oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means returns a predetermined (at the time of receiving the special figure stop designation command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command), it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging the display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can be played, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed production patterns, and in the variable production, a ready-to-win state is determined by a part of the production patterns. Including a ready-to-win fluctuation effect for forming and displaying and executing a ready-to-win effect, the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, at a predetermined timing ( When a special figure stop designation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received), the ready-to-win state is formed and displayed The combination of the performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols displayed can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. there is Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 5 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and determination by the determination means According to the result, a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), are a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. When the game control state is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means. The mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when the power supply is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 6 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the displayed production pattern, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production pattern on the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) by the display means, and when the effect pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable effect elapses, and the control state. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed depending on whether the effect pattern is statically displayed after the initialization of or after the control state is restored. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Content 7 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with variable display of symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, displays the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the pattern, and the determination information during execution of the variable effect is displayed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the start of the variable display, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), and the execution information is displayed in the predetermined display area. It is set not to display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 8 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information, there was a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects (for example, JP-A-2017-143904 reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display, and the production control means performs the variable production a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the pre-reading notice effect is not resumed, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, a notice performance (for example, alternative notice performance) different from the look-ahead notice performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Content 9 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, JP-A-2017 -143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. rice field.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, wherein the performance control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is explicitly suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before stopping the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 10 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect is not completed is changed in stages. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed is high. There was a fear that

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display, wherein the production control means receives the determination information and the variable production that the execution of the variable production has not ended. It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information step by step. It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation to be held, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., white icon) and a second stage mode (e.g., blue icon). icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode, which changes to the third stage mode, is resumed to control the game. is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not have to be conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Content 11 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes a long time to grasp the number of reserved memories. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and determination by the determination means A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is determined. When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second Suspension display indicating the number of suspension storage in each of the suspension display 84) and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area When the power supply stopped in the state with the reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

<Content 12 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines capable of executing effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that it could drop.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Effect control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect with variable display, and light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, and the effect control The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed, and the game is improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

<Content 13 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration specifying command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and from the main control means during execution of the variable effect When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the special game effect The initial operation can be executed when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the movable effect means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. In the case where the game control state is initialized and in the case where the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps and the motion of each step) is the same. However, the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation of the movable production means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and the effect control means initializes the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the performance operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the determination by the determination means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable display of the effect pattern is shaken. It is possible to perform static display (stop display) after moving display (temporary stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply that was stopped during execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging it at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means ) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the game machine The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. and a second state, wherein the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means when the game control state is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply stopped during state 2 resumes and the state is restored to the first state or the second state, the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery) is made different, and according to the signal If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform operations. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses after the static display of the production pattern, the display means can execute a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production), and after the fluctuation time of the variable production has elapsed, the production pattern is displayed. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the signal. If so, it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the prior Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling effect (continuous foretelling effect) for a plurality of times of the variable performance, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-reading foretelling effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the predictive notice effect is not restarted, and the notice effect different from the predictive notice effect (for example, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and a plurality of times It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, When a command specifying power restoration, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and an operation in a predetermined mode (Action, light emission, sound output, image display) possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and establishment of acquisition conditions Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (entering the game ball into the starting port) as a pending storage, and the determination information, the player Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or before stopping the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the production control means, the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and the production It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests a degree, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is changed to the above. During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and to execute an effect according to the signal, the main control When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and according to the signal When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which performance can be executed, the predetermined It is possible to output a notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is progressing. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and during execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during the execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration) from the main control means designated command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player A special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) can be executed during execution of a special game (jackpot game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

<Content 14 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means A game machine having a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a production image (variation production, jackpot production, etc.) The effect control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of effect symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the game standby screen When the power supply to the main control means stops during display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 15 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting door detection switch, Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means and, when the power supply to the game machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic Anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave anomaly notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined anomaly notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine that can be played, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality When the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period of time (elapsed 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue execution of anomaly notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

<Content 16 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and perform game effects according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. Among such gaming machines, there was one that had main control means for controlling the progress of the game and production control means for controlling production in response to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example, , see JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. There, according to the increase of the first reserved memory, the first reserved information (first reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and according to the decrease of the first reserved memory, the first Each of the reserved information can be shifted and displayed to be reduced, and the first reserved information is subjected to a production operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production. It is possible, and the first suspension information is during the temporary stop of the plurality of production symbols performing the production operation, and a specific number (for example, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation storage receives the signal at the start of the variation display (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) where the predetermined number becomes the predetermined number , without starting the variable effect and shift-displaying the first reserved information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side), The first pending information (at least the first pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of the first suspension information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, and the number (for example, two) of the first After displaying the pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved display 83), and the second corresponding to each of the first reserved memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (character tactile image, pattern effect image) that constitute the A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory reaches the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). (Reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution of the variation effect is started, and the first reservation less than the specific number by one in the first display area Display the first pending number (for example, one) of the predetermined number without displaying the number (for example, two), and display the number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area After displaying the first pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) The first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of production patterns are displayed in the variable production During the temporary stop, it is possible to cause the first suspension information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and the plurality of performance symbols in which the first suspension information is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. and at the start of the variable display in which the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (eg, 1) When a signal (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first reservation of the number (eg, three) that is one less than the specific number Displaying the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information without displaying information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of the first suspension information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the number (eg, three) of the first Displaying a number (for example, two) of the first holding information that is less than the specific number by two without displaying the holding information, and then displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the first holding information. . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved display 83), and the second corresponding to each of the first reserved memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (character tactile image, pattern effect image) that constitute the A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory reaches the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, four) that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, one). (Reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first storage number (two less than the specific number in the first display area) display the predetermined number of the first stored numbers (for example, one) without displaying the number (for example, two); 1 A number less than the specified number by 2 without displaying pending information (eg, two) of the first pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein in the normal game state, the effect control means performs a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to execute, and when the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, a performance operation (fluctuation operation) of predetermined elements (character tactile images, symbol effect images) that constitute the performance symbols etc.), and when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is displaced from the stop position, it is based on the determination result of the first determination information When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, after the production design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation production Display variable. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There, the second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the second pending memory, and the second pending information is displayed according to the decrease of the pending memory. can be reduced by one by shifting display, and during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold storage is the predetermined number of the variation display start time signal (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, the specific number of the second The second pending information corresponding to the predetermined number (the icon display 1st and 2nd pending icons from the area side) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There is, second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending storage can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) can be specified During the display of the second reservation information of the number (for example, three), the signal at the start of the variation display that the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern specified command) is received, the variable effect is started, the second reservation information of the number (for example, 2) less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the Display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, three) of the above-mentioned During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the variation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and after displaying the second pending information of a number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed indicate. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (eg, one ) to display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and two more than the specific number without displaying the second hold information of the number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number A small number (eg, two) of the second pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, four) of the During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the variation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and without displaying the second pending information of a number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, a number that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) The second pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein in the specific game state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information. It is possible, and when the performance symbol that is temporarily stopped in the variation performance is displaced from the stop position, the start time signal of the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information (holding number designation command, When a special symbol designating command, a special symbol variation pattern designating command) is received, the performance symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then the variation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means for performing, the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, Additional display of pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the pending memory, shift display of the pending information according to the decrease of the pending memory, and one of them is execution information. (the corresponding icon), and while a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) is being displayed, the reserved storage becomes the predetermined number When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased to start the fluctuation production, and the specific number of the holding Without shift-displaying the reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the information, the necessary amount of the reserved information (the first and second from the icon display area side) hold icon) are shifted and one is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means for performing, the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponds to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, along with erasing the execution information, start the variation production, the number of one less than the specific number (for example, two) to display the holding information , the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of said pending information that is capable of being displayed and is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), said pending memory is said to be said predetermined number, and said variable display is started. When the time signal (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the first display area is more than the specific number Display the number of reservations of the predetermined number (for example, one) without displaying the number of reservations that is less by one (for example, two), and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 2) of the pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A number (for example, two) of the pending information that is less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of said pending information that is capable of being displayed and is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), said pending memory is said to be said predetermined number, and said variable display is started. When the time signal (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the first display area is more than the specific number Display the number of reservations of the predetermined number (for example, one) without displaying the number of reservations less than two (for example, two), and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 3) of the pending information are displayed, the holding information of a number less than the specific number by two (for example, 2) is displayed, and then the holding information of the predetermined number (for example, 1) and the holding information are displayed. Display execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (production control board 130), the main control means, the special game (jackpot) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port) game), and a variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance patterns so as to correspond to the display, and the variable display is started when the temporarily stopped performance symbols in the variable performance are deviated from a stop position. When an hour signal (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the performance design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

<Content 17 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first effect (pre-reach effect) Includes a specific game effect (reach fluctuation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed later, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect) , vibration production for 1 second during development production, etc.) and a second vibration production different from the first vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of decision success production, at the time of final production, at the time of pattern alignment, etc. 3 seconds or more Vibration effect), and in the specific game effect, the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect than during the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). includes a specific game effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected is executed after the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first Vibration effects (1-second vibration effects such as dialogue announcement effects, step-up announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.) and second vibration effects different from the first vibration effects (during cut-in effects, At the time of decision success performance, at the time of fixed performance, at the time of matching symbols, etc., vibration performance of 3 seconds or more), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is executed rather than when the first vibration performance is not executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the second vibration effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a suggestive effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed during execution of the game effect; It is possible to execute a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means, and the vibration effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display. and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display. In a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is completed), the case where the second vibration effect is executed is higher than the case where the suggestive effect is executed. There is a high degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state game state) and a game state control means (main control board 110), and a production control means (production control board 130 ), the production control means can execute a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the variable production, and the variable production includes a first type production pattern (even number design) A first specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, a second specific change effect in which the reach effect is executed by the second type of effect pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern (" 7" symbol) includes a third specific fluctuation effect in which a ready-to-win effect is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect, at the time of the pseudo continuous effect, at the time of the development effect etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (3 seconds or more vibration performance such as cut-in performance, determined success performance, finalized performance, etc.), In a normal game state, the first specific variable performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variable performance, the third specific variable performance is less likely to be executed than the first specific variable performance, and the first specific variable performance is less likely to be executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (read-ahead vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect. The vibrating effect includes a first vibrating effect (dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display effect sound of the operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is included. , a production sound corresponding to the operation of the production button, and an operating effect sound of the character) are outputted, while the predetermined production sound is not outputted when the second vibration production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a specific effect that makes the execution of the special game expected. Including a specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which (reach effect) is executed, the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (line notice effect, a cut-in effect, a determined success effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed when the second vibration effect is executed. , In the specific game effect (jackpot reach fluctuation effect) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 3 times) before the start of the specific effect After the start of the specific effect , the number of executions of the second vibration effect (up to 7 times) tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During the execution of the game effect, a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operating means can be executed, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration associated with the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. is capable of executing a suggestive effect (jackpot announcement effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation effect (vibration effect) that operates (moves, vibrates) the frame effect unit during execution of the suggestive effect , action effects, etc.) can be executed, and the suggested effects include a first suggested effect (weak notice, pre-reach notice effect) and a second suggested effect (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion is performed. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher when the operating performance is executed during execution of the first suggestive performance than when the operating performance is not executed during performance. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the second vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the first vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. Executes a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) for changing the frame effect part from the first state (standby state, extinction state) to the second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state). The variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-ready performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-ready performance), and execution of the first performance. When the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed, the expectation that the special game is executed is higher, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed In the reach variation effect), regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the change effect is executed during the execution of the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the dialogue announcement effect, the simulated continuous effect, the development effect, and the cut-in effect) executed in response to the above-mentioned operation prompting display is executed without Including a second vibration performance (one of vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance, at the time of pattern matching, and at the time of C pattern matching), and the first vibration performance differs in the degree of expectation that the special game is executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration effects during dialogue announcement, pseudo continuous effects, or development effects, weak or strong vibration for 3 seconds for vibration effects during cut-in effects) Vibration), and the second vibration effect is one predetermined vibration mode (at the time of step-up notice effect) when performing a predetermined effect (step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching) If the vibrating effect is weak vibration for 1 second, if the vibrating effect when the pattern is aligned, it is strong vibration for 4 seconds, and if the C pattern is aligned, the strong vibration is performed for 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variation performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a predetermined vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech notice effect, step-up notice Vibration production for 1 second at the time of production, etc.) and a specific vibration production different from the predetermined vibration production (Vibration production for 3 seconds or more at the time of success production, pattern matching, etc.), and the predetermined vibration production includes , a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue announcement effect), and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (pre-reading vibration production, vibration production at the time of step-up notice production), and in the game production in which the special game is executed, the first vibration production is executed and the second vibration production is performed. The rate at which the specific vibration effect is executed after that differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal game state than during the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the information, and production control for executing a variable production that variably displays a plurality of types of production symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. Means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a special effect (determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect, and the operation means vibrate in any of a plurality of vibration modes (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect Vibration effects such as when the symbols are aligned, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned). The mode of execution of the vibration performance (execution/non-execution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on even-numbered symbols, odd-numbered symbols other than "7", and "7" symbols, and the vibration performance is executed along with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operation means, and the vibration effect includes an operation prompting display. A first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the first operation means in the above (vibration effect such as dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and execution without the operation prompting display and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a vibration effect at the time of a step-up notice effect, etc.). In the second vibration effect, the start timing of vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is played through the second operating means. It is designed to be communicated to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (line announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development During the second valid period, including the valid period related to the performance, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and the second valid period (valid period during customer waiting) different from the first valid period The vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operation means is operated during the first valid period than when the operation means is operated during the first effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to speech advance notice effect, etc.) , a second valid period different from the first valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), and a third valid period different from the first valid period and the second valid period (customer waiting middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period than when the operation means is operated during the third effective period. is becoming easier. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 18th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor) operable in a predetermined manner) , Production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74) and establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game balls to first start port 45 or second start port 47) Based on determination information (special figure determination information ), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the information, a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production), and the production control means includes a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production mode D to G), and changes the effect section from a first state (standby state, extinction state) to a second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state) during execution of the game effect. A change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be executed, and the expectation is that the special game will be executed when the change effect is executed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and up to one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for execution of the special game during execution of the game performance. Progressive step effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the step effect is a predetermined stage (if the step-up notice effect, the second effect is performed). The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when progressing to any of the 3-step effect, the 4th-step effect, or the 5th-step effect, or once or twice in the case of pseudo-continuous effect, is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected in the game effect can be executed, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first effect mode. When the continuous performance of the predetermined number of times is executed in the second performance mode than when the continuous performance is executed, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance are becoming harder to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that expects execution of the special game can be executed, and in the second effect mode, a predetermined number of times (twice or 3 times), the case where the continuous effect is executed for the predetermined number of times in the first effect mode is more likely in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect. The specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that expects execution of the special game can be executed, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (normal reach production) and a second specific production (SP/SPSP ready-to-win production) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than the first specific production, and the first production mode is higher than the second production mode. is more likely to execute the specific effect in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is executed for the first number of times, and the second effect is more likely than the first effect mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, display means (image display device) capable of displaying the effect image, and determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and game according to the determination result of the determination means and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing an effect (variable effect), and the effect control means includes an operation prompting display (opaque button image ) is performed, and an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation prompting display is displayed on the display means before the operation prompting display is performed. It is possible to perform a suggestive display (semi-transparent button image) suggesting that there is a possibility that the The first operation prompting display includes a second operation prompting display (a normal state red button image, a projected state red button image, and a projected state rainbow button image) with different expectations for the execution of the special game. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the first operation prompting display is performed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the suggestive display is not performed in the first effect mode. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation prompting display is performed after the suggestive display is performed than when the operation prompting display is performed immediately. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the normal pattern, and when the jackpot special pattern type is the specific pattern. 1 shifts to the high probability game state continuing until the next big win game after the end of the big win game, but the game machine may shift to the high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the big win games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to a game state.

Further, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.
Also, various configurations in each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

[Technical features of the present invention]
◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. A game machine comprising the game control means (eg, game control unit 200) is capable of determining whether or not to perform a special game (eg, jackpot game, etc.) based on establishment of the starting condition, Symbol variation can be executed according to the determination result, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) controls the special image (for example, the reaching remaining figure of FIG. 69 (27) based on the number of times of execution of the variation). The number of times image 503, etc.) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and a specific image (for example, the customer waiting image 505 in FIG. 69 (28), etc.) can be displayed when the variation is not executed. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and when the specific image (for example, the customer waiting image 505 in FIG. 69 (28), etc.) is displayed, the special image (for example, FIG. 69 (27) Remaining number of times reached image 503, etc.) can be hidden.

◆ The second configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200), a first mode (for example, normal game state, etc.) and a second mode ( For example, a specific time-saving game state, etc.) can be controlled, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the pattern according to the result of the determination , and the effect control means can execute a special effect (for example, display of remaining number of arrivals image 503 in FIG. 66 (8), etc.) based on the number of times the variation is performed in the first mode. When the number of times in the first mode is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 101 times), the special effect is not executed, and the number of times in the first mode is the predetermined number or more (for example, 101 times or more), the game machine is characterized in that the special effect can be executed.

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200), a first mode (for example, normal game state, etc.) and a second mode ( For example, a specific time-saving game state, etc.) can be controlled, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the pattern according to the result of the determination When the number of times the variation is executed in the first mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 101 times), the effect control means executes a special effect based on the number of times (for example, FIG. 66(8) such as the display of the remaining number of times reached image 503), and when controlled from the second mode to the first mode, before the number of times in the first mode reaches the predetermined number of times Furthermore, the game machine is capable of executing the above-mentioned special effect (for example, display of the remaining number of times of reaching image 503 in FIG. 80(33), etc.).

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, production control means for controlling production (for example, production control section 300), and 1 game area (for example, the left area of the game area 111) and a second game area different from the first game area (for example, the right area of the game area 111) game area (for example, the game area 111), wherein the game control means includes a first mode (for example, a normal game state) and a second mode (for example, a specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to control whether to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined number of information regarding the determination is stored as a reserved memory. It is possible to change the symbols according to the result of the determination and then stop the game. mode, and the effect control means causes the game control means to hold the number of times of the remaining fluctuations until the second mode is controlled when the symbols in the final fluctuation stop. If the memory is not stored, when the pattern in the variation of the final round is stopped, a specific notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the second game area (for example, No. 1 right-throwing image 75, etc.) can be started.

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, production control means for controlling production (for example, production control section 300), and 1 game area (for example, the left area of the game area 111) and a second game area different from the first game area (for example, the right area of the game area 111) game area (for example, the game area 111), wherein the game control means includes a first mode (for example, a normal game state) and a second mode (for example, a specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to control whether to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation of the symbol according to the result of the determination. The effect control means can execute a specific notification (for example, display of the first right-handed image 75) that prompts the shooting of the game ball to the second game area, and the second mode When it is controlled, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, display of a specific time reduction start image 517 in FIG. 90 (9)) that notifies the second mode when the variation is performed, and the specific The notification includes the first notification that can be executed before the start of the specific effect (for example, the display of the first right shot image 75 in FIG. 89 (4), etc.), and the variation that is executed after the start of the first notification. and a second notification that can be executed after the variation in which the specific effect is executed (for example, the display of the third right-handed shot image 518 in FIG. 90 (9), etc.). .

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and a predetermined number of information regarding the determination can be stored as a pending memory. Variation of symbols can be executed according to the result of determination, and the performance control means produces a performance sound when the pending memory is not stored in the game control means when the variation ends in the first mode. from the first mode (e.g., a mode in which the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect is output, such as shown in FIG. 69 (26)) to the second mode (e.g., in FIG. 69 (28), the effect sound is output ), a specific image (eg, customer waiting image 505, etc.) can be displayed on display means (eg, image display unit 114), and when the variation ends in the second mode, the game control If the pending memory is not stored in the means, the effect sound is changed from the third mode (for example, the mode in which the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect is output, as shown in FIG. 93 (8)) to the second mode ( For example, it is a game machine capable of not displaying the specific image by adopting a mode in which the effect sound is not output as shown in FIG. 93(10).

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and a predetermined number of information regarding the determination can be stored as a pending memory. It is possible to execute the variation of the design according to the result of the determination, the effect control means, if the reservation storage is not stored in the game control means when the variation is not executed, a specific image (for example, Customer waiting image 505, etc.) can be displayed on the display means, and when it is controlled to the second mode, a specific effect that notifies the second mode (for example, display of a specific time saving start image 517, etc.) can be executed. Yes, in the second mode, before the start of the specific effect (for example, before the display of the specific time reduction start image 517 in FIG. 90 (9), etc.), the specific image (e.g., customer waiting in FIG. 90 (7) image 505, etc.) can be displayed, and after the start of the specific effect (for example, after the display of the specific time reduction start image 517 in FIG. 92 (3), etc.), the game characterized by not displaying the specific image machine.

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, production control means for controlling production (for example, production control section 300), and 1 game area (e.g., the left area of the game area 111) and a game area (e.g., the game area) having a second game area different from the first game area (e.g., the right area of the game area 111) 111), wherein the game control means includes a first mode (for example, a normal game state) and a second mode (for example, a specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to control whether to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined number of information regarding the determination is stored as a reserved memory. It is possible, and it is possible to execute the variation of the symbol according to the result of the determination, and the effect control means provides a specific notification (for example, the first right-handed image 75 display, etc.) can be executed, and if the reservation storage is not stored in the game control means when the variation is not executed, a specific image (eg, customer waiting image 505, etc.) is displayed on the display means It is possible, and when it is controlled to the second mode, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, display of a specific short time start image 517) that notifies the second mode, and the specific effect is performed in the second mode. Before starting (for example, before the display of the specific time saving start image 517 of FIG. 90 (9), etc.), the specific image (for example, customer waiting image 505 of FIG. 90 (7), etc.) When displaying The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification (for example, display of the first right-hand shot image 75 in FIG. 90(7), etc.) can be executed at any time.

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The gaming machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.) can be determined, and the variation of the pattern can be executed according to the result of the determination. Variation image 51, etc.) can be displayed on display means (eg, image display unit 114), and a special image (eg, specific time reduction remaining number image 524) is displayed based on the number of times the variation is performed in the second mode. means, and when a game ball wins in the second starting hole in the second mode, the information display (for example, the variation image 51 in FIG. 94 (2)) is displayed, and the special image (for example, , FIG. 94 (2) specific time saving remaining number image 524) is updated, and when the game ball wins in the first start port in the second mode, the information display (for example, variation image 51 etc.) is not displayed, and the display mode of the special image (for example, specific time reduction remaining number image 524 in FIG. 103 (3)) is updated.

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, production control means for controlling production (for example, production control section 300), and 1 game area (for example, the left area of the game area 111) and a second game area different from the first game area (for example, the right area of the game area 111) game area (for example, the game area 111), wherein the game control means includes a first mode (for example, a normal game state) and a second mode (for example, a specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to control whether to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition. It is executable, and the effect control means displays a specific image (for example, the first right-handed image 75, etc.) prompting the shooting of the game ball to the second game area on the display means (for example, the image display section 114). The specific image includes a first image (e.g., first right-handed image 75) having a predetermined display size on the display means and a display size on the display means that is larger than that of the first image. When there is a second image (eg, third right-handed image 518, etc.) and a third image (eg, fourth right-handed image 525, etc.) and is controlled to the second mode, the first time of the second mode After the change, the first image (for example, the first right-handed image 75 in FIG. 90(8), etc.), the second image (for example, the third right-handed image 518 in FIG. 90(9), etc.), and The gaming machine is characterized in that the third image (for example, the fourth right-handed image 525 in FIG. 91(13), etc.) can be displayed.

◆ The eleventh configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode and the effect control means displays a specific image (for example, a stage image 61, etc.) in a display mode according to the controlled mode of the first mode and the second mode. (For example, image display unit 114) can be displayed, and when controlled to the second mode, a specific effect that notifies the second mode (for example, the display of a specific time reduction start image 517 in FIG. 90 (9), etc. ) is started when the specific image corresponding to the first mode (for example, the stage image 61 in FIG. 90(9)) is displayed, and the specific image corresponding to the second mode (for example, the This gaming machine is characterized in that the game ends before the stage image 61) of 91(13) is displayed.

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the effect control means controls the display means ( For example, the image display unit 114) can execute a variation effect using a plurality of patterns (for example, the decorative pattern 41), display a part of the plurality of patterns, and change the remaining patterns. is possible to execute a ready-to-win production that continues the ready-to-win production, it is possible to execute an inciting production (for example, a ready-to-win inciting production) that agitates the ready-to-win production, and when the variable production to execute the inciting production is performed, the The ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect in the first mode than the variable effect in the second mode, and when the variable effect to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed after the inciting effect is executed, The gaming machine is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed in the variable performance in the second mode than in the first mode.

◆ A thirteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.), it is possible to store a predetermined number of pieces of information related to the determination as a hold memory, and the hold memory includes a first hold memory related to the winning of the first starting port and , and a second pending memory related to the winning to the second starting port, and the effect control means displays a plurality of patterns (for example, the image display unit 114) in accordance with the determination result. 68 (20 ) effect of changing the display size of the decorative pattern 41) can be executed, and when the variable effect in which the special game is not executed as a result of the determination is performed, the number of the first reserved memories in the second mode is a specific number (e.g., 1) than the variation effects (e.g., FIG. 106 (23), FIG. 106 (24), and FIG. 107 (25) to FIG. 107 (27)), The variable production (for example, FIGS. 67 (15) to 67 (18), FIGS. 68 (19) to 68 (24) and FIG. 69 (25)) is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation performance is more likely to be executed.

◆ A fourteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.), it is possible to store a predetermined number of pieces of information related to the determination as a hold memory, and the hold memory includes a first hold memory related to the winning of the first starting port and , and a second pending memory related to the winning to the second starting port, and the effect control means displays a plurality of patterns (for example, the image display unit 114) in accordance with the determination result. decorative pattern 41, etc.) can be executed, some of the plurality of patterns can be displayed, and a ready-to-win effect can be executed in which the remaining patterns continue to fluctuate, and the judgment can be performed. As a result, when the variable effect in which the special game is not executed and the ready-to-win effect is not executed is performed, the number of the first reserved memories is a specific number (for example, 4) in the first mode. The number of the first reserved memories is the specific number (for example, 4) in the second mode rather than the variable production (for example, the fluctuation production of FIGS. 66(7) to 66(9)). The game machine is characterized in that the variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in FIGS. 104(8) to 104(12)) is more likely to perform the variable performance having a longer execution time.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.), it is possible to execute the variation of the design according to the result of the determination, it is possible to select a variation pattern that determines the variation time of the design, and the information on the determination is reserved A predetermined number of memories can be stored as memories, and the reserved memories include a first reserved memory related to the winning to the first start opening and a second reserved memory related to the winning to the second starting opening. , the effect control means executes a variable effect using a plurality of symbols (eg, decorative symbols 41, etc.) on the display means (eg, image display unit 114) according to the variation pattern selected by the game control means. possible, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win effect in which some of the plurality of symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols continue to fluctuate, and as a result of the determination, the special game is not executed and the ready-to-win When the variable performance in which the performance is not executed is performed, the first variable performance and the second variable performance based on the number of the first reserved memories being a specific number (for example, 1) in the first mode are the same. The rate at which the variation pattern is selected is a first rate, and a third variation effect and a fourth variation based on the fact that the number of the first reserved memories in the second mode is the specific number (for example, 1) The gaming machine is characterized in that a rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the performance is a second rate, and the second rate is higher than the first rate.

♦ The sixteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The gaming machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable to and, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the second mode is controlled via the special game There is a special mode (e.g., special time-saving game state, etc.) and a specific mode (e.g., specific time-saving game state, etc.) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the effect control means is the result of the determination Depending on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), it is possible to execute a variable effect using a plurality of patterns (for example, the decorative pattern 41, etc.), and a part of the plurality of patterns is displayed. , it is possible to execute a ready-to-win production that continues the fluctuation of the remaining symbols, to execute a fanning production (for example, a ready-to-win fanning production) that agitates the execution of the ready-to-win production, and to execute the ready-to-win production after the execution of the inciting production. is performed, the special game is more likely to be executed in the variable performance in the specific mode than in the special mode.

◆ The 17th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The gaming machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.), it is possible to store a predetermined number of pieces of information related to the determination as a hold memory, and the hold memory includes a first hold memory related to the winning of the first starting port and , There is a second reservation memory related to the winning to the second start port, and the second mode includes a special mode controlled via the special game (for example, a special time-saving game state), There is a specific mode (e.g., specific time-saving game state, etc.) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the effect control means is a display means (e.g., image display unit 114) according to the determination result. A variable effect using a plurality of patterns (for example, decorative pattern 41, etc.) can be executed, and a variable effect that changes the display size of the pattern on the display means (for example, display of decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 77 (14) effect of changing the size to the display size of the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 77 (15)), and as a result of the determination, when the variable effect in which the special game is not executed is performed, the second game is performed in the specific mode. 2 Variation of the variation performance (eg, FIG. 106 (23), FIG. 106 (24), and FIG. 107 (25) to FIG. 76 (11), 76 (12), 77 (13) to FIG. 77 (18), FIG. 78 (19) and FIG. 78 (20)) is a gaming machine characterized in that the above-mentioned change performance is more likely to be executed.

◆ The 18th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The gaming machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is controllable, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game etc.), it is possible to execute the variation of the design according to the result of the determination, it is possible to select a variation pattern that determines the variation time of the design, and the information on the determination is reserved A predetermined number of memories can be stored as memories, and the reserved memories include a first reserved memory related to the winning of the first start opening and a second reserved memory related to the winning of the second starting opening. , The second mode includes a special mode controlled via the special game (e.g., special time-saving game state, etc.) and a specific mode controlled without going through the special game (e.g., a specific time-saving game state, etc.), and the effect control means displays a plurality of symbols (eg, decorative symbols 41, etc.) on the display means (eg, image display unit 114) according to the variation pattern selected by the game control means. It is possible to execute a variation production using, to display some of the plurality of symbols, and to execute a reach production that continues the fluctuation of the remaining symbols, and as a result of the determination, the special game When the variable performance that is not executed and the ready-to-win performance is not executed is performed, a first variable performance and a second variation based on the fact that the number of the second reserved memories is a specific number (for example, 4) in the special mode. The ratio of selecting the same variation pattern is the first ratio, and the third variation effect is based on the fact that the number of the second reserved memories is the specific number (for example, 4) in the specific mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that a rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the and the fourth variation performance is a second rate, and the second rate is higher than the first rate.

◆ The 19th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The gaming machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and it is possible to change the pattern according to the result of the determination. , when the variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) in the first mode, it is possible to control to the second mode, and the effect control means is configured to perform the variation in the first mode. A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) can be executed when the player is in the state, and in the first mode, the number of remaining fluctuations before being controlled to the second mode is a specific number (for example, 3 times). The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted from the fluctuation that becomes.

◆ The twentieth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes game control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control section 300) for controlling production. The game machine includes a first mode (for example, normal game state) and a second mode (for example, specific time-saving game state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game, etc.) based on the establishment of the start condition, and to stop after changing the pattern according to the result of the determination. is possible, and when the pattern in the final variation of the predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) is stopped in the first mode, it is possible to control to the second mode, and the effect When the variation following the variation of the final round is started, the control means starts the specific effect (for example, the display of the specific time reduction start image 517 in FIG. 90 (9), etc.) that notifies the second mode. It is a game machine characterized by doing.

41... Decorative pattern, 51... Variation image, 52... Pending image, 61... Stage image, 75... First right-handed image, 78... Special time saving start image, 100... Pachinko game machine, 114... Image display unit, 121... Third 1 start opening 122 second start opening 200 game control unit 231 random number acquisition unit 234 special symbol determination unit 300 effect control unit 501 execution number image 503 reaching remaining number image 505 ... customer waiting image, 506 ... menu image, 509 ... specific area image, 511 ... second hitting right image, 517 ... specific time saving start image, 518 ... third hitting right image, 524 ... specific time saving remaining number image, 525 ... third 4 right shot image

Claims (1)

a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
production control means for controlling production;
A game machine comprising a first game area and a game area having a second game area different from the first game area,
The game control means is
Controllable between a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode,
It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition,
It is possible to change the pattern according to the result of the determination,
The production control means is
a specific image prompting the shooting of the game ball to the second game area can be displayed on the display means;
The specific images include a first image having a predetermined display size on the display means, and a second image and a third image having display sizes larger than the first image on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that when controlled to the second mode, the first image, the second image, and the third image can be displayed after the first change in the second mode.

Images